Home

TP-Link TL-SL5428E V3 User Guide

1. 2 The aging time should be set over the hello time value otherwise this setting will be invalid and will not take effect 251 15 2 NTDP NTDP Neighbor Topology Discovery Protocol is used for the commander switch to collect NDP information NTDP transmits and forwards NTDP topology collection request based on NDP neighbor information table and collects the NDP information and neighboring connection information of each device in a specific network range The commander switch can collects the specified topology in the network regularly and you can also enable topology collection manually on the commander switch After the commander switch sends out NTDP request packets lots of switches receive the request packets and send out response packets at the same time which may result in network congestion and the commander switch overload To avoid the above problem two time parameters are designed to control the spread speed of NTDP request packets e NTDP hop delay Indicates the time between the switch receiving NTDP request packets and the switch forwarding NTDP request packets for the first time e NTDP port delay Indicates the time between the port forwarding NTDP request packets and its adjacent port forwarding NTDP request packets over The NTDP function can be implemented on Device Table NTDP Summary and NTDP Config pages 15 2 1 Device Table On this page you can view the information of the devices collected by NTDP Meanwh
2. 6 Code The code field identifies the specific type of OAMPDU As mentioned above Information OAMPDU Event Notification OAMPDU and Loopback control OAMPDU are commonly used and their codes are 0x00 0x01 and 0x04 The three OAMPDUs are described as follows 113 e Information OAMPDU Information OAMPDU is used for discovery It transmits the state information of an OAM entity including local remote and organization specific information to another OAM entity and maintains OAM connection e Event Notification OAMPDU Event Notification OAMPDU is used for link monitoring It is sent as an alarm when a failure occurs to the link connecting the local OAM entity and a remote OAM entity e Loopback Control OAMPDU Loopback Control OAMPDU is used to control the remote client s OAM remote loopback state Its Data field consists of a remote loopback command to enable or disable the OAM remote loopback so that the local client can enable disable loopback on the remote OAM entity gt OAM Functions As defined by IEEE 802 3 Clause 57 Ethernet in the First Mile OAM functions include Discovery Link Monitoring Remote Failure Indication and Remote Loopback Discovery Discovery is the first phase of Ethernet OAM During this phase an OAM entity discovers other OAM entities and establishes connections using Information OAMPDUs As for OAM connection an OAM entity can operate in two modes active and passive Only the active OAM ent
3. Notifications ore n A e E ia A e ab 229 13 21 Notification Configs ee e a a a iaa es 229 13 2 2 Taps COMO aiii diana 230 A Alestadie mesancteetbatuhtoseeninuchieatectts OA aa eao AEA Nat 233 13 3 1 History Control oooooococonnncnccnocooconcnconccnnnnnnncnnoncncnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnanannnnnnnnnnencanannnnnces 233 13 3 2 Event CONT Li a de EAE EET esl AEEA anih 234 13 3 3 Alarm Contig it A id 235 Chapter 14 LEDP asics itt otis ie tebe tite ate ai 237 14 1 Basic Contigis cict A A aie ee asta a ates 240 14 41 71 Global Comi vrai iria acacia teas 240 14 12 A a a a a etc seed ea yah 241 14 2 Device AA ae Rat ead oe Cars AA AA 242 14221 Local siii add ia 242 14 2 2 Neighbor Ito iia o aeaaea iaaa 243 14 3 Device StatiStiCS sinaloa 244 Chapter 15 Cluster ni a 247 15 1 NOD LN E A A AAA AAA A AAA 248 15 11 Neighborilnto aa A aara aa poten 248 15 1 2 NDP SuMMary 00 00 2 ceeeece cece cece eeecceeeeeeeeeeeececeaeaeeeeeeeeseecensaeeeeeeeesenesnneeeees 249 15 13 NDP CO scsi 250 15 2 NDA A EA 252 10 21 Device Table iii 252 15 22 NITDP SUMMA dat AA A A 253 15 2 3 NTDP CONO un od 254 153 O A A OA 256 19 3 1 Cluster SUMMA Y ii A anata teen ees 256 15 3 2 Cluster Coi iia titanes 258 15 33 Member Config orar A a ee aaa 261 15 34 Cluster TOPOIOGY isis cistitis te eaaa 262 Chapter 16 Maintenance cccccccceceeeeceeeceeeeeeeceneaeeeeeeeeeeeceneaeeeeeeeeececenceeaeeeeeeeeteecnasaeeeeeeeetoes 2
4. 267 Log Host Select Index Host IP UDP Port Severity Status O a y O 1 0 0 0 0 514 level_6 Disable O 2 0 0 0 0 514 level_6 Disable O 3 0 0 0 0 514 level_6 Disable oO 4 0 0 0 0 514 level_6 Disable Note 1 Up to 4 log hosts are supported 2 There are 8 severity levels marked with values 0 7 The smaller value has the higher priority Figure 16 5 Log Host The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Log Host Index Displays the index of the log host The switch supports 4 log hosts Host IP Configure the IP for the log host UDP Port Displays the UDP port used for receiving sending log information Here we use the standard port 514 Severity Specify the severity level of the log information sent to each log host Only the log with the same or smaller severity level value will be sent to the corresponding log host Status Enable Disable the log host Anote The Log Server software is not provided If necessary please download it on the Internet 16 2 4 Backup Log Backup Log feature enables the system logs saved in the switch to be output as a file for device diagnosis and statistics analysis When a critical error results in the breakdown of the system you can export the logs to get some related important information about the error for device diagnosis after the switch is restarted Choose the menu Maintenance gt Log gt Backup Log to load the following page Backup Log Clickthe button he
5. 4 Configure the port selected in the step above shown as the following Figure 17 5 Configure Bits per second as 38400 Data bits as 8 Parity as None Stop bits as 1 Flow control as None and then click OK 273 COM1 Properties mn Port Settings Bits per second Data bits Parity Stop bits Flow control Restore Defaults me Figure 17 5 Port Settings 3 Download Firmware via bootUtil menu To download firmware to the switch via FTP function you need to enter into the bootUtil menu of the switch and take the following steps 1 Connect the console port of the PC to the console port of the switch and open hyper terminal Connect FTP server to port 1 of the switch 2 Power off and restart the switch When you are prompted that Press CTRL B to enter the bootUtil in the hyper terminal please press CTRL B key to enter into bootUtil menu shown as Figure 17 6 Press CTRL B to enter the bootUtil JE JE E E IEEE HRA IE JE JE JE PE PE AE JE PE PE RAE REE E JE E JE JE PE PE JE JE PE ME HE HE JE E HE TP LINK BOOTUTIL v1 0 0 fe Copyright c 2014 TP LINK Create Date Mar 18 2014 15 48 58 help print this list reboot reboot the system ifconfig config the interface ftp config the remote host ip the user name user password and the image file name upgrade upgrade the firmware start start the system reset reset the system to the factory config Figure 17 6 bootUtil Menu As
6. Log on to the switch via password authentication using SSH and the SSH function is enabled on the switch PuTTY client software is recommended Configuration Procedure Open the software to log on to the interface of PuTTY Enter the IP address of the switch into Host Name field keep the default value 22 in the Port field select SSH as the Connection type ik PuTTY Configuration Category Session Basic options for your PuTTY session Logging Terminal Keyboard Host Name or IP address Port Bell 192 168 0 1 22 Specify the destination you want to connect to Features Connection type Window OBaw O Telnet O Rlogin SSH Serial Appearance Behaviour Translation Saved Sessions Load save or delete a stored session Selection Colours Connection Default Settings pae roxy Telnet Rlogin SSH Kex a Close window on exit a O Always O Never Only on clean exit x11 Click the Open button in the above figure to log on to the switch Enter the login user name and password and then you can continue to configure the switch Y 192 168 0 1 PuTIY as admin icat admin 192 168 0 1 s TL SL5426E gt Application Example 2 for SSH 37 gt Network Requirements 1 Log on to the switch via key authentication using SSH and the SSH function is enabled on the switch 2 PuTTY client software is recommended gt Configuration Procedure 1 Select the key type and key len
7. Select the control mode for users to log on to the Web management page e IP based Select this option to limit the IP range of the users for login e MAC based Select this option to limit the MAC Address of the users for login e Port based Select this option to limit the ports for login These fields can be available for configuration only when IP based mode is selected Only the users within the IP range you set here are allowed for login The field can be available for configuration only when MAC based mode is selected Only the user with this MAC Address you set here is allowed for login The field can be available for configuration only when Port based mode is selected Only the users connected to these ports you set here are allowed for login If you do nothing with the Web management page within the timeout time the system will log out automatically If you want to reconfigure please login again 33 gt Access User Number Number Control Enable Disable the Number Control function Admin Number Enter the maximum number of the users logging on to the Web management page as Admin Guest Number Enter the maximum number of the users logging on to the Web management page as Guest 4 4 2 SSL Config SSL Secure Sockets Layer a security protocol is to provide a secure connection for the application layer protocol e g HTTP communication based on TCP SSL is widely used to secure the data transmission betwee
8. Start End Time Select starting time and ending time of Daylight Saving Time Specify the DST configuration in Date mode This configuration is one off in use Offset Specify the time adding in minutes when Daylight Saving Time comes Start End Time Select starting time and ending time of Daylight Saving Time 1 When the DST is disabled the predefined mode recurring mode and date mode cannot be configured 2 When the DST is enabled the default daylight saving time is of Europe in predefined mode 4 1 5 System IP Each device in the network possesses a unique IP Address You can log on to the Web management page to operate the switch using this IP Address The switch supports three modes to obtain an IP address Static IP DHCP and BOOTP The IP address obtained using a new mode will replace the original IP address On this page you can configure the system IP of the switch Choose the menu System System Info System IP to load the following page 18 IP Config MAC Address 00 00 54 28 C0 69 IP Address Mode Static IP O DHCP O BOOTP Management VLAN h VLAN ID 1 4094 n _appiy_ IP Address 192 168 0 1 z elp Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway Note Changing IP address to a different IP segment will interrupt the network communication so please keep the new IP address in the same IP segment with the local network Figure 4 7 System IP The following entries are displayed on this
9. the configured Protocol VLAN take effect Choose the menu VLAN gt Protocol VLAN gt Port Enable to load the following page Port Enable E 1 O 2 A 7 Ole O13 O14 Ora O20 O25461 1 26 LAG1 Ma O 4 Os O 6 O a O10 O11 O12 O15 O16 O17 Hie O21 122 123 CI 24 LAG1 C27 Das Figure 6 11 Enable Protocol VLAN for Port Select your desired port for VLAN Mapping function All the ports are disabled for VLAN Mapping function by default Configuration Procedure Step Operation Description 1 Set the link type for port Required On the VLAN 802 1Q VLAN gt Port Config page set the link type for the port basing on its connected device 2 Create VLAN Required On the VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page click the Create button to create a VLAN Enter the VLAN ID and the description for the VLAN Meanwhile specify its member ports 3 Create Protocol Template Required On the VLAN gt Protocol VLAN gt Protocol Template page create the Protocol Template before configuring Protocol VLAN 4 Select your desired ports for Required On the VLAN gt Protocol VLAN gt Port Enable Protocol VLAN feature page select and enable the desired ports for Protocol VLAN feature 5 Create Protocol VLAN Required On the VLAN gt Protocol VLAN gt Protocol VLAN page select the protocol type and enter the VLAN ID to create a Protocol VLAN 6 Modify View VLAN Optional On the VLAN gt Protocol VLAN gt Protocol VLA
10. Displays the hop count the switch topology collects Displays the time between the switch receiving NTDP request packets and the switch forwarding NTDP request packets for the first time Displays the time between the port forwarding NTDP request packets and its adjacent port forwarding NTDP request packets over Displays the port number of the switch Displays NTDP status enabled or disabled of the current port On this page you can configure NTDP globally Choose the menu Cluster NTDP NTDP Config to load the following page 254 Global Config NTDP O Enable O Disable NTP Interal Time 1 min 1 60 default 1 NTDP Hops 3 hop 1 16 default 3 NTDP Hop Delay 200 ms 1 1000 default 200 NTDP Port Delay 20 ms 1 100 default 20 Port Config Select Port NTDP Select Port NTDP O 1 Enable O 2 Enable O 3 Enable O 4 Enable O 5 Enable O 6 Enable O td Enable O 8 Enable O g Enable o 10 Enable O 11 Enable O 12 Enable O 13 Enable Fj 14 Enable O 15 Enable g 16 Enable O 17 Enable O 18 Enable O 19 Enable O 20 Enable O 21 Enable O 22 Enable O 23 Enable E 24 Enable O 25 Enable O 26 Enable O 27 Enable Fj 28 Enable Al Figure 15 8 NTDP Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config NTDP Enable Disable NTDP for the switch globally NTDP Interval Time Enter the interval to collect topology information The default is 1 minute NTDP Hops Enter the hop count
11. EAPOL is a client authentication protocol used by this switch to verify the network access rights for any device that is plugged into the switch A user name and password is requested by the switch and then passed to an authentication server e g RADIUS for verification EAPOL is implemented as part of the IEEE 802 1X Port Authentication standard GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP Defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register necessary VLAN members on ports along the Spanning Tree so that VLANs defined in each switch can work automatically over a Spanning Tree network Generic Attribute Registration Protocol GARP The GARP provides a generic attribute dissemination capability that is used by participants in GARP Applications GARP Participants to register and de register attribute values with other GARP Participants within a Bridged LAN The definition of the attribute types the values that they can carry and the semantics that are associated with those values when registered are specific to the operation of the GARP Application concerned 290 Generic Multicast Registration Protocol GMRP GMRP allows network devices to register end stations with multicast groups GMRP requires that any participating network devices or end stations comply with the IEEE 802 1p standard Group Attribute Registration Protocol GARP See Generic Attribute Registration Protocol IEEE 802 1D Specifies a general method
12. Format 225 0 0 1 T End Multicast IP Format 225 0 0 1 IP Range Table IP RangelD Select Select IP Range ID Start Multicast IP End Multicast IP O Total IP Range 0 Figure 9 8 Multicast Filter The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Create IP Range IP Range ID Enter the IP range ID Start Multicast IP Enter start multicast IP of the IP range you set End Multicast IP Enter end multicast IP of the IP range you set IP Range Table IP Range ID Select Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding IP range ID based on the ID number you entered Select Select the desired entry to delete or modify the corresponding IP range It is multi optional IP Range ID Displays IP range ID Start Multicast IP Displays start multicast IP of the IP range End Multicast IP Displays end multicast IP of the IP range 140 9 1 5 Multicast VLAN In old multicast transmission mode when users in different VLANs apply for join the same multicast group the multicast router will duplicate this multicast information and deliver each VLAN owning a receiver one copy This mode wastes a lot of bandwidth The problem above can be solved by configuring a multicast VLAN By adding switch ports to the multicast VLAN and enabling IGMP Snooping you can make users in different VLANs share the same multicast VLAN This saves the bandwidth since multicast streams are transmitted only within the multicast VL
13. Optional Specific 802 1 IEEE 802 3 IETF as well as individual software and equipment vendors to define TLVs that advertise information to remote device Optional TLVs are grouped into two categories including basic management TLV and Organizationally specific TLV 1 Basic Management TLV A set of TLVs considered to be basic to the management of the network stations are required for all LLDP implementations 2 Organizationally Specific TLV Different organizations have defined various TLVs For instance Port VLAN ID TLV Port and Protocol VLAN ID TLV VLAN Name TLV And Protocol Identity TLV are defined by IEEE 802 1 while MAC PHY Configuration Status TLV Power Via MDI TLV Link Aggregation TLV and Maximum Frame TLV are defined by IEEE 802 3 Eno For detailed introduction of TLV please refer to IEEE 802 1AB standard In TP LINK switch the following LLDP optional TLVs are supported TLV Description Port Description TLV The Port Description TLV allows network management to advertise the IEEE 802 LAN station s port description System Capabilities TLV The System Capabilities TLV identifies the primary functions of the system and whether or not these primary functions are enabled System Description TLV The System Description TLV allows network management to advertise the system s description which should include the full name and version identification of the system s hardware typ
14. T Mozilla Firefox TP LINK Log OFF O Turn OFF Computer ES LW Figure C 8 Uninstall TP LINK 802 1X i TpSupplicant gt x Ba dra E TP LINK 802 1x 4 Uninstall TP LINK 802 1x L TpS gt Sna wE 2 Then the following screen will appear If you want to stop the remove process click Cancel TpSupplicant InstallShield Wizard Preparing Setup Please wait while the InstallShield Wizard prepares the setup TpSupplicant Setup is preparing the InstallShield Wizard which will guide you through the rest of the setup process Please wait InstallShield Cancel Figure C 9 Preparing Setup 3 On the continued screen click Yes to remove the application from your PC TpSupplicant InstallShield Wizard Do you want to completely remove the selected application and all of its features Figure C 10 Uninstall the Application 4 Click Finish to complete TpSupplicant InstallShield Wizard Uninstall Complete InstallShield Wizard has finished uninstalling T pSupplicant Back Cancel Figure C 11 Uninstall Complete 1 3 Configuration 1 After completing installation double click the icon a to run the TP LINK 802 1X Client Software The following screen will appear 286 TP LINK 802 1 Client TP LINK Name Password M Save password Language English y Network Atheros AR8151 PCI E Gigabit Ether y Connectie Properties P Exit Figure C 12 TP L
15. The System module is mainly for system configuration of the switch including four submenus System Info User Management System Tools and Access Security 4 1 System Info The System Info mainly for basic properties configuration can be implemented on System Summary Device Description System Time Daylight Saving Time System IP and System IPv6 pages 4 1 1 System Summary On this page you can view the port connection status and the system information The port status diagram shows the working status of 24 10 100Mbps RJ45 ports 4 10 100 1000Mbps RJ45 ports and 2 SFP ports of the switch Ports 1 to 24 are 10 100Mbps ports Ports 25 26 and 27T 28T are 10 100 1000Mbps ports among which ports 27T and 28T are Combo ports with SFP ports labeled 27F and 28F Choose the menu System System Info System Summary to load the following page O e 10 20 ieee Pen fn fn ei ef ef 26F 2TF 26F E E EE a 4 13 15 a t 2123 System Info System Description 24 Port 10 100Mbps 4 Port Gigabit L2 Managed Switch Device Name TL 5L5428E Device Location SHENZHEN System Contact wwwtp link com Hardware Version TL SL5428E 3 0 Firmware Version 3 0 0 Build 20140224 Rel 36216 IP Address 192 168 0 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway MAC Address D0 04 EB 13 12 C3 System Time 2006 01 02 06 21 54 Run Time D day 22 hour 22 min 11 sec Figure 4 1 Sy
16. 5 1 1 Port Config On this page you can configure the basic parameters for the ports When the port is disabled the packets on the port will be discarded Disabling the port which is vacant for a long time can reduce the power consumption effectively And you can enable the port when it is in need The parameters will affect the working mode of the port please set the parameters appropriate to your needs Choose the menu Switching Port Port Config to load the following page Port Config Pot Select Port Description Status Speed and Duplex Flow Control o Disable v 10MHD v Disable w O 1 Enable Auto Disable O 2 Enable Auto Disable oO 3 Enable Auto Disable o 4 Enable Auto Disable Oo 5 Enable Auto Disable Oo 6 Enable Auto Disable O 7 Enable Auto Disable O 8 Enable Auto Disable O g Enable Auto Disable Oo 10 Enable Auto Disable Oo 11 Enable Auto Disable Oo 12 Enable Auto Disable O 13 Enable Auto Disable O 14 Enable Auto Disable O 15 Enable Auto Disable Note The Port Description should be not more than 16 characters Figure 5 1 Port Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Port Config Port Select Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Select Select the desired port for configuration It is multi optional Port Displays the port number Description Give a description to the port for identification 42 Status Allows
17. APs y VLAN ID O QoS Remark DSCP Local Priority Figure 11 11 Action Create The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Create Action Select Policy Select the name of the policy Select ACL Select the ACL for configuration in the policy 183 S Mirror S Condition Redirect QoS Remark Select S Mirror to mirror the data packets in the policy to the specific port Select S Condition to limit the transmission rate of the data packets in the policy e Rate Specify the forwarding rate of the data packets those match the corresponding ACL e Out of Band Specify the disposal way of the data packets those are transmitted beyond the rate Select Redirect to change the forwarding direction of the data packets in the policy e Destination Port Forward the data packets those match the corresponding ACL to the specific port e VLAN ID Forward the data packets those match the corresponding ACL in the corresponding VLAN Select QoS Remark to forward the data packets based on the QoS settings e DSCP Specify the DSCP region for the data packets those match the corresponding ACL e Local Priority Specify the local priority for the data packets those match the corresponding ACL 11 4 Policy Binding Policy Binding function can have the policy take its effect on a specific port VLAN The policy will take effect only when it is bound to a port VLAN In the same way the port VLAN w
18. Configure voice VLAN to transmit voice data stream within the specified VLAN so as to ensure the transmission priority of voice data stream and voice quality Chapter 11 ACL This module is used to configure match rules and process policies of packets to filter packets in order to control the access of the illegal users to the network Here mainly introduces e Time Range Configure the effective time for ACL rules e ACL Config ACL rules e Policy Config Configure operation policies e Policy Binding Bind the policy to a port VLAN to take its effect on a specific port VLAN Chapter Introduction Chapter 12 Network Security This module is used to configure the multiple protection measures for the network security Here mainly introduces e IP MAC Binding Bind the IP address MAC address VLAN ID and the connected Port number of the Host together e ARP Inspection Configure ARP inspection feature to prevent the network from ARP attacks e IP Source Guard Configure IP source guard feature to filter IP packets in the LAN e DoS Defend Configure DoS defend feature to prevent DoS attack e 802 1X Configure common access control mechanism for LAN ports to solve mainly authentication and security problems e PPPoE Config Configure the PPPoE Circuit ID Insertion function to support the authentication authorization and accounting AAA access requests on an Ethernet interface Chapter 13 SNMP
19. HyperTerminal File Edit View Call Transfer Help ia 2s me TL SL5428E gt enable TL SL5428EHshow ipv6 interface vlan 1 Ylanl is up line protocol is up IPv6 is enable Link Local Address fe80 20a ebff fe13 12c3 NOR1 Global Address RA Enable Global Address DHCPv6 Disable Global unicast address es Joined group address es ff02 1 ff13 12c3 ICMP error messages limited to one every 100 milliseconds ICMP redirects are enable MTU is 1500 bytes ND DAD is enable number of DAD attempts 1 ND retrans timer is 1000 000000 milliseconds ND reachable time is 30 000000 seconds TL SL5428EH Connected 0 00 45 Auto detect 38400 8 N 1 Figure 3 4 The Switch s Link local Address 4 Type in the switch s link local address with square brackets in the address field of the web browser Then press the Enter key Address e080 20a ebff fe13 12c3 y 5 After a moment a login window will appear as shown in Figure 3 5 Enter admin for the User Name and Password both in lower case letters Then click the Login button or press the Enter key 11 Tips After logging in to the switch you can add a global IPv6 address to your switch manually in 4 1 6 System IPv6 Then you can configure your PC s global IPv6 address in the same subnet and login to the switch via its global IPv6 address For the detailed instructions please refer to Appendix B User Name admin Password Figure 3 5 Logi
20. In this mode a port cannot register deregister a VLAN dynamically It only propagates static VLAN information e Forbidden In this mode a port cannot register deregister VLANs It only propagates VLAN 1 information 90 LeaveAll Timer Join Timer Leave Timer LAG Mote Once the LeaveAll Timer is set the port with GVRP enabled can send a LeaveAll message after the timer times out so that other GARP ports can re register all the attribute information After that the LeaveAll timer will start to begin a new cycle The LeaveAll Timer ranges from 1000 to 30000 centiseconds To guarantee the transmission of the Join messages a GARP port sends each Join message two times The Join Timer is used to define the interval between the two sending operations of each Join message The Join Timer ranges from 20 to 1000 centiseconds Once the Leave Timer is set the GARP port receiving a Leave message will start its Leave timer and deregister the attribute information if it does not receive a Join message again before the timer times out The Leave Timer ranges from 60 to 3000 centiseconds Displays the LAG to which the port belongs LeaveAll Timer gt 10 Leave Timer Leave Timer gt 2 Join Timer Configuration Procedure Step Operation Description 1 Set the link type for port Required On the VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt Port Config page set the link type of the port to be TRUNK 2 Enable GVRP function Required On
21. Port 1 Port 1 Port 1 Port 1 Port 1 Port 1 v Sample Type Absolute v Absolute Absolute Absolute Absolute Absolute Absolute Absolute Absolute Absolute Absolute Absolute Absolute Arel Rising Event ien Falling Event Alarm Type interval sec Owner Status v v All v Disable v 100 1 100 1 All 1800 monitor Disable 100 1 100 1 All 1800 monitor Disable 100 1 100 1 All 1800 monitor Disable 100 1 100 1 All 1800 monitor Disable 100 1 100 1 All 1800 monitor Disable 100 1 100 1 All 1800 monitor Disable 100 1 100 1 All 1800 monitor Disable 100 1 100 1 All 1800 monitor Disable 100 1 100 1 All 1800 monitor Disable 100 1 100 1 All 1800 monitor Disable 100 1 100 1 All 1800 monitor Disable 100 1 100 1 All 1800 monitor Disable Apply Help Figure 13 12 Alarm Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Alarm Table Select Index Variable Port Sample Type Select the desired entry for configuration Displays the index number of the entry Select the alarm variables from the pull down list Select the port on which the Alarm entry acts Specify the sampling method for the selected variable and comparing the value against the thresholds e Absolute Compares the values directly with the thresholds 235 at the end of the sampling interval e Delta Subtracts the last sampled value from the current value The difference in the values is compared to the threshold Rising Threshold Enter the
22. Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP The application protocol in the Internet suite of protocols which offers network management services Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP SNTP allows a device to set its internal clock based on periodic updates from a Network Time Protocol NTP server Updates can be requested from a specific NTP server or can be received via broadcasts sent by NTP servers Spanning Tree Algorithm STA A technology that checks your network for any loops A loop can often occur in complicated or backup linked network systems Spanning Tree detects and directs data along the shortest available path maximizing the performance and efficiency of the network Telnet Defines a remote communication facility for interfacing to a terminal device over TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP Protocol suite that includes TCP as the primary transport protocol and IP as the network layer protocol Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP A TCP IP protocol commonly used for software downloads User Datagram Protocol UDP UDP provides a datagram mode for packet switched communications It uses IP as the underlying transport mechanism to provide access to IP like services UDP packets are delivered just like IP packets connection less datagrams that may be discarded before reaching their targets UDP is useful when TCP would be too complex too slow or just unnecessary Virtual LAN VLAN A Vi
23. The common cases incurring the illegal DHCP servers are the following two 1 _ It s common that the illegal DHCP server is manually configured by the user by mistake 2 Hacker exhausted the IP addresses of the normal DHCP server and then pretended to be a legal DHCP server to assign the IP addresses and the other parameters to Clients For example hacker used the pretended DHCP server to assign a modified DNS server address to users so as to induce the users to the evil financial website or electronic trading website and cheat the users of their accounts and passwords The following figure illustrates the DHCP Cheating Attack implementation procedure 195 Switch with DHCP Snooping Function disabled Illegal DHCP Response Packets DHCP Client lllegal DHCP Server DHCP Server Figure 12 7 DHCP Cheating Attack Implementation Procedure DHCP Snooping feature only allows the port connected to the DHCP Server as the trusted port to forward DHCP packets and thereby ensures that users get proper IP addresses DHCP Snooping is to monitor the process of the Host obtaining the IP address from DHCP server and record the IP address MAC address VLAN and the connected Port number of the Host for automatic binding The bound entry can cooperate with the ARP Inspection IP Source Guard and the other security protection features DHCP Snooping feature prevents the network from the DHCP Server Cheating Attack by discarding the DHCP packets on th
24. This module is used to configure SNMP function to provide a management frame to monitor and maintain the network devices Here mainly introduces e SNMP Config Configure global settings of SNMP function e Notification Configure notification function for the management station to monitor and process the events e RMON Configure RMON function to monitor network more efficiently Chapter 14 LLDP This module is used to configure LLDP function to provide information for SNMP applications to simplify troubleshooting Here mainly introduces e Basic Config Configure the LLDP parameters of the device e Device Info View the LLDP information of the local device and its neighbors e Device Statistics View the LLDP statistics of the local device Chapter 15 Cluster This module is used to configure cluster function to central manage the scattered devices in the network Here mainly introduces e NDP Configure NDP function to get the information of the directly connected neighbor devices e NTDP Configure NTDP function for the commander switch to collect NDP information e Cluster Configure cluster function to establish and maintain cluster Chapter Introduction Chapter 16 Maintenance This module is used to assemble the commonly used system tools to manage the switch Here mainly introduces e System Monitor Monitor the memory and CPU of the switch e Log View configuration parameters on
25. address IP Protocol Select IP protocol contained in the rule Select ICMP Configure the predefined ICMP type and code ICMP Type Configure the predefined ICMP type ICMP Code Configure the predefined ICMP code TCP Flag Configure TCP flag when TCP is selected from the pull down list of IP Protocol 181 S Port Configure TCP IP source port contained in the rule when TCP UDP is selected from the pull down list of IP Protocol D Port Configure TCP IP destination port contained in the rule when TCP UDP is selected from the pull down list of IP Protocol DSCP Enter the DSCP information contained in the rule IP ToS Enter the IP ToS contained in the rule IP Pre Enter the IP Precedence contained in the rule Time Range Select the time range for the rule to take effect 11 3 Policy Config A Policy is used to control the data packets those match the corresponding ACL rules by configuring ACLs and actions together for effect The operations here include stream mirror stream condition QoS remarking and redirect The Policy Config can be implemented on Policy Summary Police Create and Action Create pages 11 3 1 Policy Summary On this page you can view the ACL and the corresponding operations in the policy Choose the menu ACL gt Policy Config Policy Summary to load the following page Select Options Select a Policy v Action Table Select Index ACL ID S Mirror S Condition Redirect QoS Remark Operation Del
26. based on the port number you entered Select the desired port to be a member of VLAN or leave it blank It s multi optional Displays the port number Displays the Link Type of the port It can be reset on Port Config screen Select the Egress Rule for the VLAN port member The default egress rule is UNTAG e TAG All packets forwarded by the port are tagged The packets contain VLAN information e UNTAG Packets forwarded by the port are untagged Displays the LAG to which the port belongs Before creating the 802 1Q VLAN please acquaint yourself with all the devices connected to the switch in order to configure the ports properly Choose the menu VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt Port Config to load the following page 66 VLAN Port Config Select Port O o 1 Fj 2 P 3 Fj 4 Fj 5 F 6 F 7 oO 8 Fi g g 10 Fj 11 Fj 12 d 13 Fj 14 a ME Link Type PYID LAG VLAN ACCESS vw A ACCESS 1 Detail A ACCESS 1 Detail ACCESS 1 Detail ACCESS 1 Detail ACCESS 1 Detail ACCESS 1 Detail ACCESS 1 Detail ACCESS 1 Detail ACCESS 1 Detail ACCESS 1 Detail ACCESS 1 Detail ACCESS 1 Detail ACCESS 1 Detail ACCESS 1 Detail ES Figure 6 5 802 1Q VLAN Port Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt VLAN Port Config Port Select Select Port Link Type PVID LAG VLAN Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding entry based on the port number you entered Select th
27. mac_a The Private VLAN packet forwarding process here we take traffic transmission for PC2 based on the figure above is illustrated as follows 1 2 9 PC2 sends out its first upstream packet with the source MAC as mac_2 and the destination MAC as mac_a This packet is untagged When the host port Port2 on the switch receives this packet it adds a default VLAN ID 2 to this packet and learns its source MAC address The MAC address entry mac_2 VLAN2 Port2 is created indicating that the egress port for the traffic with destination MAC address mac_2 and VLAN ID 2 is Port2 According to the MAC address duplication this MAC address entry is copied to VLAN 5 and the switch adds the MAC address entry mac_2 VLAN5 Port2 to its address table As mac_a is not in the MAC address table of the switch the switch will broadcast this packet in VLAN 2 As the switch has performed the port configuration synchronization Port5 can receive this packet from VLAN 2 and forward it to the Router untagged The Router responds to the switch upon receiving this packet When the promiscuous port Port5 receives the response packet it tags this packet a default VLAN ID 5 and learns the MAC address entry mac_a VLAN5 Port5 According to the MAC address duplication this MAC address entry is copied to VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 and the switch adds two more MAC address entries mac_a VLAN2 Port5 and mac_a VLAN3 Port5 to its address table The switch looks up
28. node is simultaneously verifying the uniqueness of the same address that node also returns a neighbor solicitation message If no neighbor advertisement messages are received in response to the neighbor solicitation message and no neighbor solicitation messages are received from other nodes that are attempting to verify the same tentative address the node that sent the original neighbor solicitation message considers the tentative link local address to be unique and assigns the address to the interface Every IPv6 unicast address global or link local must be verified for uniqueness on the link however until the uniqueness of the link local address is verified duplicate address detection is not performed on any other IPv6 addresses associated with the link local address IPv6 Router Advertisement Message Router advertisement RA messages which have a value of 134 in the Type field of the ICMP packet header are periodically sent out each configured interface of an IPv6 router RA messages typically include the following information e One or more onlink IPv6 prefixes that nodes on the local link can use to automatically configure their IPv6 addresses e Lifetime information for each prefix included in the advertisement 24 e Sets of flags that indicate the type of autoconfiguration stateless or stateful that can be completed e Default router information whether the device sending the advertisement should be used as a de
29. the bigger value the higher priority Figure 10 7 DSCP Priority The following entries are displayed on this screen gt DSCP Priority Config DSCP Priority Enable Disable DSCP Priority 163 gt Priority Level DSCP Indicates the priority determined by the DSCP region of IP datagram It ranges from 0 to 63 Priority Level Indicates the priority level the packets with tag are mapped to The priority levels are labeled as TCO TC1 TC2 and TC3 Anote To complete QoS function configuration you have to go to the Schedule Mode page to select a schedule mode after the configuration is finished on this page Configuration Procedure Step Operation Description 1 Configure the mapping Required On QoS gt DiffServ DSCP Priority page relation between the DSCP enable DSCP Priority and configure the mapping priority and TC relation between the DSCP priority and TC 2 Select a schedule mode Required On QoS DiffServ gt Schedule Mode page select a schedule mode 10 1 3 802 1P CoS Mapping On this page you can configure the mapping relation between the 802 1P priority tag id CoS id and the TC id 802 1P gives the Pri field in 802 1Q tag a recommended definition This field ranging from 0 7 is used to divide packets into 8 priorities 802 1P Priority is enabled by default so the packets with 802 1Q tag are mapped to different priority levels based on 802 1P priority mode but the untagge
30. 0 65535 Figure 7 7 Region Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Region Config Region Name Create a name for MST region identification using up to 32 characters Revision Enter the revision from 0 to 65535 for MST region identification 7 3 2 Instance Config Instance Configuration a property of MST region is used to describe the VLAN to Instance mapping configuration You can assign VLAN to different instances appropriate to your needs Every instance is a VLAN group independent of other instances and CIST Choose the menu Spanning Tree MSTP Instance gt Instance Config to load the following page Instance Table Instance ID Select Instance Status Priority VLAN ID B E 1 Disable 32768 Clear E 2 Disable 32768 Clear E 3 Disable 32768 Clear C 4 Disable 32768 Clear E 5 Disable 32768 Clear E 6 Disable 32768 Clear E 7 Disable 32768 Clear E 8 Disable 32768 Clear CIST Enable 32768 1 4094 Apply WLAN Instance Mapping VLAN ID 01 4094 Instance ID _ 0 8 Dis the cist Apply Note The format of input VLAN ID should be like 1 3 4 7 11 30 in the range from 1 to 4094 Figure 7 8 Instance Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Instance Table Instance ID Select Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding Instance ID based on the ID number you entered 103 Select Instance Status Priority VLAN ID Clear Select
31. 5 Application Example for MAC VLAN ooococcinnnoccncccnncccnnnnnnonccnnncocnnnannnnncnnnnennanannrnncnnnnno 75 6 6 Application Example for Protocol VLAN ccceeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeseeneeeeeetnaeeeeeteneeeeees 76 A T a OA A EE its seecuunm hated tesa in ETE EE EEATT 78 ert MEIC ONG acar aa e a AS 79 6 2 VEAN MappIN O rea A A inde 79 6 7 3 Port Enable sesir o TA Aa ee aE 80 6 9 Private VLAN cuco ii 82 6 8 1 PVLAN COMO circo a Pe aa a A a aE aE ETa 85 6 8 2 Port CONTIG errnet fant raaa a a a aaea aut Aaaeeeaa AES 86 6 95 OVRE aaea a a a a aaa a ect neha tiaetaa a 88 6 10 Application Example for Private VLAN oooinnoccccccncccccconnononccnnococinncnnnnncononnnnnnannrnncccnnno 91 Chapter Spanning Tre Goiain A a va ine E a ve i nls e 94 KAS 2S TPE CONIOu nane a a a Mate Docks a aaa 98 E STP CONN oeei aaa e eeen eaaa eaea claret aaaea KEKEE ara AEA EATEN 98 CAG STO SUMA Y A A Mr E ates EG 100 A ERE A EEEE A E E E Raa ea Ca a gs 101 TS MSTPAOSIANCS Di AA a eee a is 102 7 3 1 Region Cocinar re eiai aeaa A E EAEE EAEE PEE EERDE 102 7 3 2 Instance Corti ic 103 7 3 3 Instance Port Configi neriie anaa aia ae a aia iia Ae 104 TAS FEST SOU y ianea aa aae r satan E aa AA A EaR cots a EAE EAA 106 7 4 1 Port Protect siii e ar e a ian e id 106 TAZ TCPren e ee aan aeeai eter eed nee es 108 7 5 Application Example for STP Function 0 ccccccccceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneaeeeeeeeesesesnseneeees 109 Chapter 8 EthemetO
32. 56 8A 4C 71 5 Configure MAC On VLAN gt MAC VLAN gt MAC VLAN page create MAC VLAN10 with VLAN 20 the MAC address as 00 19 56 82 3B 70 6 Port Enable Required On the VLAN MAC VLAN gt Port Enable page select and enable Port 21 and Port 22 for MAC VLAN feature e Configure switch C Step Operation Description 1 Configure the Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt Port Config page configure the Link Type of the link type of Port 2 and Port 3 as GENERAL and configure the link type ports of Port 4 and Port 5 as ACCESS 2 Create VLAN10 Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page create a VLAN with its VLAN ID as 10 owning Port 2 Port 3 and Port 5 3 Create VLAN20 Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page create a VLAN with its VLAN ID as 20 owning Port 2 Port 3 and Port 4 6 6 Application Example for Protocol VLAN gt Network Requirements e Department A is connected to the company LAN via Port12 of switch A e Department A has IP host and AppleTalk host 76 e IP host in VLAN10 is served by IP server while AppleTalk host is served by AppleTalk server e Switch B is connected to IP server and AppleTalk server gt Network Diagram IP Server AppleTalk Server Switch B Switch A Port Fi 11 AppleTalk host eo ee IP host gt Configuration Procedure e Configure switch A Step Operation Description 1 Confi
33. 802 1X function globally 4 Configure the parameters of Required On the Network Security 802 1X Radius the authentication server Server page configure the parameters of the server 5 Configure the 802 1X for the Required On the Network Security 802 1X Port port Config page configure the 802 1X feature for the port of the switch basing on the actual network 12 6 PPPoE Config gt PPPoE Circuit ID Tag Overview In the ATM based network the BRAS Broadband Remote Access Server vendors need to acquire the unique information from DSL digital subscriber line for RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service authentication and accounting processes The PPPoE Circuit ID Insertion feature uses a PPPoE intermediate agent function on the DSLAM The DSLAM Digital Subscriber Line Multiplexer attaches a tag to the PPPoE discovery packets This tag is called the PPPoE Vendor Specific tag and it contains a unique line identifier The BRAS receives the tagged packet decodes the tag and uses the Circuit ID field of that tag as a NAS Port ID attribute in the RADIUS authentication packet for PPP authentication and AAA authentication authorization and accounting access requests In this Chapter the switch will work as a DSLAM 217 gt PPPoE Circuit ID Tag Operation Process The general PPPoE Circuit ID Tag work process is shown below ws PADI PADI with Circuit ID Tag __PADO without
34. Address Table contains the port based MAC address information which is the base for the switch to forward packets quickly The entries in the Address Table can be updated by auto learning or configured manually Most the entries are generated and updated by auto learning In the stable networks the static MAC address entries can facilitate the switch to reduce broadcast packets and enhance the efficiency of packets forwarding remarkably The address filtering feature allows the switch to filter the undesired packets and forbid its forwarding so as to improve the network security The types and the features of the MAC Address Table are listed as the following 55 Being kept after reboot Relationship between Type Configuration Way Aging out if the configuration is the bound MAC saved address and the port Static Manually configuring No Yes The bound MAC Address Table address can not be learned by the other ports in the same VLAN Dynamic Automatically Yes No The bound MAC Address Table learning address can be learned by the other ports in the same VLAN Filtering Manually configuring No Yes Address Table Table 5 1 Types and features of Address Table This function includes four submenus Address Table Static Address Dynamic Address and Filtering Address 5 4 1 Address Table On this page you can view all the information of the Address Table Choose the menu Switching gt MAC Address Address
35. Attack Types 12 4 1 DoS Defend On this page you can enable the DoS Defend type appropriate to your need Choose the menu Network Security DoS Defend DoS Defend to load the following page Global Configure DoS Defend Enable Disable Ping Limiting SYN Limiting Defend Table Select Defend Type Attack Count Land Attack Scan SYNFIN xmascan NULL Scan SYN sPort less 1024 Blat Attack Ping Flooding SYNISYN ACK Flooding winNuke Attack Smurt Attack Ping Of Death Figure 12 17 DoS Defend The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Defend Config DoS Defend Allows you to Enable Disable DoS Defend function Ping Limiting Specify the transmission rate of the Ping packets when the Defend Type Ping Flooding is enabled SYN Limiting Specify the transmission rate of the SYN SYN ACK packets when the Defend Type SYN SYN ACK Flooding is enabled gt Defend Table Select Select the entry to enable the corresponding Defend Type 208 Defend Type Displays the Defend Type name Attack Count Displays the count of the corresponding attack 12 4 2 DoS Detect DoS Detect functions to detect the details of the DoS attack packets based on which you can quickly locate the attacker in the local network Choose the menu Network Security DoS Defend DoS Detect to load the following page Detect Config Detect Time 1 sec a Detect Result Port Attack Type Attack Count Figure 12 18 DoS Detect T
36. Circuit ID Tag PADO PADR PADR with Circuit ID Tag PADS PADS without Circuit ID Tag _ Figure 12 25 PPPoE Discovery Process The PPPoE discovery process is illustrated below AOUN a oND The client sends PADI PPPoE Active Discovery Initiation packets to the switch The switch intercepts PADI packets and inserts a unique Circuit ID tag to them The switch forwards the PADI packets with Circuit ID tag to the BRAS The BRAS responses with the PADO PPPoE Active Discovery Offer packets after receiving the PADI packets Upon receiving the PADO packets with the Circuit ID tag the switch will remove the tag and send the packets to the client The switch will forward the PADO packets without the Circuit ID tag directly The client sends PADR PPPoE Active Discovery Request packets according to the process The switch intercepts PADR packets and inserts a unique Circuit ID tag to them The switch forwards the PADR packets with Circuit ID tag to the BRAS The BRAS processes the received Circuit ID tag in the PADR packets and extracts the Circuit ID field to the RADIUS for accounting And the BRAS allocates a PPP process session ID for this PPP session The BRAS responses with the PADS PPPoE Active Discovery Session confirmation packets after receiving the PADR packets Upon receiving the PADS packets with the Circuit ID tag the switch will remove the tag and send the packets to the client The swit
37. Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to Anote 1 Configure the ports connected directly to terminals as edge ports and enable the BPDU protection function as well This not only enables these ports to transit to forwarding state rapidly but also secures your network All the links of ports in a LAG can be configured as point to point links 3 When the link of a port is configured as a point to point link the spanning tree instances owning this port are configured as point to point links If the physical link of a port is not a point to point link and you forcibly configure the link as a point to point link temporary loops may be incurred 7 3 MSTP Instance MSTP combines VLANs and spanning tree together via VLAN to instance mapping table VLAN to spanning tree mapping By adding MSTP instances it binds several VLANs to an instance to realize the load balance based on instances Only when the switches have the same MST region name MST region revision and VLAN to Instance mapping table the switches can be regarded as in the same MST region The MSTP Instance function can be implemented on Region Config Instance Config and Instance Port Config pages 7 3 1 Region Config On this page you can configure the name and revision of the MST region Choose the menu Spanning Tree MSTP Instance Region Config to load the following page 102 Region Config Region Name 00 00 54 28 c0 69 a os Apply Revision lo
38. HostA Host B IP 192 168 0 101 IP 192 168 0 102 MAC 00 00 00 11 11 11 MAC 00 00 00 22 22 22 3 Host A updates its ARP table The original ARP entry of Host B A 192 168 0 102 00 00 00 22 22 22 lt j is updated to 192 168 0 102 00 00 00 33 33 33 4 Host B updates its ARP table The original ARP entry of Host A 192 168 0 101 00 00 00 11 11 11 is updated to 192 168 0 101 00 00 00 33 33 33 1 Attacker sends the fake ARP packets of Host B with a forged MAC address 00 00 00 33 33 33 to Host A 2 Attacker sends the fake ARP packets of Host A with a forged MAC address 00 00 00 33 33 33 to Host B Attacker IP 192 168 0 103 MAC 00 00 00 33 33 33 Figure 12 12 Man In The Middle Attack Suppose there are three Hosts in LAN connected with one another through a switch Host A IP address is 192 168 0 101 MAC address is 00 00 00 11 11 11 Host B IP address is 192 168 0 102 MAC address is 00 00 00 22 22 22 Attacker IP address is 192 168 0 103 MAC address is 00 00 00 33 33 33 1 First the attacker sends the false ARP response packets 2 Upon receiving the ARP response packets Host A and Host B updates the ARP table of their own 3 When Host A communicates with Host B it will send the packets to the false destination MAC address i e to the attacker according to the updated ARP table 4 After receiving the communication packets between Host A and Host B the attacker processes and forwards the packets to the
39. Mode Strict Priority Mode In this mode the queue with higher priority will occupy the whole bandwidth Packets in the queue with lower priority are sent only when the queue with higher priority is empty The switch has four egress queues labeled as TCO TC1 TC2 and TC3 In SP mode their priorities increase in order TC3 has the highest priority The disadvantage of SP queue is that if there are packets in the queues with higher priority for a long time in congestion the packets in the queues with lower priority will be starved to death because they are not served 160 Packets are mapped to different priority queues Ga TO Ne l H Packets in TC3 are Packets sent via this interface i i ad Sosa LY i ii ss 3 E as Saa By co o Packets y classification SP Mode Figure 10 4 SP Mode WRR Mode Weight Round Robin Mode In this mode packets in all the queues are sent in order based on the weight value for each queue and every queue can be assured of a certain service time The weight value indicates the occupied proportion of the resource WRR queue overcomes the disadvantage of SP queue that the packets in the queues with lower priority can not get service for a long time In WRR mode though the queues are scheduled in order the service time for each queue is not fixed that is to say if a queue is empty the next queue will be scheduled In this way the bandwidth resources are made full use of The default wei
40. OUI Config The switch supports OUI creation and adds the MAC address of the special voice device to the OUI table of the switch The switch determines whether a received packet is a voice packet by checking its OUI address The switch analyzes the received packets If the packets are recognized as voice packets the access port will be automatically added to the Voice VLAN Choose the menu QoS gt Voice VLAN OUI Config to load the following page Create QUI our Format 00 00 00 00 00 01 Mask FF FF FF 00 00 00 Default FF FF FF 00 00 00 Description 16 characters maximum OUI Table Select oul Mask Description oO 00 01 e3 00 00 00 ff ff ff 00 00 00 Siemens Phone dl 00 03 6b 00 00 00 ff ff ff 00 00 00 Cisco Phone Fj 00 04 0da 00 00 00 ff ff ff 00 00 00 Avaya Phone oO 00 60 b9 00 00 00 ff ff ff 00 00 00 Philips Phone Fj DO d0 1e 00 00 00 ff ff ff 00 00 00 Pingtel Phone Fj 00 e0 75 00 00 00 ff ff ff 00 00 00 PolyCom Phone O 00 e0 bb 00 00 00 ff ff ff 00 00 00 3Com Phone All Figure 10 14 OUI Configuration The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Create OUI OUI Enter the OUI address of the voice device Mask Enter the OUI address mask of the voice device Description Give a description to the OUI for identification gt OUI Table Select Select the desired entry to view the detailed information OUI Displays the OUI address of the voice device Mask Displays the OUI address mask of
41. Table to load the following page Search Option MAC Address Format 00 00 00 00 00 01 C VLAN ID O Port O Type All Address Table MAC Address 6C 62 6D F5 9D 86 Total MAC Address 1 Note 1 4094 Static Dynamic Filtering WLAN ID Port Type 1 6 Dynamic Aging Status Aging The maximum ofthe displayed entries is 100 by default please click the Search button to get the complete address entries Figure 5 12 Address Table The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Search Option MAC Address VLAN ID Port 56 Enter the MAC address of your desired entry Enter the VLAN ID of your desired entry Select the corresponding port number of your desired entry Type Select the type of your desired entry e All This option allows the address table to display all the address entries e Static This option allows the address table to display the static address entries only e Dynamic This option allows the address table to display the dynamic address entries only e Filtering This option allows the address table to display the filtering address entries only gt Address Table MAC Address Displays the MAC address learned by the switch VLAN ID Displays the corresponding VLAN ID of the MAC address Port Displays the corresponding Port number of the MAC address Type Displays the Type of the MAC address Aging Status Displays the Aging status of the MAC address 5 4 2 St
42. User is classified to the corresponding Group according to its Group Name Security Model and Security Level Select the Security Model for the User Select the Security Level for the SNMP v3 User Select the Authentication Mode for the SNMP v3 User e None No authentication method is used e MD5 The port authentication is performed via HMAC MD5 algorithm e SHA The port authentication is performed via SHA Secure Hash Algorithm This authentication mode has a higher security than MD5 mode Enter the password for authentication Select the Privacy Mode for the SNMP v3 User e None No privacy method is used e DES DES encryption method is used Enter the Privacy Password Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding User It is multi optional Displays the name of the User Displays the User Type Displays the Group Name of the User Displays the Security Model of the User Displays the Security Level of the User Displays the Authentication Mode of the User Displays the Privacy Mode of the User Click the Edit button to modify the Group of the User and click the Modify button to apply Anote The SNMP User and its Group should have the same Security Model and Security Level 226 13 1 5 SNMP Community SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c adopt community name authentication The community name can limit access to the SNMP agent from SNMP network management station functioning as a password If SNMP v1 or SNM
43. VLAN When voice VLAN is enabled for a port you can configure its security mode to filter data stream If security mode is enabled the port just forwards voice packets and discards other packets whose source MAC addresses do not match OUI addresses If security mode is not enabled the port forwards all the packets Security Mode Packet Type Processing Mode UNTAG packet When the source MAC address of the packet is the OUI f Jaddress that can be identified the packet can be Packet with voice transmitted in the voice VLAN Otherwise the packet will Enable VLAN TAG be discarded The processing mode for the device to deal with the packet fees otier is determined by whether the port permits the VLAN or not independent of voice VLAN security mode UNTAG packet Do not check the source MAC address of the packet and all Packet with voice the packets can be transmitted in the voice VLAN Disable VLAN TAG The processing mode for the device to deal with the packet is determined by whether the port permits the VLAN or not independent of voice VLAN security mode Packet with other VLAN TAG Table 10 3 Security mode and packets processing mode 170 Anat Don t transmit voice stream together with other business packets in the voice VLAN except for some special requirements The Voice VLAN function can be implemented on Global Config Port Config and OUI Config pages 10 3 1 Glob
44. VLAN VPN function is implemented on the VPN Config VLAN Mapping and Port Enable pages 6 7 1 VPN Config This page allows you to enable the VPN function adjust the global TPID for VLAN VPN packets and enable the VPN up link port When VPN mode is enabled the switch will add a tag to the received tagged packet basing on the VLAN mapping entries Choose the menu VLAN gt VLAN VPN gt VPN Config to load the following page Global Config VPN Mode O Enable Disable Global TPID 8100 4 Hex integers Apply VPN Up link Ports O14 F 2 O 3 O 4 O 5 O 6 Fj 7 O e O a C10 O11 O12 013 114 015 016 O17 O18 O19 O20 021 122 023 C 24 LAG1 O 25 LAG1 Ozeaci 027 O28 Figure 6 12 VPN Global Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config VPN Mode Allows you to Enable Disable the VLAN VPN function Global TPID Enter the global TPID Tag protocol identifier gt VPN Up link Ports Select the desired port as the VPN Up link port It s required to set the port connected to the operators backbone networks to be up link port Anote If VPN mode is enabled please create VLAN Mapping entries on the VLAN Mapping function page 6 7 2 VLAN Mapping VLAN Mapping function allows the VLAN TAG of the packets to be replaced with the new VLAN TAG according to the VLAN Mapping entries And these packets can be forwarded in the new VLAN If VLAN VPN function is enabled a received packet already carrying a VLAN tag wil
45. a string length TLV information string 7 bits 9 bits 0 lt n lt 511 octets TLV header Each TLV is identified by a unique TLV type value that indicates the particular kind of information contained in the TLV The following table shows the details about the currently defined TLVs TLV Type TLV Name Description Usage in LLDPDU End of LLDPDU Mark the end of the TLV sequence in LLDPDUs Mandatory Any information following an End Of LLDPDU TLV shall be ignored Chassis ID Identifies the Chassis address of the connected Mandatory device Port ID Identifies the MAC address of the specific port Mandatory that transmitted the LLDP frame 238 TLV Type TLV Name Description Usage in LLDPDU 3 Time To Live Indicates the number of seconds that the Mandatory neighbor device is to regard the local information to be valid 4 Port Description Identifies the description string of the port Optional 5 System Name Identifies the system name Optional 6 System Identifies the system description Optional Description 7 System Identifies the main functions of the system and Optional Capabilities the functions enabled 8 Management Identifies the management IP address the Optional Address corresponding interface number and OID Object Identifier The management IP address is specified by the user 127 Organizationally Allows different organizations such as IEEE
46. ad 3 No 4 No 5 No 6 No 7 No 8 No 9 No 10 No 11 No 12 No 13 No 14 No 15 No 16 No 17 No 18 No 19 No 20 No 21 No 22 No 23 No 24 No lt Figure 12 15 ARP Statistics The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Auto Refresh Auto Refresh Enable Disable the Auto Refresh feature Refresh Interval Specify the refresh interval to display the ARP Statistics gt Illegal ARP Packet Port Displays the port number Trusted Port Indicates the port is an ARP Trusted Port or not Illegal ARP Packet Displays the number of the received illegal ARP packets 12 3 IP Source Guard IP Source Guard is to filter the IP packets based on the IP MAC Binding entries Only the packets matched to the IP MAC Binding rules can be processed which can enhance the bandwidth utility Choose the menu Network Security IP Source Guard to load the following page 205 IP Source Guard Config Port Select Port Security Type LAG Disable w Disable a Zz Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable z OOOOOOO000000 Note IP Source Guard can not be enabled for LAG member Figure 12 16 IP Source Guard The following entries are displayed on this screen gt IP Source Guard Config Port Select Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Select Select your desired port for configura
47. can be set as integral times of detection interval Here you can enable or disable web automatic refresh Set a web refresh interval between 3 and 100 seconds By default it s 6 seconds Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Select the desired port for Loopback Detection configuration It is multi optional Displays the port number Enable or disable Loopback Detection function for the port 47 Operation Mode Select the mode how the switch processes the detected loops e Alert When a loop is detected display an alert e Port based When a loop is detected display an alert and block the port Recovery Mode Select the mode how the blocked port recovers to normal status e Auto Block status can be automatically removed after recovery time e Manual Block status only can be removed manually Loop Status Displays the port status whether a loopback is detected Block Status Displays the port status about block or unblock LAG Displays the LAG number the port belongs to Manual Recover Manually remove the block status of selected ports Anote 1 Recovery Mode is not selectable when Alert is chosen in Operation Mode 2 Loopback Detection must coordinate with storm control 5 2 LAG LAG Link Aggregation Group is to combine a number of ports together to make a single high bandwidth data path so as to implement the traffic load sharing among t
48. communication is broken 1 Attacker sends the fake ARP packets of Host A with a forged MAC address 00 00 00 12 34 56 to Host B Attacker Host B Host A IP 192 168 0 102 IP 192 168 0 101 IP 192 168 0 103 MAC 00 00 00 22 22 22 MAC 00 00 00 44 44 44 MAC 00 00 00 33 33 33 2 Host B updates its ARP table The original ARP entry of Host A 192 168 0 103 00 00 00 33 33 33 is updated to 192 168 0 103 00 00 00 12 34 56 Figure 12 11 ARP Attack Cheating Terminal Hosts 200 As the above figure shown the attacker sends the fake ARP packets of Host A to Host B and then Host B will automatically update its ARP table after receiving the ARP packets When Host B tries to communicate with Host A it will encapsulate this false destination MAC address for packets which results in a breakdown of the normal communication gt Man In The Middle Attack The attacker continuously sends the false ARP packets to the Hosts in LAN so as to make the Hosts maintain the wrong ARP table When the Hosts in LAN communicate with one another they will send the packets to the attacker according to the wrong ARP table Thus the attacker can get and process the packets before forwarding them During the procedure the communication packets information between the two Hosts are stolen in the case that the Hosts were unaware of the attack That is called Man In The Middle Attack The Man In The Middle Attack is illustrated in the following figure
49. conveniently SNMP Agent Agent is the server software operated on network devices with the responsibility of receiving and processing the request packets from SNMP Management Station In the meanwhile Agent will inform the SNMP Management Station of the events whenever the device status changes or the device encounters any abnormalities such as device reboot MIB MIB is the set of the managed objects MIB defines a few attributes of the managed objects including the names the access rights and the data types Every SNMP Agent has its own MIB The SNMP Management station can read write the MIB objects basing on its management right SNMP Management Station is the manager of SNMP network while SNMP Agent is the managed object The information between SNMP Management Station and SNMP Agent are exchanged through SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol The relationship among SNMP Management Station SNMP Agent and MIB is illustrated in the following figure MIB Read Configure the MIB variables Send response and notification packets SNMP Management Station SNMP Agent Figure 13 1 Relationship among SNMP Network Elements gt SNMP Versions This switch supports SNMP v3 and is compatible with SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c The SNMP versions adopted by SNMP Management Station and SNMP Agent should be the same Otherwise SNMP Management Station and SNMP Agent can not communicate with each other normally You can select the management mo
50. correct destination MAC address which makes Host A and Host B keep a normal appearing communication 5 The attacker continuously sends the false ARP packets to the Host A and Host B so as to make the Hosts always maintain the wrong ARP table In the view of Host A and Host B their packets are directly sent to each other But in fact there is a Man In The Middle stolen the packets information during the communication procedure This kind of ARP attack is called Man In The Middle attack 201 gt ARP Flooding Attack The attacker broadcasts a mass of various fake ARP packets in a network segment to occupy the network bandwidth viciously which results in a dramatic slowdown of network speed Meantime the Gateway learns the false IP address to MAC address mapping entries from these ARP packets and updates its ARP table As a result the ARP table is fully occupied by the false entries and unable to learn the ARP entries of legal Hosts which causes that the legal Hosts can not access the external network The IP MAC Binding function allows the switch to bind the IP address MAC address VLAN ID and the connected Port number of the Host together when the Host connects to the switch Basing on the predefined IP MAC Binding entries the ARP Inspection functions to detect the ARP packets and filter the illegal ARP packet so as to prevent the network from ARP attacks The ARP Inspection function is implemented on the ARP Detect ARP Defend and
51. distance 21 The type of an IPv6 address is designated by the first several bits called format prefix The following table lists the mappings between address types and format prefixes Type Format Prefix binary IPv6 Prefix ID Unassigned address 00 0 128 bits 128 Loopback address 00 1 128 bits 1 128 Link local address 1111111010 FE80 10 Unicast address Site local address 1111111011 FECO 10 en le seers 001 2xxx 4 or 3xxx 4 currently assigned la ype Other formats to be assigned in future Multicast address 11111111 FFOO 8 Anycast addresses are taken from unicast Anycast address address space and are not syntactically distinguishable from unicast addresses Table 4 1 Mappings between address types and format prefixes IPv6 unicast address can be classified into several types including global unicast address link local address and site local address The two most common types are introduced below e Global unicast address A Global unicast address is an IPv6 unicast address that is globally unique and is routable on the global Internet Global unicast addresses are defined by a global routing prefix a subnet ID and an interface ID Except for addresses that start with binary 000 all global unicast addresses have a 64 bit interface ID The IPv6 global unicast address allocation uses the range of addresses that start with binary value 001 2000 3 The fi
52. functions are not designed to work completely over half duplex ports This value indicates Ethernet OAM is enabled but the port is in half duplex operation Displays the loopback status No Loopback Neither the local client nor the remote client is in the loopback mode Local Loopback The local client is in the loopback mode Remote Loopback The remote client is in the loopback mode The local client part shows the information of the remote OAM entity Mode Mac Address Vendor OU Max OAMPDU Remote Loopback Unidirection Link Monitoring Variable Request Displays the OAM mode of the remote client Displays the MAC address of the remote client Displays the vender s OUI of the remote client An OUI address is a unique identifier assigned by IEEE to a device vendor Displays the maximum size of the OAMPDU Displays whether the remote client supports remote loopback function Displays whether the remote client supports unidirectional OAM operation Displays whether the remote client supports link monitoring function Displays whether the remote client supports variable request 119 PDU Revision Displays the TLV revision of the OAMPDU Vendor Information Displays the vender information of the remote client 8 2 Link Monitoring On this page you can configure the parameters about OAM link events including the threshold and the detection period Also you can choose whether to not
53. his own expense This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment CE Mark Warning CE This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures NA MpoayktT ceptudikoBaHo 3riaHo c npasnnamn cncremn YkpCEMPO Ha BianoBiaHicre BuMoram HOpMaTNBHNX AOKyMeHTiB Ta BUMOraM WO nepeabadeni YMHHNMN 3aKkOoHogaBynMmn akTamu Y paiun ERL Safety Information e When product has power button the power button is one of the way to shut off the product When there is no power button the only way to completely shut off power is to disconnect the product or the power adapter from the power source e Don t disassemble the product or make repairs yourself You run the risk of electric shock and voiding the limited warranty If you need service please contact us Avoid water and wet locations This product can be used in the following countries CONTENTS Package GontentS urraca 1 Chapter 1 About This Gide aei ipene ee e an aaia io aeaea a A Aa e aana aiad 2 1 1 In
54. independent of the aging time The filtering MAC address allows the switch to filter the packets which includes this MAC address as the source address or destination address so as to guarantee the network security The filtering MAC address entries act on all the ports in the corresponding VLAN Choose the menu Switching gt MAC Address gt Filtering Address to load the following page Create Filtering Address MAC Address Format 00 00 00 00 00 01 VLAN ID 1 4094 Search Option Search Option All v Filtering Address Table Select MAC Address WLAN ID Port Type Aging Status al Total MAC Address 0 Note The maximum ofthe displayed entries is 100 by default please click the Search button to get the complete address entries Figure 5 15 Filtering Address The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Create Filtering Address MAC Address Enter the MAC Address to be filtered VLAN ID Enter the corresponding VLAN ID of the MAC address gt Search Option Search Option Select a Search Option from the pull down list and click the Search button to find your desired entry in the Filtering Address Table e MAC Address Enter the MAC address of your desired entry e VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID number of your desired entry 60 gt Filtering Address Table Select Select the entry to delete the corresponding filtering address It is multi optional MAC Address Displays the filt
55. is 0800 and that of AppleTalk network packets is 809B 5 Port Enable Required On the VLAN gt Protocol VLAN gt Port Enable page select and enable Port 3 Port 4 and Port 5 for Protocol VLAN feature 6 Create Protocol On VLAN gt Protocol VLAN gt Protocol VLAN page create protocol VLAN 10 VLAN 10 with Protocol as IP 7 Create Protocol On VLAN gt Protocol VLAN gt PProtocol VLAN page create protocol VLAN 20 VLAN 20 with Protocol as AppleTalk 6 7 VLAN VPN With the increasing application of the Internet the VPN Virtual Private Network technology is developed and used to establish the private network through the operators backbone networks VLAN VPN Virtual Private Network function the implement of a simple and flexible Layer 2 VPN technology allows the packets with VLAN tags of private networks to be encapsulated with VLAN tags of public networks at the network access terminal of the Internet Service Provider And these packets will be transmitted with double tag across the public networks The VLAN VPN function provides you with the following benefits 1 Provides simple Layer 2 VPN solutions for small sized MANS or intranets 2 Saves public network VLAN ID resource 3 You can have VLAN IDs of your own which is independent of public network VLAN IDs 4 When the network of the Internet Service Provider is upgraded the user s network with a relative independence can still work normally without chang
56. learned by IGMP Snooping It can enhance the quality and security for information transmission in some fixed multicast groups Choose the menu Multicast 1 GMP Snooping gt Static Multicast IP to load the following page 143 Create Static Multicast Multicast IP Format 225 0 0 1 VLAN ID l 1 4094 E Forward Port Format 1 3 6 8 Search Option Search Option Al Y Static Multicast IP Table Select Multicast IP VLAN ID Forward Port Total Static Multicast IP 0 Figure 9 10 Static Multicast IP Table The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Create Static Multicast Multicast IP Enter static multicast IP address VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID of the multicast IP Forward Port Enter the forward port of the multicast group gt Search Option Search Option Select the rules for displaying multicast IP table to find the desired entries quickly e All Displays all static multicast IP entries e Multicast IP Enter the multicast IP address the desired entry must carry VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID the desired entry must carry Port Enter the port number the desired entry must carry gt Static Multicast IP Table Select Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding static multicast IP It is multi optional Multicast IP Displays the multicast IP VLAN ID Displays the VLAN ID of the multicast group Forward Port Displays the forward port of the multicast g
57. mode Passive mode Pn AT 1 Loopback Control OAMPDU to enable remote loopback A 2 Information OAMPDU B updates its state to enter the remote loopback mode 3 Non OAMPDUs from A to B ee 4 Non OAMPDUs back from B to A i i 5 Loopback Control OAMPDU to disable remote loopback m 6 Information OAMPDU B updates its state to quit the remote loopback mode Figure 8 3 Remote Loopback 8 1 Basic Config On the Basic Config page you can enable the Ethernet OAM function on a specified port and configure its OAM mode as active or passive Also you can check out the connection status on the Discovery Info page 8 1 1 Basic Config Choose the menu Ethernet OAM gt Basic Config gt Basic Config to load the following page 116 Basic Config Port Select Port Mode State O v v g 1 Active Disable A O 2 Active Disable O 3 Active Disable O 4 Active Disable O 5 Active Disable 7 O 6 Active Disable O ji Active Disable O 8 Active Disable E O g Active Disable O 10 Active Disable O 11 Active Disable O 12 Active Disable O 13 Active Disable g 14 Active Disable O 15 Active Disable Y Apply Note 1 You cannot establish an OAM connection between two OAM entities in the passive mode Figure 8 4 Basic Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Basic Config Port Select Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the
58. network without occupying too much network resources A too large hello time parameter may result in normal links being regarded as invalid when packets drop occurred in the links which in turn result in spanning tree being regenerated A too small hello time parameter may result in duplicated configuration being sent frequently which increases the network load of the switches and wastes network resources The default value is recommended A too small max age parameter may result in the switches regenerating spanning trees frequently and cause network congestions to be falsely regarded as link problems A too large max age parameter result in the switches unable to find the link problems in time which in turn handicaps spanning trees being regenerated in time and makes the network less adaptive The default value is recommended If the TxHold Count parameter is too large the number of MSTP packets being sent in each hello time may be increased with occupying too much network resources The default value is recommended 7 1 2 STP Summary On this page you can view the related parameters for Spanning Tree function Choose the menu Spanning Tree STP Config STP Summary to load the following page STP Summary STP Status STP Version Local Bridge Root Bridge External Path Cost Region Root Internal Path Cost Designated Bridge Root Port Latest TC Time TC Count MSTP Instance Summary Instance ID Instance Status Local Brid
59. or disable filter function in this port Filter Mode Choose the filter action mode You can accept or refuse Report message with specific multicast groups specify by the filter IDs Filter IDs Enter the filter IDs with this port The filter IDs are configured in Filer Config The format is 1 4 12 Max Groups Enter the maximum groups which the port can join as the member port It ranges from 0 to 256 LAG Displays the LAG number Anote 1 If the Max Groups value is set less than the current value some groups may be deleted to satisfy the restriction 2 The max number of filter entries on each port is 15 9 2 5 Static Multicast On this page you can configure static multicast groups The multicast groups configured here are not learned by MLD Snooping and independent of dynamic multicast groups and multicast filters The static multicast member ports won t age out Choose the menu Multicast gt MLD Snooping Static Multicast to load the following page 153 Static Multicast Config VLAN ID 1 4094 Multicast IP Format FF03 C2D5 2313 Member Ports Format 1 3 6 8 Static Multicast List VLAN ID Select VLANID Multicast IP Member Ports O Apply Delete Help Total Static Multicast 0 Figure 9 17 Static Multicast The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Static Multicast Config VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID Multicast IP Enter the multicast IP address Member Ports Enter the mem
60. packets are forwarded by the TRUNK port its VLAN tag will not be changed 3 GENERAL The GENERAL port can be added in multiple VLANs and set various egress rules according to the different VLANs The default egress rule is UNTAG The PVID can be set as the VID number of any VLAN the port belongs to 63 gt PVID PVID Port Vlan ID is the default VID of the port When the switch receives an un VLAN tagged packet it will add a VLAN tag to the packet according to the PVID of its received port and forward the packets When creating VLANs the PVID of each port indicating the default VLAN to which the port belongs is an important parameter with the following two purposes 1 according to the PVID of its received port 2 When the switch receives an un VLAN tagged packet it will add a VLAN tag to the packet PVID determines the default broadcast domain of the port i e when the port receives UL packets or broadcast packets the port will broadcast the packets in its default VLAN Different packets tagged or untagged will be processed in different ways after being received by ports of different link types which is illustrated in the following table Receiving Packets Port Type Forwarding Packets Untagged Packets Tagged Packets If the VID of packet is the same as the PVID of the port the packet will be received The packet will be forwarded after Access ae If the VID of packet i
61. protocols 224 0 1 0 224 0 1 255 Addresses for video conferencing 239 0 0 0 239 255 255 255 Local management multicast addresses which are used in the local network only Table 9 1 Range of the special multicast IP 2 IPv4 Multicast MAC Address When a unicast packet is transmitted in an Ethernet network the destination MAC address is the MAC address of the receiver When a multicast packet is transmitted in an Ethernet network the destination is not a receiver but a group with uncertain number of members so a multicast MAC address a logical MAC address is needed to be used as the destination address As stipulated by IANA the high order 24 bits of a multicast MAC address begins with 01 00 5E while the low order 23 bits of a multicast MAC address are the low order 23 bits of the multicast IP address The mapping relationship is described as Figure 9 2 32 bit IPv4 address 5bits MAC Aderess p 0 0 5E Figure 9 2 Mapping relationship between multicast IPv4 address and multicast MAC address The high order 4 bits of the IP multicast address are 1110 identifying the multicast group Only 23 bits of the remaining low order 28 bits are mapped to a multicast MAC address In that way 5 bits of the IP multicast address is not utilized As a result 32 IP multicast addresses are mapped to the same MAC addresses gt IPv6 Multicast Address 1 IPv6 Multicast Address An IPv6 multicast address is
62. storm Control CI MAC Address Table O Port Access O DHCP Filter Port Traps Select Pont oo N O OAA Y NN o OOOOOOO0O000000 hi Coldstart Mwarmstart DO cpu utilization C memory Utilization O VLAN Create Delete DO IP Change O Bandwidth Control OLLDP Cl Loopback Detection O Spanning Tree CI IP MAC Binding CIP Duplicate MS Link Status Disable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable ES Figure 13 9 Traps Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt SNMP Traps SNMP Authentication Coldstart Warmstart Link Status CPU Utilization Memory Utilization Flash Operation If selected the switch will send an SNMP Authentication trap when a received SNMP request fails the authentication If selected the switch will send a Coldstart trap when it is rebooted with the SNMP function enabled If selected the switch will send a Warmstart trap when you enable the SNMP function If selected the switch will send a Link Status trap when the up down status of the port changes If selected the switch will send a CPU Utilization trap when the CPU utilization rate is over 80 If selected the switch will send a Memory Utilization trap when the memory utilization rate is over 80 If selected the switch will send a Flash Operation trap when a flash operation occurs The flash operations include firmware upg
63. switch can analyze the received untagged packets on the port and match the packets with the MAC VLAN Protocol VLAN and 802 1Q VLAN in turn If a packet is matched the switch will add a corresponding VLAN tag to it and forward it in the corresponding VLAN 62 6 1 802 1Q VLAN VLAN tags in the packets are necessary for the switch to identify packets of different VLANs The switch works at the data link layer in OSI model and it can identify the data link layer encapsulation of the packet only so you can add the VLAN tag field into the data link layer encapsulation for identification In 1999 IEEE issues the IEEE 802 1Q protocol to standardize VLAN implementation defining the structure of VLAN tagged packets IEEE 802 1Q protocol defines that a 4 byte VLAN tag is encapsulated after the destination MAC address and source MAC address to show the information about VLAN As shown in the following figure a VLAN tag contains four fields including TPID Tag Protocol Identifier Priority CFl Canonical Format Indicator and VLAN ID VLAN Tag Figure 6 2 Format of VLAN Tag 1 TPID TPID is a 16 bit field indicating that this data frame is VLAN tagged By default it is 0x8100 2 Priority Priority is a 3 bit field referring to 802 1p priority Refer to section QoS amp QoS profile for details 3 CFI CFI is a 1 bit field indicating whether the MAC address is encapsulated in the standard format in different transmission m
64. t participate in the MLD Querier Election but an MLD Snooping Querier will affect the MLD Querier Election in the IPv6 network running MLD because of its relatively smaller IP address 9 2 7 Packet Statistics On this page you can view the MLD packets the switch received It helps you to monitor the MLD Snooping function Auto Refresh Auto Refresh Refresh Period MLD Packet Statistics Received MLD Query 0 Port Ss OOH OO ek wD oo oo co co 98 fC FCF oso k A ho O Enable Disable Enter the VLAN ID which you want to start Querier Enter the value of Maximum Response Time field of the Query message Enter the Query message interval time The Querier will send General Query Message with this interval Enter the Query Message source IP address Select the Querier you want to change Displays the VLAN ID Displays the value of Maximum Response Time field of the Query message Displays the Query message interval time Displays the Query message source IP address Choose the menu Multicast gt MLD Snooping Packet Statistics to load the following page sec 3 300 Pot ee ee Se 4 4 0 2 6 0 0 54 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 0 0 0 14 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 g 11 8 8 0 12 20 10 20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 lt Figure 9 19 Packet Statistics 155 The following entries are displayed on this screen gt 9 3 Multicast Table In a network receivers can jo
65. that of IPv4 headers excluding the Options field Flexible extension headers IPv6 cancels the Options field in IPv4 packets but introduces multiple extension headers In this way IPv6 enhances the flexibility greatly to provide scalability for IP while improving the handling efficiency The Options field in IPv4 packets contains 40 bytes at most while the size of IPv6 extension headers is restricted by that of IPv6 packets Built in security IPv6 uses IPSec as its standard extension header to provide end to end security This feature provides a standard for network security solutions and improves the interoperability between different IPv6 applications Automatic address configuration To simplify the host configuration IPv6 supports stateful and stateless address configuration e Stateful address configuration means that a host acquires an IPv6 address and related information from a server for example DHCP server e Stateless address configuration means that a host automatically configures an IPv6 address and related information on basis of its own link layer address and the prefix information advertised by a router In addition a host can generate a link local address on basis of its own link layer address and the default prefix FE80 64 to communicate with other hosts on the link Enhanced neighbor discovery mechanism The IPv6 neighbor discovery protocol is a group of Internet control message protocol version 6 ICMPv
66. the installation click Cancel 282 TpSupplicant InstallShield Wizard Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for TpSupplicant The InstallShield Wizard will install TpSupplicant on your computer To continue click Next Figure C 3 Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard 4 To continue choose the destination location for the installation files and click Next on the following screen TpSupplicant InstallShield Wizard Choose Destination Location Select folder where setup will install files a Install TpSupplicant to C Program Files TP LINK T pSupplicant InstallShield Figure C 4 Choose Destination Location By default the installation files are saved on the Program Files folder of system disk Click the Change button to modify the destination location proper to your need 5 Till now The Wizard is ready to begin the installation Click Install to start the installation on the following screen 283 TpSupplicant InstallShield Wizard Ready to Install the Program l The wizard is ready to begin installation InstallShield Figure C 5 Install the Program 6 The InstallShield Wizard is installing TpSupplicant shown as the following screen Please wait TpSupplicant InstallShield Wizard Figure C 6 Setup Status 7 On the following screen click Finish to complete the installation 284 TpSupplicant InstallShield Wizard InstallShield Wizard Complete The InstallShield Wiza
67. the switch s global IPv6 address is 3001 1 64 specify IPv6 address as 3001 14 for example and the Subnet prefix length as 64 Now Click OK to save your settings Return to CONTENTS 281 Appendix C 802 1X Client Software In 802 1X mechanism the supplicant Client should be equipped with the corresponding client software complied with 802 1X protocol standard for 802 1X authentication When the switch works as the authenticator system please take the following instructions to install the TpSupplicant provided on the attached CD for the supplicant Client 1 1 Installation Guide 1 Insert the provided CD into your CD ROM drive Open the file folder and double click the icon LINK i to load the following figure Choose the proper language and click Next to continue TpSupplicant InstallShield Wizard Choose Setup Language Select the language for the installation from the choices below Chinese amelie Figure C 1 Choose Setup Language 2 Please wait for the InstallShield Wizard preparing the setup shown as the following screen TpSupplicant InstallShield Wizard Preparing Setup Please wait while the InstallShield Wizard prepares the setup TpSupplicant Setup is preparing the InstallShield Wizard which will guide you through the rest of the setup process Please wait Cancel Figure C 2 Preparing Setup 3 Then the following screen will appear Click Next to continue If you want to stop
68. the MAC address table based on mac_2 VLANS5 It finds out the egress port Port2 through which the packet is forwarded to PC2 untagged After all the steps above are finished the bidirectional communication between PC2 and the Router is achieved Private VLAN functions are implemented on the PVLAN Config and Port Config pages 6 8 1 PVLAN Config On this page you can create Private VLAN and view the information of the current defined Private VLANs 85 Choose the menu VLAN gt Private VLAN gt PVLAN Config to load the following page Create Private VLAN Primary VLAN 2 4094 Secondary YLAN Format 2 4 5 8 Search Option Search Option all y Private VLAN Table Select Primary VLAN Secondary LAN Port O Total Private YLAN 0 Note It s recommended to create less than 10 Private VLANs ata time Figure 6 16 Create Private VLAN The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Create Private VLAN Primary VLAN Enter the ID number of the Primary VLAN Secondary VLAN Enter the ID number of the Secondary VLAN gt Search Option Search Option Select a Search Option from the pull down list and click the Search button to find your desired entry in Private VLAN e Primary VLAN ID Enter the Primary VLAN ID number of the desired Private VLAN e Secondary VLAN ID Enter the Secondary VLAN ID number of the desired Private VLAN gt Private VLAN Table Select Select the entry to delete It is mult
69. the VLAN Mapping function Only the port is enabled can the configured VLAN Mapping function take effect 80 Port Enable E a El 2 O 7 Oe 013 O14 Ora O20 Das act 26 LAG1 dl 3 O 4 Os O 6 DO a O10 O11 P12 O15 O16 E17 O18 O21 022 023 1 24 LAG1 027 Das Figure 6 14 Enable VLAN Mapping for Port Select your desired port for VLAN Mapping function All the ports are disabled for VLAN Mapping function by default Configuration Procedure of VLAN VPN Function Step Operation Description 1 Enable VPN mode Required On the VLAN VLAN VPN VPN Config page enable the VPN mode 2 Configure the global TPID Optional On the VLAN gt VLAN VPN gt gt VPN Config page configure the global TPID basing on the devices connected to the up link port 3 Set the VPN up link port Required On the VLAN VLAN VPN gt VPN Config page specify the desired port to be the VPN up link port It s required to set the port connected to the backbone networks to be up link port 4 Create VLAN Mapping Required On the VLAN gt VLAN VPN gt VLAN Mapping entries page configure the VLAN Mapping entries basing on the actual application 5 Create SP Service Optional On the VLAN 802 1Q VLAN page create the Provider VLAN SP VLAN For the steps of creating VLAN please refer to 802 1Q VLAN Configuration Procedure of VLAN Mapping Function Step Operation Description 1 Create
70. the VLAN gt GVRP page enable GVRP function 3 Configure the port registration Required On the VWLAN gt GVRP page configure the mode and the timers for the parameters of ports basing on actual applications 6 10 Application Example for Private VLAN gt Network Requirements e Switch Ais connecting to switch B switch B is connecting to switch C e Switch B is connecting to PC1 PC2 and PC3 e Switch C is connecting to PC4 PC5 and PC6 e PCs in different VLANs cannot communicate with each other e For switch A packets from switch B and switch C have no VLAN tags Switch A needs not to consider the VLANs of switch B and switch C 91 gt Network Diagram Switch B gt Configuration Procedure e Configure switch A Step Operation Description 1 Create VLAN6 Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page create a VLAN with its VLAN ID as 6 owning Port 1 e Configure switch B Step Operation Description 1 Create Private Required On the VLAN gt Private VLAN gt PVLAN Config page VLANs Enter the Primary VLAN 6 and Secondary VLAN 2 3 and then click the Create button 2 Add Required On the VLAN gt Private VLAN Port Config page Promiscuous configure the port type of Port3 and Port4 as Promiscuous enter port to Private Primary VLAN 6 and Secondary VLAN 2 3 and click the Add button VLANs 3 Add Host port to Req
71. the following IP address And the following items will be available If the switch s IP address is 192 168 0 1 specify IP address as 192 168 0 x x is from 2 to 254 and the Subnet mask as 255 255 255 0 2 In IPv6 network 1 On the Windows taskbar click the Start button and then click Control Panel 2 Click the View network status and tasks under the tab Network and Internet 06 8 gt Control Panel gt Search Control Pane pl File Edit View Tools Help Adjust your computer s settings m Category a System and Security gt User Accounts and Family a Review your computer s status Safety Back up your computer Ly Add or remove user accounts Find and fix problems Set up parental controls for any user Network and Internet status 3 Appearance and Aa Personalization View network status and tasks Choose homegroup and sharing m PEND Change the theme Hardware and Sound Change desktop background View devices and printers Adjust screen resolution Add a device gt Clock Language and EY Programs L Region Change keyboards or other input Bissell Y A Uninstall a program methods Change display language MF Fase of Access y M4 Computer Figure B 4 3 Select Local Network Connection under the tab View your active networks on the prompt page View your active networks Connect or disconnect Access type Internet TP LINK_Networkl Connections Local Netwo
72. the number of neighbors dropped by local device Displays the number of overtime neighbors in local device Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Displays local device s port number Displays the number of LLDPDUs sent by this port 245 Receive Total Discards Errors Ageouts TLV Discards TLV Unknowns Displays the number of LLDPDUs received by this port Displays the number of LLDPDUs discarded by this port Displays the number of error LLDPDUs received by this port Displays the number of overtime neighbors linking to this port Displays the number of TLVs dropped by this port Displays the number of unknown TLVs received by this port Return to CONTENTS 246 Chapter 15 Cluster With the development of network technology the network scale is getting larger and more network devices are required which may result in a more complicated network management system As a large number of devices need to be assigned different network addresses and every management device needs to be respectively configured to meet the application requirements manpower are needed The Cluster Management function can solve the above problem It is mainly used to central manage the scattered devices in the network A network administrator can manage and maintain the switches in the cluster via a management switch The management switch is the commander of the cluster and the ot
73. the root bridge in the whole network switch B is the designated bridge of switch C e Port Port 3 is the root port of switch B and port 5 is the root port of switch C port 1 is the designated port of switch A and port 4 is the designated port of switch B port 6 is the blocked port of switch C 94 Switch A Switch B Switch C Figure 7 1 Basic STP diagram gt STP Timers Hello Time Hello Time ranges from 1 to 10 seconds It specifies the interval to send BPDU packets It is used to test the links Max Age Max Age ranges from 6 to 40 seconds It specifies the maximum time the switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure Forward Delay Forward Delay ranges from 4 to 30 seconds It specifies the time for the port to transit its state after the network topology is changed When the STP regeneration caused by network malfunction occurs the STP structure will get some corresponding change However as the new configuration BPDUs cannot be spread in the whole network at once the temporal loop will occur if the port transits its state immediately Therefore STP adopts a state transit mechanism that is the new root port and the designated port begins to forward data after twice forward delay which ensures the new configuration BPDUs are spread in the whole network gt BPDU Comparing Principle in STP mode Assuming two BPDUs BPDU X and BPDU Y If the root bridge ID of X is smaller than t
74. the switch topology collects The default is 3 hops NTDP Hop Delay Enter the time between the switch receiving NTDP request packets and the switch forwarding NTDP request packets for the first time The default is 200 milliseconds NTDP Port Delay Enter the time between the port forwarding NTDP request packets and its adjacent port forwarding NTDP request packets over The default is 20 milliseconds gt Port Config Select Select the desired port for NTDP status configuration Port Displays the port number of the switch NTDP Displays NTDP status enabled or disabled of the current port 255 Enable Click the Enable button to enable NTDP feature for the port you select Disable Click the Disable button to disable NTDP feature for the port you select Ace NTDP function is effective only when NTDP function is enabled globally and for the port 15 3 Cluster A commander switch can recognize and add the candidate switch to a cluster automatically based on NDP and NTDP You can manually add the candidate switch to a cluster If the candidate switch is successfully added to the cluster it will get a private IP address assigned by the commander switch You can manage and configure the member switch via the commander switch The Cluster function can be implemented on Cluster Summary Cluster Config Member Config and Cluster Topology pages 15 3 1 Cluster Summary On this page you can view the status of the current clust
75. when the system time is within the absolute time range Select Week to configure week time range The ACL rule based on this time range takes effect only when the system time is within the week time range Set the start time of the time slice Set the end time of the time slice Displays the index of the time slice Displays the start time of the time slice Displays the end time of the time slice Click the Delete button to delete the corresponding time slice 176 11 1 3 Holiday Config Holiday mode is applied as a different secured access control policy from the week mode On this page you can define holidays according to your work arrangement Choose the menu ACL gt Time Range Holiday Config to load the following page Create Holiday Start Date 01 vwif 01 Y End Date 101 mps 01 _ Holiday Name Holiday Table Select Index Holiday Name Start Date End Date O 1 NewYearDay 01 01 01 01 O 2 LaborDay 05 01 05 03 Al Figure 11 3 Holiday Configuration The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Create Holiday Start Date Specify the start date of the holiday End Date Specify the end date of the holiday Holiday Name Enter the name of the holiday gt Holiday Table Select Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding holiday Index Displays the index of the holiday Holiday Name Displays the name of the holiday Start Date Displays the start date of the holiday End Date Disp
76. whether to notify the critical event or not Notify 8 4 Remote Loopback On this page you can initiate remote loopback if the OAM connection is established and the local client works in active mode You can also choose to ignore or to process the received remote loopback request Choose the menu Ethernet OAM gt Remote Loopback Remote Loopback to load the following page Remote Loopback Config Port Select Port Received Remote Loopback Remote Loopback O o M vl O 1 Ignore A O 2 Ignore O 3 Ignore O 4 Ignore O 5 Ignore O 6 Ignore O 7 Ignore O 8 Ignore 3 O g Ignore O 10 Ignore O 11 Ignore O 12 Ignore O 13 Ignore O 14 Ignore O 15 Ignore v Apply Note 1 You can perform remote loopback only after establishing the OAM connection 2 Remote loopback is used to test a single link and itis not supported on aggregated ports Figure 8 8 Remote Loopback The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Remote Loopback Config Port Select Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Select Select the desired port for configuration It is multi optional Received Remote Choose to ignore or to process the received remote loopback Loopback request 122 Remote Loopback 8 5 Statistics You can view the statistics about the detailed Ethernet OAM traffic information and event log information of a specific port here 8 5 1 Statistics On this page you can vie
77. with PC s clock as the system time Choose the menu System System Info System Time to load the following page Time Info Current System Date 2006 01 01 08 15 09 Sunday Current Time Source Manual Time Config Manual Date Time Get Time from NTP Server f 7 ae E g Pre Time Zone UTC 08 00 Beijing Chongqing Hong Kong Urumgj Singapore i gt 7 Primary Sever 1133 100 92 Cielo Secondary Sever 1139 78 100 163 Update Rate ha hour s O Synchronize with PC s Clock Figure 4 5 System Time 16 The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Time Info Current System Date Current Time Source gt Time Config Manual Get Time from NTP Server Synchronize with PC S Clock Anat Displays the current date and time of the switch Displays the current time source of the switch When this option is selected you can set the date and time manually When this option is selected you can configure the time zone and the IP Address for the NTP Server The switch will get UTC automatically if it has connected to an NTP Server e Time Zone Select your local time e Primary Secondary NTP Server Enter the IP Address for the NTP Server e Update Rate Specify the rate fetching time from NTP server When this option is selected the administrator PC s clock is utilized 1 The system time will be restored to the default when the switch is restarted and you need to reconfi
78. 0 Graphic Example Rx E Tx ORx OTx Figure 4 3 Bandwidth Utilization gt Bandwidth Utilization Rx Select Rx to display the bandwidth utilization of receiving packets on this port Tx Select Tx to display the bandwidth utilization of sending packets on this port 15 4 1 2 Device Description On this page you can configure the description of the switch including device name device location and system contact Choose the menu System System Info Device Description to load the following page Device Description Device Name TL SL5428E Device Location SHENZHEN i Apply System Contact wwtp link com Note 1 The Device Name Location and Contact should not be more than 32 characters 2 When IP Address Mode is DHCP the Device Name will be used to fill DHCP Option 12 field in DHCP discover and request packet sent by the switch itself Figure 4 4 Device Description The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Device Description Device Name Enter the name of the switch Device Location Enter the location of the switch System Contact Enter your contact information 4 1 3 System Time System Time is the time displayed while the switch is running On this page you can configure the system time and the settings here will be used for other time based functions like ACL You can manually set the system time get UTC automatically if it has connected to an NTP server or synchronize
79. 16 Secondary IP Enter the IP address of the alternate accounting server Accounting Port Set the UDP port of accounting server s The default port is 1813 Accounting Key Mdnote 1 The 802 1X function takes effect only when it is enabled globally on the switch and for the port Set the shared password for the switch and the accounting servers to exchange messages 2 The 802 1X function can not be enabled for LAG member ports That is the port with 802 1X function enabled can not be added to the LAG 3 The 802 1X function should not be enabled for the port connected to the authentication server In addition the authentication parameters of the switch and the authentication server should be the same Configuration Procedure Step Operation Description 1 Connect an authentication Required Record the information of the client in the LAN to server to the switch and do some configuration the authentication server and configure the corresponding authentication username and password for the client 2 Install the 802 1X client Required For the client computers you are required to software install the 802 1X software TpSupplicant provided on the CD For the installation guide please refer to Appendix C 802 1X Client Software 3 Configure the 802 1X Required By default the global 802 1X function is disabled globally On the Network Security gt 802 1X Global Config page configure the
80. 6 messages that manages the information exchange between neighbor nodes on the same link The group of ICMPv6 messages takes the place of Address Resolution Protocol ARP message Internet Control Message Protocol version 4 ICMPv4 router discovery message and ICMPv4 redirection message to provide a series of other functions 20 gt 1 Introduction to IPv6 address IPv6 address format An IPv6 address is represented as a series of 16 bit hexadecimals separated by colons An IPv6 address is divided into eight groups and the 16 bits of each group are represented by four hexadecimal numbers which are separated by colons for example 2001 0d02 0000 0000 0014 0000 0000 0095 The hexadecimal letters in IPv6 addresses are not case sensitive To simplify the representation of IPv6 addresses zeros in IPv6 addresses can be handled as follows e Leading zeros in each group can be removed For example the above mentioned address can be represented in shorter format as 2001 d02 0 0 14 0 0 95 e Two colons may be used to compress successive hexadecimal fields of zeros at the beginning middle or end of an IPv6 address For example the above mentioned address can be represented in the shortest format as 2001 d02 14 0 0 95 n ote Two colons can be used only once in an IPv6 address to represent the longest successive hexadecimal fields of zeros Otherwise the device is unable to determine how many zeros double
81. 64 16 1 System MOnitors c fcace cc reres davev cl renal 264 A O elaete dubia lias tect 264 16 1 2 Memory Monitor cccccccccecceecceeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeess 265 12 Lora a Si ac A ttc cat heat ela ds aaa eal oto eat tara ees 265 16 21 Log Table da tad 266 16 22 ca E A che ved Sale Sed tel ees es aed ie vl delo acc 267 10 2 3 Remote LOGI eae dds sec iel Ak opeen A a a aa 267 16 24 Backup EO oca a ct teresa as 268 16 3 Device DIagnOSlCs 1 A 269 16 4 Network Diagnostics asseio nono no nono nono nono nono nn non nro nn nn nn nn AREE KAREE EEE EEE 270 VO ATS SPHNG A terme iuatad oultedesleteadial E seeds 270 16042 O a 271 Chapter 17 System Maintenance via FTP cccccececcceceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeceeeaeeeeeeeeeeetsnseneeeeeeeess 272 Appendix A Specificatlons mie taints vile ene aad ee pd Ao een nae 276 Appendix B Configuring the PCS oooooocococccccnoconaoccncncococconnnnnnnnnoncncnnnnnnonnnnnnnennnnannnnnnnnnnnnenninnnnnnss 277 Appendix C 802 1X Client Software oooocononoccocccnccccccncononncnnoccncnncnnnnnnnnnnononnnnannnnnnnnanennanannnnnnes 282 Appendix D Gloss ali uuniic tenio uae cates 290 Vil Package Contents The following items should be found in your box One TL SL5428E switch One power cord One console cable Two mounting brackets and other fittings Installation Guide Vv VV VV WV Resource CD for TL SL5428E switch including e This User Gu
82. A n Switch B Switch C gt Network Diagram J g SY Switch D Switch E Switch F 109 gt Configuration Procedure e Configure switch A Step Operation Description 1 Configure ports On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN page configure the link type of the related ports as Trunk and add the ports to VLAN101 VLAN106 The detailed instructions can be found in the section 802 1Q VLAN 2 Enable STP function On Spanning Tree gt STP Config STP Config page enable STP function and select MSTP version On Spanning Tree gt STP Config Port Config page enable MSTP function for the port 3 Configure the region name and On Spanning Tree gt MSTP Instance Region Config the revision of MST region page configure the region as TP LINK and keep the default revision setting 4 Configure VLAN to Instance On Spanning Tree MSTP Instance gt Instance mapping table of the MST region Config page configure VLAN to Instance mapping table Map VLAN 101 103 and 105 to Instance 1 map VLAN 102 104 and 106 to Instance 2 e Configure switch B Step Operation Description 1 Configure ports On VLAN 802 1Q VLAN page configure the link type of the related ports as Trunk and add the ports to VLAN101 VLAN106 The detailed instructions can be found in the section 802 1Q VLAN 2 Enable STP function On Spanning Tree gt STP Config STP Config page enable STP function and select MSTP ve
83. ACL enables you to implement ACL control over packets by differentiating the time ranges The ACL module is mainly for ACL configuration of the switch including four submenus Time Range ACL Config Policy Config and Policy Binding 11 1 Time Range If a configured ACL is needed to be effective in a specified time range a time range should be firstly specified in the ACL As the time range based ACL takes effect only within the specified time range data packets can be filtered by differentiating the time ranges On this switch absolute time week time and holiday can be configured Configure an absolute time section in the form of the start date to the end date to make ACLs effective configure a week time section to make ACLs effective on the fixed days of the week configure a holiday section to make ACLs effective on some special days In each time range four time slices can be configured The Time Range configuration can be implemented on Time Range Summary Time Range Create and Holiday Config pages 11 1 1 Time Range Summary On this page you can view the current time ranges Choose the menu ACL Time Range Time Range Summary to load the following page Time Range Table Select Index Time Range Name Slice 1 Slice 2 Slice 3 Slice 4 Mode Operation au delete Help Figure 11 1 Time Range Table The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Time Range Table Select Select the desired entry to delete
84. AN and also guarantees security because the multicast VLAN is isolated from user VLANS Before configuring a multicast VLAN you should firstly configure a VLAN as multicast VLAN and add the corresponding ports to the VLAN on the 802 1Q VLAN page If the multicast VLAN is enabled the multicast configuration for other VLANs on the VLAN Config page will be invalid that is the multicast streams will be transmitted only within the multicast VLAN Choose the menu Multicast gt I GMP Snooping Multicast VLAN to load the following page Multicast VLAN Multicast VLAN O Enable Disable VLAN ID O e Router Port Time sec 60 600 recommended 300 Member Port Time sec 60 600 recommended 260 Leave Time AM sec 1 30 recommended 1 Router Ports Format 1 3 6 8 Note 1 AIl IGMP packet will be processed in the Multicast VLAN after Multicast VLAN is created 2 The Multicast VLAN wont take effect unless you first complete the configuration on the VLAN Config page Figure 9 9 Multicast VLAN The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Multicast VLAN Multicast VLAN Enable Disable Multicast VLAN feature VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID of the multicast VLAN Router Port Time Specify the aging time of the router port Within this time if the switch doesn t receive IGMP query message from the router port it will consider this port is not a router port any more Member Port Time Specify the aging time of the memb
85. ARP Statistics pages 12 2 1 ARP Detect ARP Detect feature enables the switch to detect the ARP packets basing on the bound entries in the IP MAC Binding Table and filter the illegal ARP packets so as to prevent the network from ARP attacks such as the Network Gateway Spoofing and Man In The Middle Attack etc Choose the menu Network Security gt ARP Inspection ARP Detect to load the following page ARP Detect ARP Detect O Enable Disable Trusted Port Fl 1 F 2 As O 4 O 5 O 6 A 7 O e O a O10 F11 O12 113 O14 O15 O16 O17 O18 O19 O20 C21 122 123 C 24 LAG1 O 25 LAG1 Dista 027 Fi 298 Note It s recommended to configure the up linked port and LAG member as trusted port Figure 12 13 ARP Detect The following entries are displayed on this screen gt ARP Detect ARP Detect Enable Disable the ARP Detect function and click the Apply button to apply 202 gt Trusted Port Trusted Port Select the port for which the ARP Detect function is unnecessary as the Trusted Port The specific ports such as up linked port routing port and LAG port should be set as Trusted Port To ensure the normal communication of the switch please configure the ARP Trusted Port before enabling the ARP Detect function Configuration Procedure Step Operation Description 1 Bind the IP address MAC Required On the IP MAC Binding page bind the IP address VLAN ID and the address MAC address VLAN ID and the conn
86. D Leave Time Router Port O Note The settings here will be invalid when multicast VLAN is enabled Figure 9 6 VLAN Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt VLAN Config VLAN ID Router Port Time Member Port Time Leave Time Enter the VLAN ID to enable IGMP Snooping for the desired VLAN Specify the aging time of the router port Within this time if the switch doesn t receive IGMP query message from the router port it will consider this port is not a router port any more Specify the aging time of the member port Within this time if the switch doesn t receive IGMP report message from the member port it will consider this port is not a member port any more Specify the interval between the switch receiving a leave message from a host and the switch removing the host from the multicast groups 137 Static Router Ports Enter the static router port which is mainly used in the network with stable topology gt VLAN Table VLAN ID Select Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding VLAN ID based on the ID number you entered Select Select the desired VLAN ID for configuration It is multi optional VLAN ID Displays the VLAN ID Router Port Time Displays the router port time of the VLAN Member Port Time Displays the member port time of the VLAN Leave Time Displays the leave time of the VLAN Router Port Displays the router port of the V
87. D Object Identifier of the SNMP packets is used to describe the managed objects of the switch and the MIB Management Information Base is the set of the OIDs The SNMP View is created for the SNMP management station to manage MIB objects Choose the menu SNMP SNMP Config gt SNMP View to load the following page View Config View Name 16 characters maximum MIB Object ID 61 characters maximum View Type Include Exclude View Table Select View Name View Type MIB Object ID dl viewDefault Include 1 dl viewDefault Exclude 1 3 6 1 6 3 15 O viewDefault Exclude 1 3 6 1 6 3 16 O viewDefault Exclude 1 3 6 1 6 3 18 Al Figure 13 4 SNMP View The following entries are displayed on this screen gt View Config View Name Give a name to the View for identification Each View can include several entries with the same name MIB Object ID Enter the Object Identifier OID for the entry of View View Type Select the type for the view entry e Include The view entry can be managed by the SNMP management station e Exclude The view entry can not be managed by the SNMP management station gt View Table Select Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding view All the entries of a View will be deleted together View Name Displays the name of the View entry View Type Displays the type of the View entry MIB Object ID Displays the OID of the View entry 13 1 3 SNMP Group On this page you can configur
88. D of the neighbor device System Description Displays the system description of the neighbor device Neighbor Port Displays the he port number of the neighbor linking to local port Information Click Information to display the detailed information of the neighbor device 14 3 Device Statistics You can view the LLDP statistics of local device through this feature Choose the menu LLDP Device Statistics Statistic Info to load the following page 244 Auto Refresh Auto Refresh Enable O Disable Refresh Rate F sec 3 300 Global Statistics Last Update Total Inserts Total Deletes Total Drops Total Ageouts 00 00 00 00 0 0 0 0 Neighbors Statistics Port 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 D A 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 J 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 11 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 v Figure 14 5 Device Statistics The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Auto Refresh Auto Refresh Refresh Rate Global Statistics Last Update Total Inserts Total Deletes Total Drops Total Ageouts Neighbor Statistics Port Select Port Transmit Total Enable Disable the auto refresh function Specify the auto refresh rate Displays latest update time of the statistics Displays the number of neighbors inserted till last update time Displays the number of neighbors deleted by local device Displays
89. DA Mistica iia 113 A A castineatheraentetahad beets i huadot caste sesbiuiet aa anaia eaaa atia inata 116 8 1 1 Basico tods 116 8 1 2 Discovery Mfo viii aras 117 9 2 Link MONDION vit A A AAA A ads 120 8 3 Rb reece teeta tae ace ac ca edn aes tl Math ak ale ei yaaa 121 O4 Remote LOOPDACK r aa a a e iia 122 DO AMS n i AA ee ao eis 123 8 5 1 LALISTIOS wie haze served tn a a EAN 123 8 5 2 Event LOG c are i ae is 124 8 0 o DLDP Tiisa aaa ea A Sl Ep E E A R She Bt inne O 125 8 7 Application Example for DLDP oooooconnncinccnncoconcccocccnnnnnoncnnononcnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnoninnnnnnnncnnnno 128 Chapter 9 Multicast iie anra die E E EARE E Ea E DAAE EA ARTESA 131 9 1 IGMP SNOOpIN Gisin iee a ere Meee ink e E hers ed eee E EE oars 135 9 1 1 SHOOPING COM aier e aa a a a a eaaa 136 OZ VAN COMO nados 137 9 1 3 Port CONF enceinte a De aa AEEA EAE ERATE Eae eria RE DATAA 138 9 1 4 P RING E i ar a A fa ee ea hee aes 140 9 1 5 A A 141 9 1 6 Statie Multicast Pian ia a A A EEEN 143 9 1 7 Packet Statistical 144 9 1 8 Querer Configs edeee esens pret hadeetevalens et ontededeni a eaaa AAAA ETA 145 9 2 IA 147 9 2 1 Global Gontig icciefctis eek setecert E teed adesteeeadid Baad dives eee 149 9 2 2 VEAN COMO dd 150 9 2 3 Filter COM oi 152 9 2 4 POCO ri a daa 153 9 25 Static MulticaStiiiui aaa lis 153 9 216 Q erier Configs n A na 154 OZ Packet Statistics mirahan as AA AA 155 9 3 Multicast Table cursi dd ea 156 9 3 1 IPv4 Multicast Tabl
90. INK 802 1X Client Enter the Name and the Password specified in the Authentication Server The length of Name and Password should be less than 16 characters 2 Click the Properties button on Figure C 12 to load the following screen for configuring the connection properties Connection properties 802 1 network connection Obtain an IP address automatically General Auto reconnect after timeout Default P OK Q Cancel C Figure C 13 Connection Properties Send 802 1X protocol packets by Unicast When this option is selected the Client will send the EAPOL Start packets to the switch via multicast and send the 802 1X authentication packets via unicast Obtain an IP address automatically Select this option if the Client automatically obtains the IP address from DHCP server After passing the authentication the Client can be assigned the IP address by DHCP server The Client can access the network after getting the new IP address Auto reconnect after timeout Select this option to allow the Client to automatically start the connection again when it does not receive the handshake reply packets from the switch within a period 287 3 To continue click Connect button after entering the Name and Password on Figure C 12 Then the following screen will appear to prompt that the Radius server is being searched Connecting Searching the RADIUS server Figure C 14 Authentication Dialog 4 When passing the a
91. If the device receives no echo packets after a specified period of time the link will be tagged as unidirectional and the DLDP state will transit from Probe to Disable This port will be shut down automatically or manually depending on the Shut Mode configured 126 The typical bidirectional link detection process is 4 gt 6 and the typical unidirectional link detection process is Q On the DLDP page you can enable the DLDP state globally and configure the interval of the advertisement packets and the port shutdown mode You can also configure the refresh frequency of the port states and reset the certain port s DLDP state manually Choose the menu Ethernet OAM DLDP gt DLDP to load the following page Global Config DLDP State Adver Interval l5 Shut Mode Auto Web Refresh State Web Refresh Interval 5 Port Config Select Port DLDP State O v O 1 Enable O 2 Disable g 3 Disable O 4 Disable go 5 Disable Ej 6 Enable O 7 Disable O 8 Disable g 9 Disable oO 10 Disable App Note Enable O Enable Disable seconds 1 30 vv Disable seconds 1 100 Protocol State Inactive Initial Initial Initial Initial Adver Initial Initial Initial Initial Link State Link Down Link Down Link Down Link Down Link Down Link Up Link Down Link Down Link Down Link Down pon Neighbor State NIA amp N A N A N A N A N A NIA N A N A N A v 1 ADLDP capable p
92. LAN Anote The settings here will be invalid when multicast VLAN is enabled Configuration procedure Step Operation Description 1 Enable IGMP Snooping Required Enable IGMP Snooping globally on the switch function and for the port on Multicast IGMP Snooping Snooping Config and Port Config page 2 Configure the multicast Optional Configure the multicast parameters for VLANs on parameters for VLANs Multicast gt IGMP Snooping VLAN Config page If a VLAN has no multicast parameters configuration it indicates the IGMP Snooping is not enabled in the VLAN thus the multicast data in the VLAN will be broadcasted 9 1 3 Port Config On this page you can configure the IGMP feature for ports of the switch When the switch receives IGMP report message it examines the multicast filtering IP ID configured on the access port to determine if the port can join the multicast group If the multicast IP is not filtered the switch will add the port to the forward port list of the multicast group Otherwise the switch will drop the IGMP report message In that way you can control the multicast groups that users can access Choose the menu Multicast IGMP Snooping Port Config to load the following page 138 Port Config Select Port O oONONF WH 10 11 12 Note Por IGMP Snooping FastLeave Filter Action Mod
93. LAN However hosts in different VLANs cannot communicate with one another directly Therefore broadcast packets are limited in a VLAN Hosts in the same VLAN communicate with one another via Ethernet whereas hosts in different VLANs communicate with one another through the Internet devices such as Router the Layer3 switch etc The following figure illustrates a VLAN implementation VLAN 2 Router VLAN 6 Figure 6 1 VLAN implementation Compared with the traditional Ethernet VLAN enjoys the following advantages 1 Broadcasts are confined to VLANs This decreases bandwidth utilization and improves network performance 2 Network security is improved VLANs cannot communicate with one another directly That is a host in a VLAN cannot access resources in another VLAN directly unless routers or Layer 3 switches are used 3 Network configuration workload for the host is reduced VLAN can be used to group specific hosts When the physical position of a host changes within the range of the VLAN you need not to change its network configuration A VLAN can span across multiple switches or even routers This enables hosts in a VLAN to be dispersed in a looser way That is hosts in a VLAN can belong to different physical network segment This switch supports three ways namely 802 1Q VLAN MAC VLAN and Protocol VLAN to classify VLANs VLAN tags in the packets are necessary for the switch to identify packets of different VLANs The
94. MP leave messages Enable Disable multicast filtering feature on the port Select the action mode to process multicast packets when the multicast IP is in the filtering IP range e Permit Only the multicast packets whose multicast IP is in the IP range will be processed e Deny Only the multicast packets whose multicast IP is not in the IP range will be processed Enter the IP range ID the port will be bound to The binding IP range IDs of the port can be cleared by entering null value in this field and click Apply button to submit the configuration Specify the maximum number of multicast groups to prevent some ports taking up too much bandwidth Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to Fast Leave on the port is effective only when the host supports IGMPv2 or IGMPv3 139 3 4 5 When both Fast Leave feature and Unknown Multicast Discard feature are enabled the leaving of a user connected to a port owning multi user will result in the other users intermitting the multicast business Multicast Filter feature can only have effect on the VLAN with IGMP Snooping enabled Multicast Filter feature has no effect on static multicast IP Up to 15 IP Ranges can be bound to one port 9 1 4 IP Range On this page you can figure the desired IP ranges to be filtered Choose the menu Multicast IGMP Snooping IP Range to load the following page Create IP Range IP Range ID 1 30 Start Multicast IP
95. MST region page configure the region as TP LINK and keep the default revision setting 4 Configure VLAN to Instance On Spanning Tree MSTP Instance gt Instance mapping table of the MST region Config page configure WLAN to Instance mapping table Map VLAN 101 103 and 105 to Instance 1 map VLAN 102 104 and 106 to Instance 2 5 Configure switch C as the root On Spanning Tree gt MSTP Instance lInstance bridge of Instance 1 Config page configure the priority of Instance 1 to be 4096 6 Configure switch C as the root On Spanning Tree MSTP Instance gt Instance bridge of Instance 2 Config page configure the priority of Instance 2 to be 0 e Configure switch D Step Operation Description 1 Configure ports On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN page configure the link type of the related ports as Trunk and add the ports to VLAN101 VLAN106 The detailed instructions can be found in the section 802 1Q VLAN 2 Enable STP function On Spanning Tree gt STP Config STP Config page enable STP function and select MSTP version On Spanning Tree gt STP Config Port Config page enable MSTP function for the port 3 Configure the region name and On Spanning Tree MSTP Instance Region Config the revision of MST region page configure the region as TP LINK and keep the default revision setting 4 Configure VLAN to Instance On Spanning Tree MSTP Instance gt Instance mapping table of the MST region C
96. Multicast IP 0 VLAN ID Format 225 0 0 1 1 4094 P All Static Dynamic Forward Port Type Figure 9 20 IPv4 Multicast Table The following entries are displayed on this screen 156 gt Search Option Multicast IP VLAN ID Port Type Enter the multicast IP address the desired entry must carry Enter the VLAN ID the desired entry must carry Select the port number the desired entry must carry Select the type the desired entry must carry e All Displays all multicast IP entries e Static Displays all static multicast IP entries e Dynamic Displays all dynamic multicast IP entries gt Multicast IP Table Multicast IP VLAN ID Forward Port Type Displays multicast IP address Displays the VLAN ID of the multicast group Displays the forward port of the multicast group Displays the type of the multicast IP 9 3 2 IPv6 Multicast Table This page displays the multicast groups which already on the switch Choose the menu Multicast Multicast Table IPv6 Multicast Table to load the following page Search Option O Multicast IP O VLAN ID _ Port L Type Multicast IP Table Total Multicast IP 0 Format FF03 AD45 3444 1 4094 All Static Dynamic Multicast IP VLAN ID Forward Ports Type Figure 9 21 IPv6 Multicast Table The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Search Option Multicast IP VLAN ID Port Type Enter the
97. N page click the Edit button to modify view the information of the corresponding VLAN 7 Delete VLAN Optional On the VLAN gt Protocol VLAN gt Protocol VLAN page select the desired entry to delete the corresponding VLAN by clicking the Delete button 6 4 Application Example for 802 1Q VLAN gt Network Requirements e Switch Ais connecting to PC A and Server B 73 e Switch B is connecting to PC B and Server A e PCA and Server Ais in the same VLAN e PCB and Server B is in the same VLAN e PCs in the two VLANs cannot communicate with each other v Network Diagram Server B Server A Switch A gt Configuration Procedure e Configure switch A Step Operation Description 1 Configure the Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt Port Config page configure Link Type of the the link type of Port 2 Port 3 and Port 4 as ACCESS TRUNK and ports ACCESS respectively 2 Create VLAN10 Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page create a VLAN with its VLAN ID as 10 owning Port 2 and Port 3 3 Create VLAN20 Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page create a VLAN with its VLAN ID as 20 owning Port 3 and Port 4 e Configure switch B Step Operation Description 1 Configure the Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt Port Config page configure Link Type of the the link type of Port 7 Port 6 and Port 8 as ACCESS TRUNK and ports ACCESS respectiv
98. P ports can be in the following four states e Forwarding In this status the port can receive forward data receive send BPDU packets as well as learn MAC address Learning In this status the port can receive send BPDU packets and learn MAC address Blocking In this status the port can only receive BPDU packets Disconnected In this status the port is not participating in the STP gt Port Roles In an MSTP the following roles exist e Root Port Indicates the port that has the lowest path cost from this bridge to the Root Bridge and forwards packets to the root e Designated Port Indicates the port that forwards packets to a downstream network segment or switch e Master Port Indicates the port that connects a MST region to the common root The path from the master port to the common root is the shortest path between this MST region and the common root e Alternate Port Indicates the port that can be a backup port of a root or master port e Backup Port Indicates the port that is the backup port of a designated port e Disabled Indicates the port that is not participating in the STP The following diagram shows the different port roles Connect to the root bridge Region edge port port 1 2 Master port port 1 Alternate port port 2 Designated port port 3 5 Backup port port 6 Figure 7 3 Port roles The Spanning Tree module is mainly for spanning tree configuration of the switch including four submenus STP C
99. P Community directly On the SNMP gt SNMP Config SNMP Community page create SNMP Community based on SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c Create SNMP Group and SNMP User Similar to the configuration way based on SNMPv3 you can create SNMP Group and SNMP User of SNMP v1 v2c The User name can limit access to the SNMP agent from SNMP network management station functioning as a community name The users can manage the device via the Read View Write View and Notify View defined in the SNMP Group 228 13 2 Notification With the Notification function enabled the switch can initiatively report to the management station about the important events that occur on the Views e g the managed device is rebooted which allows the management station to monitor and process the events in time The notification information includes the following two types Trap Trap is the information that the managed device initiatively sends to the Network management station without request Inform Inform packet is sent to inform the management station and ask for the reply The switch will resend the inform request if it doesn t get the response from the management station during the Timeout interval and it will terminate resending the inform request if the resending times reach the specified Retry times The Inform type employed on SNMPv2c and SNMPv3 has a higher security than the Trap type 13 2 1 Notification Config On this page you can con
100. P Inspection and IP Source Guard functions can control the network access and only allow the Hosts matching the bound entries to access the network The following three IP MAC Binding methods are supported by the switch 1 Manually You can manually bind the IP address MAC address VLAN ID and the Port number together in the condition that you have got the related information of the Hosts in the LAN 2 Scanning You can quickly get the information of the IP address MAC address VLAN ID and the connected port number of the Hosts in the LAN via the ARP Scanning function and bind them conveniently You are only requested to enter the IP address on the ARP Scanning page for the scanning 3 DHCP Snooping You can use DHCP Snooping functions to monitor the process of the Host obtaining the IP address from DHCP server and record the IP address MAC address VLAN and the connected Port number of the Host for automatic binding These three methods are also considered as the sources of the IP MAC Binding entries The entries from various sources should be different from one another to avoid collision Among the entries in collision only the entry from the source with the highest priority will take effect These three sources Manual Scanning and Snooping are in descending order of priority The IP MAC Binding function is implemented on the Binding Table Manual Binding ARP Scanning and DHCP Snooping pages 12 1 1 Binding Table On this
101. P STP of Cat 3 or above 100Base TX UTP STP of Cat 5 Transmission Medium 100Base FX MMF or SMF SFP Module Optional 1000Base T 4 pair UTP lt 100m of Cat 5 or above 1000Base X MMF or SMF SFP Module Optional PWR SYS 10 100Mbps LEDs 1000Mbps LEDs Transmission Method Store and Forward 10BASE T 14881pps port Packets Forwarding Rate 100BASE TX 148810pps port 1000Base T 1488095pps port Operating Temperature 0 C 40 C Storage Temperature 40 C 70 C Operating Environment Operating Humidity 10 90 RH Non condensing Storage Humidity 5 90 RH Non condensing Return to CONTENTS 276 Appendix B Configuring the PCs In this section we ll introduce how to install and configure the TCP IP correctly in Windows 2000 and TCP IPv6 in WIN7 First make sure your Ethernet Adapter is working refer to the adapter s manual if necessary 1 In IPv4 network 1 On the Windows taskbar click the Start button and then click Control Panel 2 Click the Network and Internet Connections icon and then click on the Network Connections tab in the appearing window 3 Right click the icon that showed below select Properties on the prompt page LAN or High Speed Internet ocal Area Connection gr Connected Firewalled al A CELOS Disable Status Repair Bridge Connections Create Shortcut Delete Rename Properties Figure B 1 4 Inthe prompt page that showed belo
102. P v2c is employed you can directly configure the SNMP Community on this page without configuring SNMP Group and User Choose the menu SNMP SNMP Config SNMP Community to load the following page Community Config Community Name l 16 characters maximum a Access read only v Clear MIB View viewDefault v Community Table Select Community Name Access MIB View Operation Note al The default MIB view of community is viewDefault Figure 13 7 SNMP Community The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Community Config Community Name Access MIB View gt Community Table Select Community Name Access MIB View Operation More Enter the Community Name here Defines the access rights of the community e read only Management right of the Community is restricted to read only and changes cannot be made to the corresponding View e read write Management right of the Community is read write and changes can be made to the corresponding View Select the MIB View for the community to access Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding Community It is multi optional Displays the Community Name here Displays the right of the Community to access the View Displays the Views which the Community can access Click the Edit button to modify the MIB View and the Access right of the Community and then click the Modify button to apply The default MIB V
103. P2P link status If the two ports in the P2P link are root port or designated port they can transit their states to forwarding rapidly to reduce the unnecessary forward delay Select Enable to perform MCheck operation on the port Unchange means no MCheck operation Displays the STP version of the port 101 Port Role Displays the role of the port played in the STP Instance e Root Port Indicates the port that has the lowest path cost from this bridge to the Root Bridge and forwards packets to the root e Designated Port Indicates the port that forwards packets to a downstream network segment or switch e Master Port Indicates the port that connects a MST region to the common root The path from the master port to the common root is the shortest path between this MST region and the common root e Alternate Port Indicates the port that can be a backup port of a root or master port e Backup Port Indicates the port that is the backup port of a designated port e Disabled Indicates the port that is not participating in the STP Port Status Displays the working status of the port e Forwarding In this status the port can receive forward data receive send BPDU packets as well as learn MAC address e Learning In this status the port can receive send BPDU packets and learn MAC address Blocking In this status the port can only receive BPDU packets Disconnected In this status the port is not participating in the STP LAG
104. Policy BING Ad ts 184 of es A A 7 On neers eR Ra ener 184 AZ A ti lesa tiga 185 MAS MEAN Bid ar 185 11 5 Application Example for ACL oooonococcccccnccccinononconcnnnnonconcnnnnnnnnnnnnoncnnnnnonnnnnnneneanannnnnces 186 Chapter 12 Network Security oocooccinonococcccnccccnnnnoncncnncncncnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnoncnnnnnnnnnnnnninnannnnnnnnnnanennanns 189 12 1 IP MAG BIO ti ida 189 12 1 1 Binding Table ada 189 1212 Manual Bing escote le chhedegee rede aiaa aiar de iberia 190 12 1 3 ARP SCanning rai ia 191 12 14 DHCP SNOOPING cesan ai iia 193 122 AR INSPOCUON tm t 198 122 1 A A e a treme shia ten ete tae adh toe het E 202 122 2 ARP Defend sii AAA A Navas A Sa 203 1223 ARP STU SCS AAA 204 12 35 UP Source ii As 205 12 4 DOS Defend nv ad 206 12 41 DOS Defend cis AAA A A a Gas 208 12 4 2 DOS Detection e a ol 209 A A ad as ct acta ta aE cell oD Jade as wae teens hin Soda cae 209 125 1 Global Conti viii rr dance ada 213 12 02 PO CONTO ein tt ci deel ates 215 12 93 RACIUS SOIVEP Getirin an Bett ae e heeded 216 126 PPPOE COM tai 217 Chapter 13 SNMP tactica dd 220 13 1 SNMP COMM tt rd dt er o de da da do 222 13 1 1 Global Config oooooocccoccccccnonconooccncnccnnnnnnnnnncnnononnoncnnonnnnnnncnnonannnnnnnnnnnncinannnnncinn 222 13 12 SNMP A i ade A ta 223 13 1 3 SNMP GOUD atra Wate a hd es EAs 223 13 14 SNMP USEF bl edito ede etre ste 225 13 1 5 SNMP COMMUNI kaiaa iad aaaeeeaa r aa a ao Ea a AAEE ESE AAA EEEE 227 13 2
105. RP Enable Disable Port Config Pot __ e a a eee ee O Disable Normal l O 1 Disable Normal 1000 20 60 a O 2 Disable Normal 1000 20 60 O 3 Disable Normal 1000 20 60 O 4 Disable Normal 1000 20 60 O 5 Disable Normal 1000 20 60 O 6 Disable Normal 1000 20 60 O 7 Disable Normal 1000 20 60 O 8 Disable Normal 1000 20 60 JN O 9 Disable Normal 1000 20 60 O 10 Disable Normal 1000 20 60 O 11 Disable Normal 1000 20 60 O 12 Disable Normal 1000 20 60 O 13 Disable Normal 1000 20 60 O 14 Disable Normal 1000 20 60 F 15 Disable Normal 1000 20 60 F Figure 6 18 GVRP Config Anote If the GVRP feature is enabled for a member port of LAG please ensure all the member ports of this LAG are set to be in the same status and registration mode The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config GVRP Allows you to Enable Disable the GVRP function gt Port Config Port Select Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding entry based on the port number you entered Select Select the desired port for configuration It is multi optional Port Displays the port number Status Enable Disable the GVRP feature for the port The port type should be set to TRUNK before enabling the GVRP feature Registration Select the Registration Mode for the port Mode e Normal In this mode a port can dynamically register deregister a VLAN and propagate the dynamic static VLAN information e Fixed
106. Request Variable OAMPDUs Response Loopback Control OAMPDUs Organization Specific OAMPDUs Unsupported OAMPDUs Frames Lost Due To OAM 8 5 2 Event Log On this page you can view the detailed Ethernet OAM event log information of a specific port The device will recount the numbers every time you click the clear button or the device is rebooted Displays the number of variable request OAMPDUs that have been transmitted or received on the port Displays the number of variable response OAMPDUs that have been transmitted or received on the port Displays the number of loopback control OAMPDUs that have been transmitted or received on the port Displays the number of organization specific OAMPDUs that have been transmitted or received on the port Displays the number of unsupported OAMPDUs that have been transmitted or received on the port Displays the number of frames that would otherwise be transmitted by the OAM sublayer but did not due to an internal OAM sublayer transmit error Choose the menu Ethernet OAM gt Statistics gt Event Log to load the following page Event Log Statistics Error Symbol Event Error Frame Event Error Frame Period Event Error Frame Seconds Event Dying Gasp Critical Event Event Log Table Type Location Timestamp Value Port f Local Remote 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 00 Window Refresh Clear Help Threshold Accumulated Errors Figure 8 10 Event Log T
107. Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding VLAN It is multi optional VLAN ID Displays the ID number of VLAN Name Displays the user defined name of VLAN Members Displays the port members in the VLAN Operation Allows you to view or modify the information for each entry e Edit Click to modify the settings of VLAN e Detail Click to get the information of VLAN Click Edit button to modify the settings of the corresponding VLAN Click Create button to create a new VLAN VLAN Create VLAN ID CC 4094 oe re Description 16 characters maximum VLAN Members Port E Select Port Link Type Egress Rule LAG o 1 ACCESS UNTAG A F 2 ACCESS UNTAG O 3 ACCESS UNTAG Fj 4 ACCESS UNTAG E O 5 ACCESS UNTAG F a 6 ACCESS UNTAG O 7 ACCESS UNTAG J O 8 ACCESS UNTAG F 9 ACCESS UNTAG 10 ACCESS UNTAG go 11 ACCESS UNTAG Fl 12 ACCESS UNTAG l 13 ACCESS UNTAG E 14 ACCESS UNTAG Vv Note Link Type can be changed in Page Port Config Figure 6 4 Create or Modify 802 1Q VLAN 65 The following entries are displayed on this screen gt VLAN Config VLAN ID Description Check gt VLAN Members Port Select Select Port Link Type Egress Rule LAG 6 1 2 Port Config Enter the ID number of VLAN Give a description to the VLAN for identification Click the Check button to check whether the VLAN ID you entered is valid or not Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding entry
108. TP LINK User Guide TL SL5428E 24 Port 10 100Mbps 4 Port Gigabit JetStream L2 Managed Switch ae aii 6 GAIA TP LINK TL SL5428E 4 eBistrean L2 Managed Switch Y i F J J 4 REV2 0 0 1910011019 COPYRIGHT amp TRADEMARKS Specifications are subject to change without notice TIP LINIK is a registered trademark of TP LINK TECHNOLOGIES CO LTD Other brands and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders No part of the specifications may be reproduced in any form or by any means or used to make any derivative such as translation transformation or adaptation without permission from TP LINK TECHNOLOGIES CO LTD Copyright O 2014 TP LINK TECHNOLOGIES CO LTD All rights reserved http www tp link com FCC STATEMENT HE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy ana if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at
109. The packet traffic exceeding the bandwidth will be discarded Select Disable to disable the storm control function for the port Multicast Rate Select the bandwidth for receiving multicast packets on the port bps The packet traffic exceeding the bandwidth will be discarded Select Disable to disable the storm control function for the port UL Frame Rate Select the bandwidth for receiving UL Frame on the port The bps packet traffic exceeding the bandwidth will be discarded Select Disable to disable the storm control function for the port LAG Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to note If you enable storm control feature for the ingress rate limit enabled port ingress rate limit feature will be disabled for this port 168 10 3 Voice VLAN Voice VLANs are configured specially for voice data stream By configuring Voice VLANs and adding the ports with voice devices attached to voice VLANs you can perform QoS related configuration for voice data ensuring the transmission priority of voice data stream and voice quality gt OUl Address Organizationally unique identifier address The switch can determine whether a received packet is a voice packet by checking its source MAC address If the source MAC address of a packet complies with the OUI addresses configured by the system the packet is determined as voice packet and transmitted in voice VLAN An OUI address is a unique identifier assigned by IEEE Institut
110. VLAN it s required to set its connected port of switch to be a member of this VLAN so as to ensure the normal communication 4 Select your desired Required On the VLAN gt MAC VLAN gt Port Enable page select ports for MAC VLAN and enable the desired ports for MAC VLAN feature feature 6 3 Protocol VLAN Protocol VLAN is another way to classify VLANs basing on network protocol Protocol VLANs can be sorted by IP IPX DECnet AppleTalk Banyan and so on Through the Protocol VLANs the broadcast domain can span over multiple switches and the Host can change its physical position in the network with its VLAN member role always effective By creating Protocol VLANs the network administrator can manage the network clients basing on their actual applications and services effectively This switch can classify VLANs basing on the common protocol types listed in the following table Please create the Protocol VLAN to your actual need Protocol Type Type value ARP 0x0806 IP 0x0800 MPLS 0x8847 0x8848 70 Protocol Type Type value IPX 0x8137 IS IS 0x8000 LACP 0x8809 802 1X 0x888E Table 6 2 Protocol types in common use The packet in Protocol VLAN is processed in the following way 1 When receiving an untagged packet the switch matches the packet with the current Protocol VLAN If the packet is matched the switch will add a corresponding Protocol VLAN tag
111. VLAN Mapping Required On the VLAN gt VLAN VPN gt VLAN Mapping entries page configure the VLAN Mapping entries basing on the actual application 2 Enable VLAN Mapping Required On the VLAN gt VLAN VPN gt Port Enable page function for port enable VLAN Mapping function for the ports 3 Create SP Service Optional On the VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN page create the Provider VLAN SP VLAN For the steps of creating VLAN please refer to 802 1Q VLAN 81 6 8 Private VLAN Private VLANs designed to save VLAN resources of uplink devices and decrease broadcast are sets of VLAN pairs that share a common primary identifier To guarantee user information security the ease with which to manage and account traffic for service providers in campus network service providers usually require that each individual user is layer 2 separated VLAN feature can solve this problem However as stipulated by IEEE 802 1Q protocol a device can only support up to 4094 VLANs If a service provider assigns one VLAN per user the VLANs will be far from enough as a result the number of users this service provider can support is limited Private VLAN adopts Layer 2 VLAN structure A Private VLAN consists of a Primary VLAN and a Secondary VLAN providing a mechanism for achieving layer 2 separation between ports For uplink devices all the packets received from the downstream are without VLAN tags Uplink devices need to identify Primary VLANs but not S
112. able 8 1 Differences between active OAM mode and passive OAM mode After an OAM connection is established the OAM entities on both sides exchange Information OAMPDUs periodically to keep the OAM connection valid The OAM entity considers the OAM connection invalid if it does not receive the Information OAMPDU from the peer entity for 5 seconds Link Monitoring Link Monitoring is for detecting and locating link faults under a variety of circumstances When there are problems detected on the link the device will send its remote peer the Event Notification OAMPDUs to report link events The link events are described as follows OAM Link Events Description Symbol Period Error A Symbol Period Error event occurs if the number of symbol errors exceeds the threshold during a specific period of time Frame Error A Frame Error event occurs if the number of frame errors exceeds the threshold during a specific period of time Frame Period Error A Frame Period Error event occurs if the number of frame errors in specific number of received frames exceeds the threshold A Frame Seconds Error event occurs if the number of error frame seconds exceeds the threshold during a specific period of time A second is called an error frame second if error frames occur in the second Table 8 2 OAM Link Events Frame Seconds Error Remote Failure Indication Faults in Ethernet are difficult to detect especially when the physica
113. able Disable the port to be a Trusted Port Only the Trusted Port can receive the DHCP packets from DHCP servers Enable Disable the MAC Verify feature There are two fields of the DHCP packet containing the MAC address of the Host The MAC Verify feature is to compare the two fields and discard the packet if the two fields are different Enable Disable the Flow Control feature for the DHCP packets The excessive DHCP packets will be discarded Enable Disable the Decline Protect feature Displays the LAG to which the port belongs to According to the ARP Implementation Procedure stated in 12 1 3 ARP Scanning it can be found that ARP protocol can facilitate the Hosts in the same network segment to communicate with one another or access to external network via Gateway However since ARP protocol is implemented with the premise that all the Hosts and Gateways are trusted there are high security risks during ARP Implementation Procedure in the actual complex network Thus the cheating attacks against ARP such as imitating Gateway cheating Gateway cheating terminal Hosts and ARP Flooding 198 Attack frequently occur to the network especially to the large network such as campus network and so on The following part will simply introduce these ARP attacks gt Imitating Gateway The attacker sends the MAC address of a forged Gateway to Host and then the Host will automatically update the ARP table after receiving the ARP response pac
114. affic of these ports will be transmitted on the normal ports so as to guarantee the connection reliability Depending on different aggregation modes aggregation groups fall into two types Static LAG and LACP Config The LAG function is implemented on the LAG Table Static LAG and LACP Config configuration pages 5 2 1 LAG Table On this page you can view the information of the current LAG of the switch Choose the menu Switching gt LAG gt LAG Table to load the following page Global Config Hash Algorithm SRC MAC DST MAC Apply LAG Table Group ea Select suber Description Member Operation O LAGI Static LAG 24 25 26 Edit Detail All Note 1 The LAG created by LACP cant be deleted Figure 5 6 LAG Table The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config Hash Algorithm Select the applied scope of aggregate hash arithmetic which results in choosing a port to transfer the packets e SRC MAC DST MAC When this option is selected the Aggregate Arithmetic will apply to the source and destination MAC addresses of the packets e SRC IP DST IP When this option is selected the Aggregate Arithmetic will apply to the source and destination IP addresses of the packets gt LAG Table Select Select the desired LAG It is multi optional Group Number Displays the LAG number here Description Displays the description of LAG Member Displays the LAG member Operation Allows you to view or mod
115. ained in the rule Enter EtherType contained in the rule Select the user priority contained in the rule for the tagged packets to match Select the time range for the rule to take effect 11 2 4 Standard IP ACL Standard IP ACLs analyze and process data packets based on a series of match conditions which can be the source IP addresses and destination IP addresses carried in the packets Choose the menu ACL gt ACL Config Standard IP ACL to load the following page 179 Create Standard IP Rule ACLID Rule ID Operation Fragment O sp O D IP Time Range Standard IP ACL Permit v O Mask ls Mask No Limit v Figure11 7 Create Standard IP Rule The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Create Standard IP Rule ACL ID Rule ID Operation Fragment S IP D IP Mask Time Range Select the desired Standard IP ACL for configuration Enter the rule ID Select the operation for the switch to process packets which match the rules e Permit Forward packets e Deny Discard Packets Select if the rule will take effect on the fragment When the fragment is selected this rule will process all the fragments and the last piece of fragment will be always forwarded Enter the source IP address contained in the rule Enter the destination IP address contained in the rule Enter IP address mask If it is set to 1 it must strictly m
116. al Config On this page you can configure the global parameters of the voice VLAN including VLAN ID aging time the transmission priority of the voice packets and so on Choose the menu QoS gt Voice VLAN gt Global Config to load the following page Global Config Voice VLAN O Enable O Disable VLAN ID 2 4094 LA gt apply Aging Time 11440 min 1 43200 default 1440 r Help Priority 6 Y Figure 10 12 Global Configuration The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config Voice VLAN Enable Disable Voice VLAN function VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID of the voice VLAN Aging Time Specifies the living time of the member port in auto mode after the OUI address is aging out Priority Select the priority of the port when sending voice data 10 3 2 Port Config Before the voice VLAN function is enabled the parameters of the ports in the voice VLAN should be configured on this page Choose the menu QoS gt Voice VLAN gt Port Config to load the following page 171 Port Config Port Select Port Port Mode Security Mode Member State LAG g v g 1 Auto Disable Inactive O 2 Auto Disable Inactive O 3 Auto Disable Inactive O 4 Auto Disable Inactive 3 O 5 Auto Disable Inactive O 6 Auto Disable Inactive O 7 Auto Disable Inactive Ly O 8 Auto Disable Inactive O g Auto Disable Inactive O 10 Auto Disable Inactive O 11 Auto Disable Inactive O 12 Auto Disable Inactive O 13 A
117. al Config to load the following page 213 Global Config 802 1 Auth Method Guest VLAN Guest VLAN ID Authentication Config Quiet Quiet Period Retry Times Supplicant Timeout Server Timeout Enable Disable EAP MD5 Y ATEO O Enable Disable 61 4094 Enable Disable sec 1 999 3 1 9 3 sectt 9 3 see 1 9 Figure 12 22 Global Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt gt Global Config 802 1X Auth Method Guest VLAN Guest VLAN ID Authentication Config Quiet Quiet Period Enable Disable the 802 1X function Select the Authentication Method from the pull down list EAP MD5 IEEE 802 1X authentication system uses extensible authentication protocol EAP to exchange information between the switch and the client The EAP protocol packets with authentication data can be encapsulated in the advanced protocol such as RADIUS packets to be transmitted to the authentication server PAP IEEE 802 1X authentication system uses extensible authentication protocol EAP to exchange information between the switch and the client The transmission of EAP packets is terminated at the switch and the EAP packets are converted to the other protocol such as RADIUS packets for transmission Enable Disable the Guest VLAN feature Enter your desired VLAN ID to enable the Guest VLAN feature The supplicants in the Guest VLAN can access the s
118. al OAM operation Some devices support unidirectional OAM operation These devices provide an OAMPDU based mechanism to notify the remote OAM entity when one direction of a link is non operational and therefore data transmission is disabled Displays whether the local client supports link monitoring function 118 Variable Request PDU Revision Operation Status Loopback Status gt Remote Client Displays whether the local client supports variable request If supports the local client can send some variable requests to the remote client to learn about the link status from the response of the remote client Displays the Information TLV revision of Information OAMPDU Displays the operating status of the OAM connection Disable OAM is disabled on this port LinkFault The link has detected a fault and is transmitting OAMPDwUs with a link fault indication PassiveWait The port is in passive mode and is waiting to see if the peer device is OAM capable ActiveSendLocal The port is in active mode and is sending local information SendLocalAndRemote The local port has discovered the peer but has not yet accepted or rejected the configuration of the peer SendLocalAndRemoteOK The local device agrees the OAM peer entity PeeringLocallyRejected The local OAM entity rejects the remote peer OAM entity PeeringRemotelyRejected The remote OAM entity rejects the local device NonOperHalfDuplex Since Ethernet OAM
119. ame Port Direction 11 4 3 VLAN Binding Select the name of the policy you want to bind Enter the number of the port you want to bind Displays the index of the binding policy Displays the name of the binding policy Displays the number of the port bound to the corresponding policy Displays the binding direction On this page you can bind a policy to a VLAN Choose the menu ACL gt Policy Binding VLAN Binding to load the following page 185 VLAN Bind Config Policy Name Select Policy v VLAN ID Format 2 10 100 VLAN Bind Table Index Policy Name VLAN ID Direction Figure11 14 Bind the policy to the VLAN The following entries are displayed on this screen gt VLAN Bind Config Policy Name VLAN ID gt VLAN Bind Table Index Policy Name VLAN ID Direction Configuration Procedure Select the name of the policy you want to bind Enter the ID of the VLAN you want to bind Displays the index of the binding policy Displays the name of the binding policy Displays the ID of the VLAN bound to the corresponding policy Displays the binding direction Step Operation Description 1 Configure effective Required On ACL Time Range configuration pages time range configure the effective time ranges for ACLs 2 Configure ACL rules Required On ACL gt ACL Config configuration pages configure ACL rules to match packets 3 Configure Polic
120. an identifier for a group of interfaces and has the following format H 32 bits gt 8 4 4 16 Group ID 112 bits OXFF at the start of the address identifies the address as being a multicast address 132 Flags have 4 bits The high order flag is reserved and must be initialized to 0 T 0 indicates a permanently assigned multicast address assigned by the Internet Assgined Numbers Authority IANA T 1 indicates a non permanently assigned multicast address 0 R P t Scope is a 4 bit value used to limit the scope of the multicast group The values are as follows Value Indication 0 3 F reserved 1 Interface Local scope 2 Link Local scope 4 Admin Local scope 5 Site Local scope 6 7 9 D unassigned 8 Organization local scope E Global scope Table 9 2 Indications of the Scope Reserved Multicast Addresses Address Indication FFO1 1 All interface local IPv6 nodes FFO2 1 All link local IPv6 nodes FFO1 2 All interface local IPv6 routers FFO2 2 All link local IPv6 routers FFO5 2 All site local IPv6 routers FFOX X ranges from O to F These multicast addresses are reserved and shall never be assigned to any multicast group Table 9 3 Reserved IPv6 Multicast Addresses The solicited node multicast address is a multicast group that corresponds to an IPv6 unicast or anycast address It is usually used for obtaining the Layer 2 lin
121. andard IP ACL 200 299 Extend IP ACL Rule Order User Config Y Figure 11 5 ACL Create The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Create ACL ACL ID Enter ACL ID of the ACL you want to create Rule Order User Config order is set to be match order in this ACL 11 2 3 MAC ACL MAC ACLs analyze and process packets based on a series of match conditions which can be the source MAC addresses destination MAC addresses VLAN ID and EtherType carried in the packets 178 Choose the menu ACL gt ACL Config MAC ACL to load the following page Create MAC Rule ACLID Rule ID Operation O s mac O D MAC O VLAN ID O EtherType User Priority Time Range MAC ACL Permit v A A Mask i j Mask 4 hex number No Limit vw No Limit v Figure11 6 Create MAC Rule The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Create MAC Rule ACL ID Rule ID Operation S MAC D MAC MASK VLAN ID EtherType User Priority Time Range Select the desired MAC ACL for configuration Enter the rule ID Select the operation for the switch to process packets which match the rules e Permit Forward packets e Deny Discard Packets Enter the source MAC address contained in the rule Enter the destination MAC address contained in the rule Enter MAC address mask If it is set to 1 it must strictly match the address Enter the VLAN ID cont
122. arameters about OAM link events and choose whether to notify the link event e RFI Choose whether to notify the link faults like dying gasp and critical event e Remote Loopback Start or stop the remote loopback choose to ignore or to process the received remote loopback request e Statistics View the statistics about the detailed Ethernet OAM traffic information and event log information e DLDP Configure the DLDP function to allow the switch to monitor the physical configuration of the cables and detect whether a unidirectional link exists Chapter 9 Multicast This module is used to configure multicast function of the switch Here mainly introduces e IGMP Snooping Configure global parameters of IGMP Snooping function port properties VLAN and multicast VLAN e MLD Snooping Configure global parameters of MLD Snooping function port properties VLAN and multicast VLAN e Multicast Table View the information of IPv4 and IPv6 multicast groups already on the switch Chapter 10 QoS This module is used to configure QoS function to provide different quality of service for various network applications and requirements Here mainly introduces e DiffServ Configure priorities port priority 802 1P priority and DSCP priority e Bandwidth Control Configure rate limit feature to control the traffic rate on each port configure storm control feature to filter broadcast multicast and UL frame in the network e Voice VLAN
123. aring all the ports of the LAG will delete this LAG 50 Tips 1 The LAG can be deleted by clearing its all member ports 2 A port can only be added to a LAG If a port is the member of a LAG or is dynamically aggregated as the LACP member the port number will be displayed in gray and can not be selected 5 2 3 LACP Config LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol is defined in IEEE802 3ad 802 1ax and enables the dynamic link aggregation and disaggregation by exchanging LACP packets with its partner The switch can dynamically group similarly configured ports into a single logical link which will highly extend the bandwidth and flexibly balance the load With the LACP feature enabled the port will notify its partner of the system priority system MAC port priority port number and operation key operation key is determined by the physical properties of the port upper layer protocol and admin key The device with higher priority will lead the aggregation and disaggregation System priority and system MAC decide the priority of the device The smaller the system priority the higher the priority of the device is With the same system priority the device owning the smaller system MAC has the higher priority The device with the higher priority will choose the ports to be aggregated based on the port priority port number and operation key Only the ports with the same operation key can be selected into the same aggregation group In an agg
124. ast address table when the switch listens to MLD Done message from the host the router sends the Multicast Address Specific Query message of the port to check if other hosts need this multicast if yes the switch will receive MLD report message if no the switch will receive no response from the hosts and the switch will remove the port from the multicast address table The router regularly sends MLD query messages After receiving the MLD query messages the switch will remove the port from the multicast address table if the switch receives no MLD report message from the host within a period of time 147 gt MLD Snooping Fundamentals 1 MLD Messages MLD Queries MLD Queries include General Queries and Multicast Address Specific Queries MASQs and are sent out from the MLD router MLD Reports When a host wants to join a multicast group or responds to the MLD queries it will send out an MLD report MLD Done Messages When a host wants to leave a multicast group it will send out an MLD Done message to inform the IPv6 multicast routers of its leave 2 Relevant Ports of the Switch Router Port Indicates the switch port that links toward the MLD router Member Port Indicates the switch port that links toward the multicast members 3 Timers Router Port Aging Time Within this time if the switch does not receive MLD queries from the router port it will delete this port from the router port list The default value is 260 seconds M
125. atch the address Select the time range for the rule to take effect 11 2 5 Extend IP ACL Extend IP ACLs analyze and process data packets based on a series of match conditions which can be the source IP addresses destination IP addresses IP protocol and other information of this sort carried in the packets Choose the menu ACL ACL Config Extend IP ACL to load the following page 180 Create Extend IP Rule ACLID Extend IPACL y Rule ID PAN Operation Permit v Fragment O O sp EE Mask O DP Mask IP Protocol am M Select ICMP ICMP Type Sa ICMP Code sid TCP Flag URG ACK PSH RST SYN FIN S Port is D Port TY IP ToS All v IP Pre All M Time Range No Limit x Figure11 8 Create Extend IP Rule The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Create Extend IP Rule ACL ID Select the desired Extend IP ACL for configuration Rule ID Enter the rule ID Operation Select the operation for the switch to process packets which match the rules e Permit Forward packets e Deny Discard Packets Fragment Select if the rule will take effect on the fragment packets When the fragment is selected this rule will process all the fragments and the last piece of fragment will be always forwarded S IP Enter the source IP address contained in the rule D IP Enter the destination IP address contained in the rule Mask Enter IP address mask If it is set to 1 it must strictly match the
126. atic Address The static address table maintains the static address entries which can be added or removed manually independent of the aging time In the stable networks the static MAC address entries can facilitate the switch to reduce broadcast packets and remarkably enhance the efficiency of packets forwarding without learning the address The static MAC address learned by the port with Port Security enabled in the static learning mode will be displayed in the Static Address Table Choose the menu Switching gt MAC Address Static Address to load the following page Create Static Address MAC Address Format 00 00 00 00 00 01 VLAN ID E 1 4094 Port Port1 x Search Option Search Option All v Static Address Table Select MAC Address VLAN ID Port Type Aging Status O Poti Total MAC Address O Note The maximum of the displayed entries is 100 by default please click the Search button to get the complete address entries Figure 5 13 Static Address 57 The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Create Static Address MAC Address VLAN ID Port gt Search Option Search Option gt Static Address Table Select MAC Address VLAN ID Port Type Aging Status Mote Enter the static MAC Address to be bound Enter the corresponding VLAN ID of the MAC address Select a port from the pull down list to be bound Select a Search Option from the pull down lis
127. atus of the port Displays the LAG to which the port belongs to RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service server provides the authentication service for the switch via the stored client information such as the user name password etc with the purpose to control the authentication and accounting status of the clients On this page you can configure the parameters of the authentication server Choose the menu Network Security gt 802 1X Radius Server to load the following page Authentication Config Primary IP Secondary IP Auth Port Auth Key Accounting Config Accounting Primary IP Secondary IP Accounting Port Accounting Key 0 0 0 0 Format 192 168 0 1 0 0 0 0 Format 192 168 0 1 i Lappy si Apply 1812 1 65535 O Enable Disable Format 192 168 0 1 Apply Format 192 168 0 1 5 Help 1 65535 Figure 12 24 Radius Server The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Authentication Config Primary IP Secondary IP Auth Port Auth Key gt Accounting Config Accounting Primary IP Enter the IP address of the authentication server Enter the IP address of the alternate authentication server Set the UDP port of authentication server s The default port is 1812 Set the shared password for the switch and the authentication servers to exchange messages Enable Disable the accounting feature Enter the IP address of the accounting server 2
128. aved in log file meanwhile On this page you can set the output channel for logs Choose the menu Maintenance gt Log gt Local Log to load the following page Local Log Config Select Channel Severity Status O v v o Log Buffer level _6 Enable o Log File level_2 Enable Note 1 Local log includes 2 channels log buffer and log file 2 There are 8 severity levels marked with values 0 7 The smaller value has the higher priority Figure 16 4 Local Log The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Local Log Config Select Select the desired entry to configure the corresponding local log Log Buffer Indicates the RAM for saving system log The inforamtion in the log buffer is displayed on the Log Table page It will be lost when the switch is restarted Log File Indicates the flash sector for saving system log The inforamtion in the log file will not be lost after the switch is restarted and can be exported on the Backup Log page Severity Specify the severity level of the log information output to each channel Only the log with the same or smaller severity level value will be output Status Enable Disable the channel 16 2 3 Remote Log Remote log feature enables the switch to send system logs to the Log Server Log Server is to centralize the system logs from various devices for the administrator to monitor and manage the whole network Choose the menu Maintenance Log Remote Log to load the following page
129. bandwidth requirement The frame transmission rate is limited to a maximum of 10 frames per second therefore the impact of OAM on data traffic is negligible On a point to point link between two OAM enabled devices OAM helps to monitor the link status from the following three points 1 Link performance monitoring for detecting link errors 2 Fault detection and alarm for reporting link errors to the administrators 3 Loopback testing for detecting link errors through non OAMPDUs Currently Ethernet OAM is mainly used to monitor the data link in the last mile gt OAMPDUs There are six types of OAMPDUs The following figure shows the details of the most commonly used OAMPDUs namely Information OAMPDU Event Notification OAMPDU and Loopback Control OAMPDU 6 6 2 1 42 1496 4 2 1 Sub r Event Notification OAMPDU Seq umowny Code OAM Remote Loopback Control OAMPDU Figure 8 1 OAMPDUs As Figure 8 1 shows OAMPDUs are standard length Ethernet frames They must be untagged and range from 64 to 1518 bytes 1 Dest addr The Dest addr Destination MAC address of an OAMPDU is the Slow_Protocols_ Multicast address 01 80 c2 00 00 02 2 Source addr The Source addr is the MAC address associated with the port through which the OAMPDU is transmitted 3 Type The type field is fixed to 0x8809 4 Sub type The Sub type field is fixed to 0x03 5 Flags The flags field contains status bits of an OAM entity
130. be advertised To prevent a series of successive LLDPDUs transmissions during a short period due to frequent changes in local device a transmission delay timer is set by network management to ensure that there is a defined minimum time between successive LLDP frame transmissions If the LLDP admin status of the port is changed from Disable Rx to TxRx Tx the Fast Start Mechanism will be active the transmit interval turns to be 1 second several LLDPDUs will be sent out and then the transmit interval comes back to the regular interval LLDPDU receipt mechanism When a port is working in TxRx or Rx mode the device will check the validity of the received LLDPDUs and the attached TLVs save this neighbor information to the local device and then set the aging time of this information according to the TTL value of TTL Time To Live TLV Once the TTL is 0 this neighbor information will be aged out immediately The aging time of the local information in the neighbor device is determined by TTL Hold Multiplier is a multiplier on the Transmit Interval that determines the actual TTL value used in an LLDPDU TTL Hold Multiplier Transmit Interval gt TLV TLV refers to Type Length Value and is contained in a LLDPDU Type identifies what kind of information is being sent Length indicates the length of information string in octets and Value is the actual information to be sent The basic TLV Format is shown as follows TLV information TLV type
131. belonging to the Guest VLAN can access the resources of the Guest VLAN without being authenticated But they need to be authenticated before accessing external resources After passing the authentication the ports will be removed from the Guest VLAN and be allowed to access the other resources With the Guest VLAN function enabled users can access the Guest VLAN to install 802 1X client program or upgrade their 802 1x clients without being authenticated If there is no supplicant past the authentication on the port in a certain time the switch will add the port to the Guest VLAN With 802 1X function enabled and Guest VLAN configured after the maximum number retries have been made to send the EAP Request Identity packets and there are still ports that have not sent any response back the switch will then add these ports into the Guest VLAN according to their link types Only when the corresponding user passes the 802 1X authentication the port will be removed from the Guest VLAN and added to the specified VLAN In addition the port will back to the Guest VLAN when its connected user logs off The 802 1X function is implemented on the Global Config Port Config and Radius Server pages 12 5 1 Global Config On this page you can enable the 802 1X authentication function globally and control the authentication process by specifying the Authentication Method Guest VLAN and various Timers Choose the menu Network Security 802 1X gt Glob
132. ber ports of the static multicast group gt Static Multicast List Select Select the static multicast group you want to change VLAN ID Displays the VLAN ID Multicast IP Displays the multicast group IP address Member Ports Displays the member ports of the static multicast group 9 2 6 Querier Config In an IPv6 multicast network that runs MLD a Layer 3 multicast device works as an MLD querier to send out MLD queries and manage the multicast table But MLD is not supported by the devices in Layer 2 network MLD Snooping Querier can act as an MLD Router in Layer 2 network It can help to create and maintain multicast forwarding table on the switch with the Query messages it generates Choose the menu Multicast gt MLD Snooping Querier Config to load the following page Querier Config VLAN ID 14094 Maximum Response Time 10 sec 1 25 i Query Interval 25 sec 2 300 Query Source IP FES0 02FF FFFF FE00 0001 Format FE80 ABEC 12EA Querier List VLANID Select VLAN ID Maximum Response Time Query Interval Query Source IP O Apply Delete Help Total Queriers 0 Figure 9 18 Querier Config The following entries are displayed on this screen 154 Querier Config VLAN ID Maximum Response Time Query Interval Query Source IP Querier List Select VLAN ID Maximum Response Time Query Interval Query Source IP Anzte The MLD Snooping Querier doesn
133. ble O 5 Disable Disable O 6 Disable Disable E O 7 Disable Disable Fj 8 Disable Disable O g Disable Disable Fj 10 Disable Disable O 11 Disable Disable oO 12 Disable Disable Figure 5 2 Port Mirror Config 43 The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Mirroring Port Mirroring Port Select a port from the pull down list as the mirroring port When disable is selected the Port Mirror feature will be disabled gt Mirrored Port Port Select Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Select Select the desired port as a mirrored port It is multi optional Port Displays the port number Ingress Enable Disable the Ingress feature When the Ingress is enabled the incoming packets received by the mirrored port will be copied to the mirroring port Egress Enable Disable the Egress feature When the Egress is enabled the outgoing packets sent by the mirrored port will be copied to the mirroring port LAG Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to The LAG member can not be selected as the mirrored port or mirroring port Anote 1 The LAG member can not be selected as the mirrored port or mirroring port 2 A port can not be set as the mirrored port and the mirroring port simultaneously 3 The Port Mirror function can take effect span the multiple VLANs 5 1 3 Port Security MAC Address Table maintains the mapping relations
134. c None monitor Disable O 10 public None monitor Disable O 11 public None monitor Disable O 12 public None monitor Disable Figure 13 11 Event Config The following entries are displayed on this screen 234 13 3 3 Alarm Config Event Table Select Index User Description Type Owner Status Select the desired entry for configuration Displays the index number of the entry Enter the name of the User or the community to which the event belongs Give a description to the event for identification Select the event type which determines the act way of the network device in response to an event e None No processing e Log Logging the event e Notify Sending trap messages to the management station e Log amp Notify Logging the event and sending trap messages to the management station Enter the name of the device or user that defined the entry Enable Disable the corresponding event entry On this page you can configure Statistic Group and Alarm Group for RMON Choose the menu SNMP gt RMON gt Alarm Config to load the following page Alarm Table Select Index on 10 11 Variable DropEvents DropEvents DropEvents DropEvents DropEvents DropEvents DropEvents DropEvents DropEvents DropEvents DropEvents DropEvents DropEvents v Port Port 1 Port 1 Port 1 Port 1 Port 1 Port 1
135. can manually add a candidate switch to the cluster as well as remove the designated member switch from the cluster On this page you can configure and manage the member switch Choose the menu Cluster Cluser Member Config to load the following page Create Member Member MAC Member Info Select Device Name Member MAC IP Address Status Role Online Time Hops WES 00 14 78 00 00 CA 192 168 1 2 Online Member 0 00 19 4 10 Manage Delete Refresh Help Figure 15 17 Member Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Create Member Member MAC Enter the MAC address of the candidate switch gt Member Info Select Select the desired entry to manage delete the corresponding member switch Device Name Display the description of the member switch Member MAC Displays the MAC address of the member switch IP Address Displays the IP address of the member switch used in the cluster Status Displays the connection status of the member switch Role Displays the role the switch plays currently Online Time Displays the time when the member switch is added to the cluster Hops Displays the hop count from the member switch to the commander switch Manage Click the Manage button after selecting the desired entry to log on to the Web management page of the corresponding member switch 261 15 3 4 Cluster Topology On this page you can see the whole cluster topology Click the node switch to direct
136. can be generated by the auto learning mechanism of the switch The Dynamic Address Table can update automatically by auto learning or the MAC address aging out mechanism To fully utilize the MAC address table which has a limited capacity the switch adopts an aging mechanism for updating the table That is the switch removes the MAC address entries related to a network device if no packet is received from the device within the aging time 58 On this page you can configure the dynamic MAC address entry Choose the menu Switching gt MAC Address gt Dynamic Address to load the following page Aging Config Auto Aging Enable Disable y i Apply Aging Time 300 sec 10 630 default 300 Search Option Search Option EN x Dynamic Address Table Select MAC Address WLAN ID Port Type Aging Status O 6C 62 6D F5 9D 86 1 6 Dynamic Aging Total MAC Address 1 Note The maximum of the displayed entries is 100 by default please click the Search button to get the complete address entries Figure 5 14 Dynamic Address The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Aging Config Auto Aging Allows you to Enable Disable the Auto Aging feature Aging Time Enter the Aging Time for the dynamic address gt Search Option Search Option Select a Search Option from the pull down list and click the Search button to find your desired entry in the Dynamic Address Table e MAC Enter the MAC address of your desired en
137. cast Filter Router Port Aging Time Member Port Aging Time Last Listener Query Interval Last Listener Query Count Multicast VLAN Multicast VLAN ID Anote 1 Choose to forward or drop unknown multicast data Unknown IPv6 multicast packets refer to those packets without corresponding forwarding entries in the IPv6 multicast table When unknown multicast filter is enabled the switch will discard all received unknown IPv6 multicast packets When unknown multicast filer is disabled all unknown IPv6 multicast packets are flooded in the ingress VLAN Enter the global router port aging time If the router port does not receive Query Message in the aging time it will be aged Enter the global member port aging time If the member port does not receive Report Message in the aging time it will be aged Enter the Last Listener Query interval time When the multicast group has no more member ports it will send the Specific Query Message with this interval time to check whether there is another listener Enter the Last Listener Query numbers When the multicast group has no more member ports it will send this numbers of Specific Query Message to check whether there is another listener Enable or disable multicast VLAN function When multicast VLAN is enabled all multicast data will forward in this VLAN if this port belongs to the VLAN Enter the multicast VLAN ID When Unknown Multicast Filter is confi
138. ce of three mandatory TLVs followed by one or more optional TLVs plus an End of LLDPDU TLV as shown in the figure below Chassis ID TLV Port ID TLV TTL TLV and End TLV are the four mandatory TLVs for a LLDPDU Optional TLVs provide various details about the LLDP agent advertising them and they are selected by network management M mandatory TLV required for all LLDPDUs The maximum length of the LLDPDU shall be the maximum information field length allowed by the particular transmission rate and protocol In IEEE 802 3 MACs for example the maximum LLDPDU length is the maximum data field length for the basic untagged MAC frame 1500 octets gt LLDP Working Mechanism 1 LLDP Admin Status The transmission and the reception of LLDPDUs can be separately enabled for every port making it possible to configure an implementation to restrict the port either to transmit only or receive only or to allow the port to both transmit and receive LLDPDUs Four LLDP admin statuses are supported by each port o Tx amp Rx the port can both transmit and receive LLDPDUs O Rx_Only the port can receive LLDPDUs only o Tx_Only the port can transmit LLDPDUs only 237 2 Disable the port cannot transmit or receive LLDPDUs LLDPDU transmission mechanism If the ports are working in TxRx or Tx mode they will advertise local information by sending LLDPDUs periodically If there is a change in the local device the change notification will
139. cess Control Lists restrict untrusted access to the protected resource Provides SSHv1 v2 SSL 2 0 3 0 and TLS v1 for access encryption e Manageability IP Clustering provides high scalability and easy Single IP Management Supports Telnet CLI SNMP v1 v2c v3 RMON and web access Port Mirroring enables monitoring selected ingress egress traffic 2 3 Appearance Description 2 3 1 Front Panel TP LINK gsi AA AAA A A IA A AN 0 ES oo A AAAA Hf ee AQ Y IO TTET Sen T T VEEE Figure 2 1 Front Panel The following parts are located on the front panel of the switch gt 10 100Mbps RJ45 Ports Designed to connect to a device with the bandwidth of 10Mbps or 100Mbps Each has a corresponding 10 100M LED gt 10 100 1000Mbps RJ45 Ports Designed to connect to a device with the bandwidth of 10Mbps 100Mbps or 1000Mbps Each has a corresponding 1000M LED gt SFP Ports Designed to install the SFP module Port 25F 28F share the same LED with Port 25 28 respectively gt Console Port Designed to connect with the serial port of a computer or terminal for monitoring and configuring the switch gt LEDs Name Status Indication On Power is on Power Flashing Power supply is abnormal Off Power is off or power supply is abnormal On The switch is working abnormally System Flashing The switch is working normally Off The switch is working abnormally A 100Mbps devic
140. ch will forward the PADS packets without the Circuit ID tag directly On the PPPoE Circuit ID page you can enable the PPPoE Circuit ID function globally Each port s PPPoE Circuit ID Insertion feature and type can be configured separately Choose the menu Network Security gt PPPoE Config PPPoE Circuit ID to load the following page 218 Global Config PPPoE Circuit ID Insertion Enable Disable Port Config Port Select Port Port State Circuit 1D Type UDF Value O Disable v IP ov E O 1 Disable IP A O 2 Disable IP O 3 Disable IP O 4 Disable IP E O 5 Disable IP O 6 Disable IP O 7 Disable IP O 8 Disable IP O g Disable IP O 10 Disable IP v Figure 12 26 PPPoE Circuit ID Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config PPPoE Circuit ID Enable Disable the PPPoE Circuit ID Insertion function globally Insertion gt Port Config Port Select Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Select Select the desired port for configuration It is multi optional Port Displays the port number Port State Enable Disable the PPPoE Circuit ID Insertion feature for the port Circuit ID Type Specify the Circuit ID type for the port e IP The IP address of the switch will be used to encode the Circuit ID option This is the default value e MAC The MAC address of the switch will be used to encode the Ci
141. cheduling schedule mode classification Figure 10 1 QoS function e Traffic classification Identifies packets conforming to certain characters according to certain rules Map The user can map the ingress packets to different priority queues based on the priority modes This switch implements three priority modes based on port on 802 1P and on DSCP e Queue scheduling algorithm When the network is congested the problem that many packets compete for resources must be solved usually in the way of queue scheduling The switch supports four schedule modes SP WRR SP WRR and Equ gt Priority Mode This switch implements three priority modes based on port on 802 1P and on DSCP By default the priority mode based on port is enabled and the other two modes are optional 1 Port Priority Port priority is just a property of the port After port priority is configured the data stream will be mapped to the egress queues according to the CoS of the port and the mapping relationship between CoS and queues 159 2 802 1P Priority TAG 4 bytes Ethernet Frame 3bit for CoS 802 1p priority PRI CFI VLAN ID 802 1 Q p Tag Figure 10 2 802 1Q frame As shown in the figure above each 802 1Q Tag has a Pri field comprising 3 bits The 3 bit priority field is 802 1p priority in the range of O to 7 802 1P priority determines the priority of the packets based on the Pri value On the Web management page of the switch you can conf
142. cilitates you to monitor the traffic and locate faults promptly Choose the menu Switching Traffic Monitor Traffic Statistics to load the following page Auto Refresh Auto Refresh O Enable Disable Refresh Rate Statistics Received Broadcast Multicast Unicast Alignment Errors UndersizePkts Pktsb4Octets Pkts65to1 27 Octets Pkts128to2550ctets Pkts256to511Octets sec 3 300 pot 1 select Sent Broadcast Multicast Unicast aoe ralia amp 0 0 0 0 Collisions 0 0 0 0 0 Pkts512t010230ctets O PktsOver1 0230ctets 0 Figure 5 11 Traffic Statistics The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Auto Refresh Auto Refresh Refresh Rate gt Statistics Port Received Allows you to Enable Disable refreshing the Traffic Summary automatically Enter a value in seconds to specify the refresh interval Enter a port number and click the Select button to view the traffic statistics of the corresponding port Displays the details of the packets received on the port 54 Sent Displays the details of the packets transmitted on the port Broadcast Displays the number of good broadcast packets received or transmitted on the port The error frames are not counted in Multicast Displays the number of good multicast packets received or transmitted on the port The error frames are not counted in Unicast Displays the number of good unicast packets received
143. colons represent when converting them to zeros to restore a 128 bit IPv6 address An IPv6 address consists of two parts address prefix and interface ID The address prefix and the interface ID are respectively equivalent to the network ID and the host ID in an IPv4 address An IPv6 address prefix is represented in IPv6 address prefix length format where IPv6 address is an IPv6 address in any of the above mentioned formats and prefix length is a decimal number indicating how many leftmost bits from the preceding IPv6 address are used as the address prefix IPv6 address classification IPv6 addresses fall into three types unicast address multicast address and anycast address e Unicast address An identifier for a single interface on a single node A packet that is sent to a unicast address is delivered to the interface identified by that address e Multicast address An identifier for a set of interfaces typically belonging to different nodes similar to an IPv4 multicast address A packet sent to a multicast address is delivered to all interfaces identified by that address There are no broadcast addresses in IPv6 Their function is superseded by multicast addresses e Anycast address An identifier for a set of interfaces typically belonging to different nodes A packet sent to an anycast address is delivered to one of the interfaces identified by that address the nearest one according to the routing protocols measure of
144. ction globally Enter the interval for the local device to transmit LLDPDU to its neighbors The default value is 30 seconds Enter a multiplier on the Transmit Interval It determines the actual TTL Time To Live value used in an LLDPDU TTL Hold Multiplier Transmit Interval The default value is 4 Enter a value from 1 to 8192 in seconds to specify the time for the local device to transmit LLDPDU to its neighbors after changes occur so as to prevent LLDPDU being sent frequently The default value is 2 seconds This parameter indicates the amount of delay from when LLDP status becomes disable until re initialization will be attempted The default value is 3 seconds Specify the interval of Trap message which will be sent from local device to network management system The default value is 5 seconds When the port s LLDP state transforms from Disable or Rx_Only to Tx amp Rx or Tx_Only the fast start mechanism will be enabled that is the transmit interval will be shorten to a second and several LLDPDUs will be sent out the number of LLDPDUs equals this parameter The default value is 3 On this page you can configure all ports LLDP parameters Choose the menu LLDP gt Basic Config Port Config to load the following page 241 LLDP Port Config Select Port ONIO He Qin pod oagOogoongogoogoooo0o gt Pot Admin Status Notification Mode Included TL s Disable v Disable v TG RX Disabl
145. d packets are mapped based on port priority mode With the same value the 802 1P priority tag and the CoS will be mapped to the same TC Choose the menu QoS gt DiffServ gt 802 1P CoS Mapping to load the following page 802 1P Priority Config 802 1P Priority Enable Disable Apply Priority and CoS mapping Config Tagrid CoS id Queue TC id Y Tag id CoS id Queue TC id Tag id CoS id Queue TC id 0 TC1 1 TCO 2 TCO 3 TC1 4 TC2 5 TC2 6 TC3 7 TC3 note Among the Queue TC id TCO TC1 TC3 the bigger value the higher priority Figure 10 8 802 1P Priority 164 The following entries are displayed on this screen gt 802 1P Priority Config 802 1P Priority Enable Disable 802 1P Priority gt Priority and CoS mapping Config Tag id Cos id Indicates the precedence level defined by IEEE802 1P and the CoS ID Queue TC id Indicates the priority level of egress queue the packets with tag and CoS id are mapped to The priority levels of egress queue are labeled as TCO TC1 TC2 and TC3 By default the mapping relation between tag cos and the egress queue is 0 TC1 1 TCO 2 TCO 3 TC1 4 TC2 5 TC2 6 TC3 7 TC3 Mnote To complete QoS function configuration you have to go to the Schedule Mode page to select a schedule mode after the configuration is finished on this page Configuration Procedure Step Operation Description 1 Configure the mapping Required On QoS DiffServ 802 1P CoS mapping rela
146. d a connection with the attacker Ping Flooding The attacker floods the destination system with Ping broadcast storm packets to forbid the system to respond to the legal communication SYN SYN ACK Flooding The attacker uses a fake IP address to send TCP request packets to the Server Upon receiving the request packets the Server responds with SYN ACK packets Since the IP address is fake no response will be returned The Server will keep on sending SYN ACK packets If the attacker sends overflowing fake request packets the network resource will be occupied maliciously and the requests of the legal clients will be denied winNuke Attack Since the Operation System with bugs can not correctly process the URG Urgent Pointer of TCP packets the attacker sends this type of packets to the TCP port139 NetBIOS of the Host with the Operation System bugs which will cause the Host with a blue screen 207 DoS Attack Type Description Ping Of Death ICMP ECHO Request Packet whose sum of Fragment Offset and Total Length fields in the IP header is greater than 65535 may cause Ping of Death attack As the maximum packet length of an IPv4 packet including the IP header is 65 535 bytes many computer systems could not properly handle this malformed or malicious ICMP ECHO Request Packet Thus the hosts may break down or reboot automatically when receive this kind of packet Table 12 1 Defendable DoS
147. d of the link event Displays the number of errors that is required to be exceeded in order for the event to be generated Displays the number of errors that have been detected since the OAM sublayer was reset 8 6 DLDP gt DLDP Overview DLDP Device Link Detection Protocol is a Layer 2 protocol that enables devices connected through fiber or twisted pair Ethernet cables to monitor the physical configuration of the cables and detect whether a unidirectional link exists When a unidirectional link appears the local device can receive packets from the peer device through the link layer but the peer device cannot receive packets from the local device Unidirectional links can cause a variety of problems such as spanning tree topology loops Once detecting a unidirectional link DLDP can shut down the related port automatically or inform users gt DLDP Operation Mechanism 1 DLDP Link States DLDP defines 6 link states for a device Initial Inactive Active Advertisement Probe and Disable State Description Initial DLDP is disabled Inactive DLDP is enabled but the link is down Active This state is temporary and it indicates that 1 DLDP is enabled and the link is up 2 The neighbor entries in this device are empty 125 State Description Advertisement This state indicates that no unidirectional link is detected which includes two kinds of situations 1 This device establishes bidirec
148. d on the MAC address you entered Select Select the desired entry It is multi optional MAC Address Displays the MAC address Description Displays the user defined description of the MAC address VLAN ID Displays the corresponding VLAN ID of the MAC address Operation Click the Edit button to modify the settings of the entry And click the Modify button to apply your settings 69 6 2 2 Port Enable On this page you can enable the port for the MAC VLAN feature Only the port is enabled can the configured MAC VLAN take effect Choose the menu VLAN gt MAC VLAN gt Port Enable to load the following page Port Enable Fl i F 2 O 3 O a Os Oe O 7 O se Oa O10 O11 O12 O13 C14 O15 O16 C17 O18 O19 O20 021 O22 023 O 24 LAG1 O25461 Ci26aci 027 O 28 Figure 6 8 Enable MAC VLAN for Port Select your desired port for VLAN Mapping function All the ports are disabled for VLAN Mapping function by default Configuration Procedure Step Operation Description 1 Set the link type for Required On the VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt Port Config page set port the link type for the port basing on its connected device 2 Create VLAN Required On the VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page click the Create button to create a VLAN Enter the VLAN ID and the description for the VLAN Meanwhile specify its member ports 3 Create MAC VLAN Required On the VLAN gt MAC VLAN page create the MAC VLAN For the device in a MAC
149. d router ports to the VLAN on the VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN page e Configure the link type of the member ports as GENERAL e Configure the link type of the router ports as TRUNK or configure the egress rule as tagged GENERAL Configure parameters for Optional Enable and configure a multicast VLAN on the multicast VLAN Multicast IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN page It is recommended to keep the default time parameters Look over the configuration If it is successfully configured the VLAN ID of the multicast VLAN will be displayed in the IGMP Snooping Status table on the Multicast IGMP Snooping Snooping Config page Application Example for Multicast VLAN gt Network Requirements Multicast source sends multicast streams via the router and the streams are transmitted to user A and user B through the switch Router Its WAN port is connected to the multicast source its LAN port is connected to the switch The multicast packets are transmitted in VLAN3 Switch Port 3 is connected to the router and the packets are transmitted in VLAN3 port 4 is connected to user A and the packets are transmitted in VLAN4 port 5 is connected to user B and the packets are transmitted in VLAN5 User A Connected to Port 4 of the switch User B Connected to port 5 of the switch 142 Configure a multicast VLAN and user A and B receive multicast streams through the multicast VLAN gt Network Diagram Mu
150. de with proper security level according to your actual application requirement SNMP v1 SNMP v1 adopts Community Name authentication The community name is used to define the relation between SNMP Management Station and SNMP Agent The SNMP packets 220 failing to pass community name authentication are discarded The community name can limit access to SNMP Agent from SNMP NMS functioning as a password SNMP v2c SNMP v2c also adopts community name authentication It is compatible with SNMP v1 while enlarges the function of SNMP v1 SNMP v3 Basing on SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c SNMP v3 extremely enhances the security and manageability It adopts VACM View based Access Control Model and USM User Based Security Model authentication The user can configure the authentication and the encryption functions The authentication function is to limit the access of the illegal user by authenticating the senders of packets Meanwhile the encryption function is used to encrypt the packets transmitted between SNMP Management Station and SNMP Agent so as to prevent any information being stolen The multiple combinations of authentication function and encryption function can guarantee a more reliable communication between SNMP Management station and SNMP Agent gt MIB Introduction To uniquely identify the management objects of the device in SNMP messages SNMP adopts the hierarchical architecture to identify the managed objects It is like a tree and each
151. device information periodically to neighbors on the same IEEE 802 local area network The advertised information including details such as device identification capabilities and configuration settings is represented in TLV Type Length Value format according to the IEEE 802 1ab standard and these TLVs are encapsulated in LLDPDU Link Layer Discovery Protocol Data Unit The LLDPDU distributed via LLDP is stored by its recipients in a standard MIB Management Information Base making it possible for the information to be accessed by a Network Management System NMS using a management protocol such as the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP An IETF Standard MIB as well as a number of vendor specific MIBs have been created to describe a network s physical topology and associated systems within that topology However there is no standard protocol for populating these MIBs or communicating this information among stations on the IEEE 802 LAN LLDP protocol specifies a set The device running LLDP can automatically discover and learn about the neighbors allowing for interoperability between the network devices of different vendors This protocol allows two systems running different network layer protocols to learn about each other The LLDP information can be used by SNMP applications to simplify troubleshooting enhance network management and maintain an accurate network topology gt LLDPDU Format Each LLDPDU includes an ordered sequen
152. ding EAP Request Identity packets to the supplicant The supplicant system can also launch an 802 1X client program to initiate an 802 1X authentication through the sending of an EAPOL Start packet to the switch This TP LINK switch can authenticate supplicant systems in EAP relay mode or EAP terminating mode The following illustration of these two modes will take the 802 1X authentication procedure initiated by the supplicant system for example 1 EAP Relay Mode This mode is defined in 802 1X In this mode EAP packets are encapsulated in higher level protocol such as EAPOR packets to allow them successfully reach the authentication server This mode normally requires the RADIUS server to support the two fields of EAP the EAP message field and the Message authenticator field This switch supports EAP MD5 authentication way for the EAP relay mode The following figure describes the basic EAP MD5 authentication procedure Authentication Server Supplicant System EAPOL Start EAP Request Identity EAP Response Identity RADIUS Access Request RADIUS Access Challenge EAP Request EAP Response EAP Success RADIUS Access Request RADIUS Access Accept Figure 12 20 EAP MD5 Authentication Procedure 1 A supplicant system launches an 802 1X client program via its registered user name and password to initiate an access request through the sending of an EAPOL Start packet to the switch The 802 1X cli
153. e software operating system and networking software 239 TLV Description System Name TLV The System Name TLV allows network management to advertise the system s assigned name which should be the system s fully qualified domain name Management Address TLV The Management Address TLV identifies an address associated with the local LLDP agent that may be used to reach higher entities to assist discovery by network management Port VLAN ID TLV The Port VLAN ID TLV allows a VLAN bridge port to advertise the port s VLAN identifier PVID that will be associated with untagged or priority tagged frames Port And Protocol VLAN ID TLV The Port And Protocol VLAN ID TLV allows a bridge port to advertise a port and protocol VLAN ID VLAN Name TLV The VLAN Name TLV allows an IEEE 802 1Q compatible IEEE 802 LAN station to advertise the assigned name of any VLAN with which it is configured Link Aggregation TLV The Link Aggregation TLV indicates whether the link is capable of being aggregated whether the link is currently in an aggregation and if in an aggregation the port identification of the aggregation MAC PHY Configuration Status TLV The MAC PHY Configuration Status TLV identifies a The duplex and bit rate capability of the sending IEEE 802 3 LAN node that is connected to the physical medium b The current duplex and bit rate settings of the sending IEEE 802 3 LAN node c Whe
154. e Reserved Chassis ID Port ID Subtype Reserved Port ID TTL 0 Port Description System Name System Description System Capabilities Supported System Capabilities Enabled Management Address 0 0 0 0 Figure 14 3 Local Information The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Auto Refresh Port 1 select Auto Refresh Enable Disable the auto refresh function Refresh Rate Specify the auto refresh rate gt Local Info Enter the desired port number and click Select to display the information of the corresponding port 14 2 2 Neighbor Info On this page you can get the information of the neighbors Choose the menu LLDP Device Info Neighbor Info to load the following page Auto Refresh Auto Refresh O Enable Disable Refresh Rate sec 3 300 Neighbor Info Local Port Figure 14 4 Neighbor Information 243 System Name Chassis ID System Description Port fo Neighbor Port Infomation The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Auto Refresh Auto Refresh Enable Disable the auto refresh function Refresh Rate Specify the auto refresh rate gt Neighbor Info Port Select Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Local Port Displays the local port number connecting to the neighbor device System Name Displays the system name of the neighbor device Chassis ID Displays the Chassis I
155. e The Client broadcasts the DHCP DISCOVER packet to find the DHCP Server 194 2 DHCP OFFER Stage Upon receiving the DHCP DISCOVER packet the DHCP Server selects an IP address from the IP pool according to the assigning priority of the IP addresses and replies to the Client with DHCP OFFER packet carrying the IP address and other information 3 DHCP REQUEST Stage In the situation that there are several DHCP Servers sending the DHCP OFFER packets the Client will only respond to the first received DHCP OFFER packet and broadcast the DHCP REQUEST packet which includes the assigned IP address of the DHCP OFFER packet 4 DHCP ACK Stage Since the DHCP REQUEST packet is broadcasted all DHCP Servers on the network segment can receive it However only the requested Server processes the request If the DHCP Server acknowledges assigning this IP address to the Client it will send the DHCP ACK packet back to the Client Otherwise the Server will send the DHCP NAK packet to refuse assigning this IP address to the Client gt Option 82 The DHCP packets are classified into 8 types with the same format basing on the format of BOOTP packet The difference between DHCP packet and BOOTP packet is the Option field The Option field of the DHCP packet is used to expand the function for example the DHCP can transmit the control information and network parameters via the Option field so as to assign the IP address to the Client dynamically For th
156. e trapped in an endless circle for building the initial connection The performance of the network will be reduced extremely Scan SYNFIN The attacker sends the packet with its SYN field and the FIN field set to 1 The SYN field is used to request initial connection whereas the FIN field is used to request disconnection Therefore the packet of this type is illegal The switch can defend this type of illegal packet Xmascan The attacker sends the illegal packet with its TCP index FIN URG and PSH field set to 1 NULL Scan Attack The attacker sends the illegal packet with its TCP index and all the control fields set to 0 During the TCP connection and data transmission the packets with all the control fields set to O are considered as the illegal packets SYN sPort less 1024 The attacker sends the illegal packet with its TCP SYN field set to 1 and source port less than 1024 Smurf Attack By pretending to be a Host the attacker broadcasts request packets for ICMP response in the LAN When receiving the request packet all the Hosts in the LAN will respond and send the reply packets to the actual Host which will causes this Host to be attacked Blat Attack The attacker sends the illegal packet with its source port and destination port on Layer 4 the same and its URG field set to 1 Similar to the Land Attack the system performance of the attacked Host is reduced since the Host circularly attempts to buil
157. e 12 4 ARP Scanning The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Scanning Option Start IP Address End IP Address VLAN ID Scan Scanning Result Select Host Name IP Address MAC Address VLAN ID Port Protect Type Collision Specify the Start IP Address Specify the End IP Address Enter the VLAN ID If blank the switch will send the untagged packets for scanning Click the Scan button to scan the Hosts in the LAN Select the desired entry to be bound or deleted Displays the Host Name here Displays the IP Address of the Host Displays the MAC Address of the Host Displays the VLAN ID here Displays the number of port connected to the Host Displays the Protect Type of the entry Displays the Collision status of the entry e Warning Indicates that the collision may be caused by the MSTP function e Critical Indicates that the entry has a collision with the other entries 12 1 4 DHCP Snooping Nowadays the network is getting larger and more complicated The amount of the PCs always exceeds that of the assigned IP addresses The wireless network and the laptops are widely used and the locations of the PCs are always changed Therefore the corresponding IP address of the PC should be updated with a few configurations DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol the network configuration protocol optimized and developed basing on the BOOTP functions to solve the above mentioned
158. e Bound IP Range ID Max Groups LAG Disable Disable Disable Permit Disable Disable Disable permit 256 A Disable Disable Disable permit 256 Disable Disable Disable permit 256 Disable Disable Disable permit 256 Disable Disable Disable permit 256 Disable Disable Disable permit 256 Disable Disable Disable permit 256 Disable Disable Disable permit 256 Disable Disable Disable permit 256 Disable Disable Disable permit 256 Disable Disable Disable permit 256 Disable Disable Disable permit 256 y 1 The port filter configuration here has no effect on static multicast IP 2 Up to 15 IP Ranges can be bound to one port Please input the Bound IP Range ID in the format like 1 5 8 Figure 9 7 Port Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Port Config Port Select Select Port IGMP Snooping Fast Leave Filter Action Mode Bound IP Range 1D Max Groups LAG Anote dt Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Select the desired port for IGMP Snooping feature configuration It is multi optional Displays the port of the switch Enable Disable IGMP Snooping for the desired port Enable Disable Fast Leave feature for the desired port If Fast Leave is enabled for a port the switch will immediately remove this port from the multicast group upon receiving IG
159. e Detail A TX amp RX Disable Detail TX amp RX Disable Detail TX amp RX Disable Detail TXGRX Disable Detail Tx amp RX Disable Detail TXGRX Disable Detail Tx amp RX Disable Detail TX amp RX Disable Detail TXGRX Disable Detail TXGRX Disable Detail Tx amp RX Disable Detail TX amp RX Disable Detail TX amp RX Disable Detail v Figure 14 2 Port Configuration The following entries are displayed on this screen gt LLDP Port Config Port Select Admin Status Notification Mode Included TLVs Details 14 2Device Info Select the desired port to configure Select the port s LLDP operating mode e Tx amp Rx Send and receive LLDP frames e Rx_Only Only receive LLDP frames e Tx_Only Only send LLDP frames e Disable Neither send nor receive LLDP frames Enable Disable the ports SNMP notification If enabled the local device will notify the trap event to SNMP server Select TLVs to be included in outgoing LLDPDU Click Details to display the included TLVs You can view the LLDP information of the local device and its neighbors on the Local Info and Neighbor Info pages respectively 14 2 1 Local Info On this page you can see all ports configuration and system information Choose the menu LLDP Device Info Local Info to load the following page 242 Auto Refresh Auto Refresh Enable Disable Refresh Rate sec 3 300 Local Info Local Interface 1 Chassis ID Subtyp
160. e SNMP Group to control the network access by providing the users in various groups with different management rights via the Read View Write View and Notify View Choose the menu SNMP gt SNMP Config SNMP Group to load the following page 223 Group Config Group Name i 16 characters maximum Security Model v wi Security Level noauthNoPriv y Read View viewDefault v Write View None w Notify View None v Group Table Select GroupName ecuiY SecuriyLevel Read View Write View Notify View Operation al Note A group should contain a read view and the default read view is viewDefault Figure 13 5 SNMP Group The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Group Name Read View Write View Notify View Group Config Security Model Select the Security Model for the SNMP Group e vi SNMPv1 is defined for the group In this model the Community Name is used for authentication SNMP v1 can be configured on the SNMP Community page directly e v2c SNMPv2c is defined for the group In this model the Community Name is used for authentication SNMP v2c can be configured on the SNMP Community page directly e v3 SNMPv3 is defined for the group In this model the USM mechanism is used for authentication If SNMPv3 is enabled the Security Level field is enabled for configuration Security Level Select the Security Level for the SNMP v3 Group e noAuthNoPriv No authentication and no pri
161. e desired port for configuration It is multi optional Displays the port number Select the Link Type from the pull down list for the port ACCESS The ACCESS port can be added in a single VLAN and the egress rule of the port is UNTAG The PVID is same as the current VLAN ID If the current VLAN is deleted the PVID will be set to 1 by default TRUNK The TRUNK port can be added in multiple VLANs and the egress rule of the port is TAG The PVID can be set as the VID number of any VLAN the port belongs to GENERAL The GENERAL port can be added in multiple VLANs and set various egress rules according to the different VLANs The default egress rule is UNTAG The PVID can be set as the VID number of any VLAN the port belongs to Enter the PVID number of the port Displays the LAG to which the port belongs Click the Detail button to view the information of the VLAN to which the port belongs 67 Click the Detail button to view the information of the corresponding VLAN VLAN of Port 1 VLAN ID WLAN ID VLAN Name Operation 1 Default VLAN Remove Note Total WYLAN of Port 1 1 Figure 6 6 View the Current VLAN of Port The following entries are displayed on this screen gt VLAN of Port VLAN ID Select Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding entry based on the VLAN ID number you entered VLAN ID Displays the ID number of VLAN VLAN Name Displays the user defined description of VLAN Operation A
162. e details of the DHCP Option please refer to RFC 2132 Option 82 records the location of the DHCP Client Upon receiving the DHCP REQUEST packet the switch adds the Option 82 to the packet and then transmits the packet to DHCP Server Administrator can be acquainted with the location of the DHCP Client via Option 82 so as to locate the DHCP Client for fulfilling the security control and account management of Client The Server supported Option 82 also can set the distribution policy of IP addresses and the other parameters according to the Option 82 providing more flexible address distribution way Option 82 can contain 255 sub options at most If Option 82 is defined at least a sub option should be defined This switch supports two sub options Circuit ID and Remote ID Since there is no universal standard about the content of Option 82 different manufacturers define the sub options of Option 82 to their need For this switch the sub options are defined as the following The Circuit ID is defined to be the number of the port which receives the DHCP Request packets and its VLAN number The Remote ID is defined to be the MAC address of DHCP Snooping device which receives the DHCP Request packets from DHCP Clients gt DHCP Cheating Attack During the working process of DHCP generally there is no authentication mechanism between Server and Client If there are several DHCP servers in the network network confusion and security problem will happen
163. e distrusted port so as to enhance the network security Choose the menu Network Security IP MAC Binding DHCP Snooping to load the following page 196 DHCP Snooping Config DHCP Snooping Enable Disable Global Flow Control Disable w pps Apply Decline Threshold Disable w pps Decline Flow Control 5 v pps Option 82 Config Option 82 Support O Enable Disable Existed Option 82 field Keep v Customization Apply O Circuit ip O Remote ID Port Config Port Select Port Trusted Port MAC Verify Flow Control Decline Protect LAG oO Disable v Disable v Disable v Disable w O 1 Enable Disable Disable Disable he O 2 Enable Disable Disable Disable O 3 Enable Disable Disable Disable 7 O 4 Enable Disable Disable Disable A O 5 Enable Disable Disable Disable O 6 Enable Disable Disable Disable O 7 Enable Disable Disable Disable O 8 Enable Disable Disable Disable O g Enable Disable Disable Disable O 10 Enable Disable Disable Disable lt Figure 12 8 DHCP Snooping Mdote If you want to enable the DHCP Snooping feature for the member port of LAG please ensure the parameters of all the member ports are the same The following entries are displayed on this screen gt DHCP Snooping Config DHCP Snooping Enable Disable the DHCP Snooping function globally Global Flow Control Select the value t
164. e iieri aa in e dei eee 156 9 3 2 IPv6 Multicast Table ricos rl ias 157 Chapter 10 QoS ui iii pida 159 VOD gt DIS o LS AAA AA AA A A A RA 162 aKO TS a BRR mo a ma aLe A A EER E AAA artes 162 10 1 2 DSC Priority ae ae e e alta 163 10 1 3 802 1P C0S MappiNQ ccccccnnoooconcnoncnnnnnenencnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnoncnnnnnnnnnnrnnanannnnnninnss 164 10 1 4 Schedule Modenan iee A ee Rs 165 1072 Bandwidth Control mt iia 166 1024 Ra LM aia NATE 166 1032 2 Storm CONTON iaer ra 167 10 3 ONCE A A O A A r ENAN Rt 169 10 31 Global Comite 171 10 32 Port Confiesa 171 103 3 Ors 1a td iii 173 Chapter TAGLE tdi tie 175 11 1 THM RANGC 2 eee cece cece cece eee cette eee rere eee e eee E eee eee e reer eter eter tetera eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenegs 175 11 1 1 Time Range SUMMAIY cccoccoococoncccncccnoncnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnninnnnnnnces 175 111 2 Time Range Create ictericia 176 11 13 Holiday Config ee 177 112 ACEON A A AS 177 14 21 ACE SUMMANRY sa piety Geet eit tin 177 IZZ MAC Create sir sit tite tu aia ae either te rindo Bcd 178 MAD MACAC talado 178 1 24 StangdarasIP ACLac dit 179 ANS o A alata blah cece A Sot A Milita ast 180 11 3 Policy Coincido ina odia aida 182 1123 16 A e satabsecaes eaaa Saat Aarna ernie 182 11 3 2 Policy Create oooononicccnnnninccnnonoccnccnnncononnnnncncnncnnoninnnnnonnnnnnnnnnanannnnnnnnnnraninannnnnce 183 113 37 Action Create dci dt aaa 183 11 4
165. e is connected to the corresponding Green bt o port but no activity n Yellow A 10Mbps device is connected to the corresponding 10 100M port but no activity Flashing Data is being transmitted or received Off No device is connected to the corresponding port A 1000Mbps device is connected to the corresponding Green e o port but no activity n Yellow A 10 100Mbps device is connected to the corresponding 1000M port but no activity Flashing Data is being transmitted or received Off No device is connected to the corresponding port 2 3 2 Rear Panel The rear panel of TL SL5428E features a power socket and a Grounding Terminal marked with ag 5 a 100 240V 50 60Hz 0 6A Figure 2 2 Rear Panel gt Grounding Terminal TL SL5428E already comes with Lightning Protection Mechanism You can also ground the switch through the PE Protecting Earth cable of AC cord or with Ground Cable For detail information please refer to Installation Guide gt AC Power Socket Connect the female connector of the power cord here and the male connector to the AC power outlet Please make sure the voltage of the power supply meets the requirement of the input voltage 100 240V 50 60Hz 0 6A Return to CONTENTS Chapter 3 Login to the Switch 3 1 Login gt Inthe IPv4 network 1 To access the configuration utility open a web browser and type in the default address http 192 168 0 1 in the address fie
166. e member switches in the cluster Displays the time for the commander switch to keep the cluster information Displays the interval to send handshake packets Displays the IP address of TFTP server Displays the description of the member switch Displays the MAC address of the member switch Displays the IP address of the member switch used in the cluster Displays the connection status of the member switch Displays the role the switch plays currently Displays the time when the member switch is added to the cluster 257 Hops Displays the hop count from the member switch to the commander switch e Fora member switch the following page is displayed Global Config Cluster Enable Cluster Role Member Cluster Name TP Commander MAC 00 00 00 54 28 02 Refresh Help Figure 15 11 Cluster Summary for Member Switch The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config Cluster Displays the cluster status enabled or disabled of the switch Cluster Role Displays the role the switch plays in the cluster Cluster Name Displays the name of the current cluster the switch belongs to Commander MAC Displays the MAC address of the commander switch e For an individual switch the following page is displayed Global Config Cluster Disable Cluster Role Individual Figure 15 12 Cluster Summary for Individual Switch The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config Cluster Disp
167. e multicast address table is VLAN ID based on which the received multicast packets are forwarded in the VLAN owning the receiving port The multicast address table is not mapped to an egress port but a group port list When forwarding a multicast packet the switch looks up the multicast address table based on the destination multicast address of the multicast packet If the corresponding entry can not be found in the table the switch will broadcast the packet in the VLAN owning the receiving port If the corresponding entry can be found in the table it indicates that the destination address should be a group port list so the switch will duplicate this multicast data and deliver each port one copy The general format of the multicast address table is described as Figure 9 4 below VLANID MulticastIP_ Port Figure 9 4 Multicast Address Table gt IGMP Snooping In the network the hosts apply to the near router for joining leaving a multicast group by sending IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol messages When the up stream device forwards down the multicast data the switch is responsible for sending them to the hosts IGMP Snooping is a multicast control mechanism which can be used on the switch for dynamic registration of the multicast group The switch running IGMP Snooping manages and controls the multicast group via listening to and processing the IGMP messages transmitted between the hosts and the multicast router thereby effectiv
168. e of Electrical and Electronics Engineers to a device vendor It comprises the first 24 bits of a MAC address You can recognize which vendor a device belongs to according to the OUI address The following table shows the OUI addresses of several manufacturers The following OUI addresses are preset of the switch by default Number OUI Address Vendor 1 00 01 E3 00 00 00 Siemens phone 2 00 03 6B 00 00 00 Cisco phone 3 00 04 0D 00 00 00 Avaya phone 4 00 60 B9 00 00 00 Philips NEC phone 5 00 DO 1E 00 00 00 Pingtel phone 6 00 E0 75 00 00 00 Polycom phone 7 00 E0 BB 00 00 00 3com phone Table 10 1 OUI addresses on the switch gt Port Voice VLAN Mode A voice VLAN can operate in two modes automatic mode and manual mode Automatic Mode In this mode the switch automatically adds a port which receives voice packets to voice VLAN and determines the priority of the packets through learning the source MAC of the UNTAG packets sent from IP phone when it is powered on The aging time of voice VLAN can be configured on the switch If the switch does not receive any voice packet on the ingress port within the aging time the switch will remove this port from voice VLAN Voice ports are automatically added into or removed from voice VLAN Manual Mode You need to manually add the port of IP phone to voice VLAN and then the switch will assign ACL rules and configure the priority of the packets through lear
169. econdary VLANs Therefore they can save VLAN resources without considering the VLAN configuration in the lower layer Meanwhile the service provider can assign each user an individual Secondary VLAN so that users are separated at the Layer 2 level Private VLAN technology is mainly used in campus or enterprise networks to achieve user layer 2 separation and to save VLAN resources of uplink devices gt The Elements of a Private VLAN Primary VLAN A Private VLAN has one Primary VLAN and one Secondary VLAN Primary VLAN is the user VLAN uplink device can identify but it is not the actual VLAN the end user is in Every port in a private VLAN is a member of the primary VLAN The primary VLAN carries unidirectional traffic downstream from the promiscuous ports to the host ports and to other promiscuous ports Secondary VLAN Secondary VLAN is the actual VLAN the end user is in Secondary VLANs are associated with a primary VLAN and are used to carry traffic from hosts to uplink devices Promiscuous A promiscuous port connects to and communicates with the uplink device The PVID of the promiscuous port is the same with the Primary VLAN ID One promiscuous port can only join to one Primary VLAN Host A host port connects to and communicates with terminal device The PVID of the host port is the same as the Secondary VLAN ID One host port can only belong to one Private VLAN gt Features of Private VLAN 1 A Private VLAN contains one Pri
170. ected Port connected Port number of number of the Host together via Manual Binding ARP the Host together Scanning or DHCP Snooping 2 Enable the protection for the Required On the Network Security IP MAC bound entry Binding Binding Table page specify a protect type for the corresponding bound entry 3 Specify the trusted port Required On the Network Security ARP Inspection ARP Detect page specify the trusted port The specific ports such as up linked port routing port and LAG port should be set as Trusted Port 4 Enable ARP Detect feature Required On the Network Security gt ARP Inspection ARP Detect page enable the ARP Detect feature 12 2 2 ARP Defend With the ARP Defend enabled the switch can terminate receiving the ARP packets for 300 seconds when the transmission speed of the legal ARP packet on the port exceeds the defined value so as to avoid ARP Attack flood Choose the menu Network Security ARP Inspection ARP Defend to load the following page 203 ARP Defend Select OOOOOOO0000000000 Note Port a ROM Ba Oo VY BAMA A fF won Pot Defend Speed 10 100 Current Speed Status LAG Operation pps pps Disable v Disable 15 a B Disable 15 Disable 15 Disable 15 Disable 15 Disable 15 Disable 15 Disable 15 Disable 15 mi Disable 15 Disable 15 Disable 15 Disable 15 Disable 15 Disable 15 an pen ae gt Refresh Apply Hel
171. ed Yes O 12 Disable Disable Auto MAC Based Yes O 13 Disable Disable Auto MAC Based Yes d 14 Disable Disable Auto MAC Based Yes O 15 Disable Disable Auto MAC Based Yes FI 16 Disable Disable Auto MAC Based Yes vi Note 802 1 can not be enabled for LAG member Figure 12 23 Port Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Port Config Port Select Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Select Select your desired port for configuration It is multi optional Port Displays the port number Status Enable Disable the 802 1X authentication feature for the port Guest VLAN Enable Disable the Guest VLAN feature for the port Control Mode Specify the Control Mode for the port e Auto In this mode the port will normally work only after passing the 802 1X Authentication e Force Authorized In this mode the port can work normally without passing the 802 1X Authentication e Force Unauthorized In this mode the port is forbidden 215 Control Type Authorized LAG 12 5 3 Radius Server working for its fixed unauthorized status Specify the Control Type for the port MAC Based Any client connected to the port should pass the 802 1X Authentication for access Port Based All the clients connected to the port can access the network on the condition that any one of the clients has passed the 802 1X Authentication Displays the authentication st
172. ed on application and transport layers SSH encrypted connection is similar to a telnet connection but essentially the old telnet remote management method is not safe because the password and data transmitted with plain text can be easily intercepted SSH can provide information security and powerful authentication when you log on to the switch remotely through an insecure network environment It can encrypt all the transmission data and prevent the information in a remote management being leaked 35 Comprising server and client SSH has two versions V1 and V2 which are not compatible with each other In the communication SSH server and client can auto negotiate the SSH version and the encryption algorithm After getting a successful negotiation the client sends authentication request to the server for login and then the two can communicate with each other after successful authentication This switch supports SSH server and you can log on to the switch via SSH connection using SSH client software SSH key can be downloaded into the switch If the key is successfully downloaded the certificate authentication will be preferred for SSH access to the switch Choose the menu System Access Security SSH Config to load the following page Global Config SSH Enable Disable Protocol 1 O Enable Disable Protocol Y2 O Enable O Disable Idle Timeout 1120 sec 1 120 Max Connect 5 1 5 Key Download Choose the SSH public key f
173. edia This field is not described in detail in this chapter 4 VLAN ID VLAN ID is a 12 bit field indicating the ID of the VLAN to which this packet belongs It is in the range of O to 4 095 Generally O and 4 095 is not used so the field is in the range of 1 to 4 094 VLAN ID identifies the VLAN to which a packet belongs When the switch receives an un VLAN tagged packet it will encapsulate a VLAN tag with the default VLAN ID of the inbound port for the packet and the packet will be assigned to the default VLAN of the inbound port for transmission In this User Guide the tagged packet refers to the packet with VLAN tag whereas the untagged packet refers to the packet without VLAN tag and the priority tagged packet refers to the packet with VLAN tag whose VLAN ID is 0 gt Link Types of ports When creating the 802 1Q VLAN you should set the link type for the port according to its connected device The link types of port including the following three types 1 ACCESS The ACCESS port can be added in a single VLAN and the egress rule of the port is UNTAG The PVID is same as the current VLAN ID If the ACCESS port is added to another VLAN it will be removed from the current VLAN automatically 2 TRUNK The TRUNK port can be added in multiple VLANs and the egress rule of the port is TAG The TRUNK port is generally used to connect the cascaded network devices for it can receive and forward the packets of multiple VLANs When the
174. ee the configuration of the switch in the DHCP server if DHCP option is selected but no DHCP server exists in the network the switch will keep obtaining IP address from DHCP server until success If DHCP or BOOTP option is selected the switch will get network parameters dynamically from the Internet which means that its IP address subnet mask and default gateway can not be configured By default the IP address is 192 168 0 1 19 4 1 6 System IPv6 IPv6 Internet Protocol version 6 also called IPng IP next generation was developed by the IETF Internet Engineering Task Force as the successor to IPv4 Internet Protocol version 4 Compared with IPv4 IPv6 increases the IP address size from 32 bits to 128 bits this solves the IPv4 address exhaustion problem gt IPv6 features IPv6 has the following features 1 Adequate address space The source and destination IPv6 addresses are both 128 bits 16 bytes long IPv6 can provide 3 4 x 10 addresses to completely meet the requirements of hierarchical address division as well as allocation of public and private addresses Header format simplification IPv6 cuts down some IPv4 header fields or move them to IPv6 extension headers to reduce the load of basic IPv6 headers thus making IPv6 packet handling simple and improving the forwarding efficiency Although the IPv6 address size is four times that of IPv4 addresses the size of basic IPv6 headers is 40 bytes and is only twice
175. elect Manual to set Ingress Egress rate the system will automatically select integral multiple of 64Kbps that closestto the rate you entered as the real Ingress Egress rate Figure 10 10 Rate Limit 166 The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Rate Limit Config Port Select Select Port Ingress Rate bps Egress Rate bps LAG Anote Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Select the desired port for Rate configuration It is multi optional Displays the port number of the switch Configure the bandwidth for receiving packets on the port You can select a rate from the dropdown list or select Manual to set Ingress rate the system will automatically select integral multiple of 64Kbps that closest to the rate you entered as the real Ingress rate Configure the bandwidth for sending packets on the port You can select a rate from the dropdown list or select Manual to set Egress rate the system will automatically select integral multiple of 64Kbps that closest to the rate you entered as the real Egress rate Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to 1 Ifyou enable ingress rate limit feature for the storm control enabled port storm control feature will be disabled for this port 2 When selecting Manual to set Ingress Egress rate the system will automatically select integral multiple of 64Kbps that closest to the ra
176. ely 2 Create VLAN10 Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page create a VLAN with its VLAN ID as 10 owning Port 6 and Port 8 3 Create VLAN20 Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page create a VLAN with its VLAN ID as 20 owning Port 6 and Port 7 74 6 5 Application Example for MAC VLAN gt Network Requirements e Switch A and switch B are connected to meeting room A and meeting room B respectively and the two rooms are for all departments e Notebook A and Notebook B special for meeting room are of two different departments e The two departments are in VLAN10 and VLAN20 respectively The two notebooks can just access the server of their own departments that is Server A and Server B in the two meeting rooms e The MAC address of Notebook A is 00 19 56 8A 4C 71 Notebook B s MAC address is 00 19 56 82 3B 70 gt Network Diagram Server B Server A ort 2 Port Switch C Port i Switch A Switch B Port 21 Meeting Room A E E Notebook A Notebook B Meeting Room B gt Configuration Procedure e Configure switch A Step Operation Description 1 Configure the Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt Port Config page configure the Link Type of the link type of Port 11 and Port 12 as GENERAL and TRUNK respectively ports 2 Create VLAN10 Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page create a VLAN with its VLAN ID as 10 owning Por
177. ely prevents multicast groups being broadcasted in the network gt MLD Snooping Multicast Listener Discovery MLD snooping is applied for efficient distribution of IPv6 multicast data to clients and routers in a Layer 2 network With MLD snooping IPv6 multicast data is selectively forwarded to a list of ports that want to receive the data instead of being flooded to all 134 ports in a VLAN The list is constructed and maintained by snooping IPv6 multicast control packets MLD snooping performs a similar function in IPv6 as IGMP snooping in IPv4 The Multicast module is mainly for multicast management configuration of the switch including three submenus IGMP Snooping MLD Snooping and Multicast Table 9 1 IGMP Snooping gt IGMP Snooping Process The switch running IGMP Snooping listens to the IGMP messages transmitted between the host and the router and tracks the IGMP messages and the registered port When receiving IGMP report message the switch adds the port to the multicast address table when the switch listens to IGMP leave message from the host the router sends the Group Specific Query message of the port to check if other hosts need this multicast if yes the router will receive IGMP report message if no the router will receive no response from the hosts and the switch will remove the port from the multicast address table The router regularly sends IGMP query messages After receiving the IGMP query messages the switc
178. em System Tools System Reset to load the following page System Reset Reset Note The System Reset option will restore the configuration to default and your current settings will be lost Figure 4 17 System Reset Anzte After the system is reset the switch will be reset to the default and all the settings will be cleared 4 4 Access Security Access Security provides different security measures for the remote login so as to enhance the configuration management security It can be implemented on Access Control SSL Config and SSH Config pages 4 4 1 Access Control On this page you can control the users logging on to the Web management page to enhance the configuration management security The definitions of Admin and Guest refer to 4 2 User Management Choose the menu System gt Access Security gt Access Control to load the following page 32 Access Control Config Control Mode IP Address MAC Address Port 1 2 9 10 17 18 25 26 Session Config Session Timeout Access User Number Number Control Admin Number Guest Number Disable v Mask 3 4 5 6 7 8 JE 12 13 14 15 16 19 20 21 22 23 24 27 28 10 min 5 30 Enable Disable 1 16 0 15 Figure 4 18 Access Control The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Access Control Config Control Mode IP Address amp Mask MAC Address Port gt Session Config Session Timeout
179. ember Port Aging Time Within this time if the switch does not receive MLD reports from the member port it will delete this port from the MLD multicast group The default value is 260 seconds General Query Interval The interval between the multicast router sends out general queries Last Listener Query Interval The interval between the switch sends out MASQs Last Listener Query Count The number of MASQs that the switch sends before aging out a multicast address when there is no MLD report response gt MLD Snooping Process 1 General Query The MLD router regularly sends MLD general queries to query if the multicast groups contain any members When receiving MLD general queries the switch will forward them to all other ports in the VLAN The receiving port will be processed if the receiving port is not a router port yet it will be added to the router port list with its router port aging time specified if the receiving port is already a router port its router port aging time will be directly reset 2 Membership Report The host will send MLD report messages when it applies for joining a multicast group or responds to the MLD query message from the router When receiving MLD report message the switch will forward the report message via the router port in the VLAN and analyze the message to get the address of the multicast group the host applies for joining If the multicast group does not exist it will create the group entry The
180. ement Station to access the SNMP Agent functioning as the password 221 SNMP module is used to configure the SNMP function of the switch including three submenus SNMP Config Notification and RMON 13 1 SNMP Config The SNMP Config can be implemented on the Global Config SNMP View SNMP Group SNMP User and SNMP Community pages 13 1 1 Global Config To enable SNMP function please configure the SNMP function globally on this page Choose the menu SNMP SNMP Config Global Config to load the following page Global Config SNMP Enable Disable Apply Local Engine f Default ID Local Engine ID 80002e570300005428c069 10 64 Hex Apply Remote Engine oe Sah Apply Remote Engine ID 0 or 10 64 Hex Help Note The total hexadecimal characters of Engine ID should be even Figure 13 3 Global Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config SNMP Enable Disable the SNMP function gt Local Engine Local Engine ID Specify the switch s Engine ID for the remote clients The Engine ID is a unique alphanumeric string used to identify the SNMP engine on the switch gt Remote Engine Remote Engine ID Specify the Remote Engine ID for switch The Engine ID is a unique alphanumeric string used to identify the SNMP engine on the remote device which receives informs from switch Anote The amount of Engine ID characters must be even 222 13 1 2 SNMP View The OI
181. en or impedance Length If the connection status is normal here displays the length range of the cable Error If the connection status is close open or impedance here displays the error length of the cable Ano 1 The interval between two cable tests for one port must be more than 3 seconds 2 The result is more reasonable when the cable pair is in the open status 3 The test result is just for your reference 4 If the port is 100Mbps and its connection status is normal cable test can t get the length of the cable 269 16 4 Network Diagnostics This switch provides Ping test and Tracert test functions for network diagnostics 16 4 1 Ping Ping test function testing the connectivity between the switch and one node of the network facilitates you to test the network connectivity and reachability of the host so as to locate the network malfunctions Choose the menu Maintenance Network Diagnostics Ping to load the following page Ping Config Destination IP 192 168 0 1 Ping Times 4 g 1 10 Data Size 164 byte 1 1024 Interval 1000 millisec 100 1000 Ping Result Pinging 192 168 0 1 with 64 bytes of data Reply from 192 168 0 1 bytes 64 time lt 16ms TTL 64 Reply from 192 168 0 1 bytes 64 time lt 16ms TTL 64 Reply from 192 168 0 1 bytes 64 time lt 16ms TTL 64 Reply from 192 168 0 1 bytes 64 time lt 16ms TTL 64 Ping statistics for 192 168 0 1 Packets Sent 4 Received 4 Lost 0 0 lo
182. ent program then forwards the packet to the switch to start the authentication process 2 Upon receiving the authentication request packet the switch sends an EAP Request Identity packet to ask the 802 1X client program for the user name 3 The 802 1X client program responds by sending an EAP Response Identity packet to the switch with the user name included The switch then encapsulates the packet in a RADIUS Access Request packet and forwards it to the RADIUS server 4 Upon receiving the user name from the switch the RADIUS server retrieves the user name finds the corresponding password by matching the user name in its database encrypts the password using a randomly generated key and sends the key to the switch through an RADIUS Access Challenge packet The switch then sends the key to the 802 1X client program 211 5 Upon receiving the key encapsulated in an EAP Request MD5 Challenge packet from the switch the client program encrypts the password of the supplicant system with the key and sends the encrypted password contained in an EAP Response MD5 Challenge packet to the RADIUS server through the switch The encryption is irreversible 6 The RADIUS server compares the received encrypted password contained in a RADIUS Access Request packet with the locally encrypted password If the two match it will then send feedbacks through a RADIUS Access Accept packet and an EAP Success packet to the switch to indicate that the su
183. entication server is in trouble the alternate authentication server can substitute it to provide normal authentication service gt The Mechanism of an 802 1X Authentication System IEEE 802 1X authentication system uses EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol to exchange information between the supplicant system and the authentication server 1 EAP protocol packets transmitted between the supplicant system and the authenticator system are encapsulated as EAPOL packets 2 EAP protocol packets transmitted between the authenticator system and the RADIUS server can either be encapsulated as EAPOR EAP over RADIUS packets or be terminated at authenticator system and the authenticator system then communicate with RADIUS servers through PAP Password Authentication Protocol or CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol protocol packets 3 When a supplicant system passes the authentication the authentication server passes the information about the supplicant system to the authenticator system The authenticator system in turn determines the state authorized or unauthorized of the controlled port according to the instructions accept or reject received from the RADIUS server 210 gt 802 1X Authentication Procedure An 802 1X authentication can be initiated by supplicant system or authenticator system When the authenticator system detects an unauthenticated supplicant in LAN it will initiate the 802 1X authentication by sen
184. epeat Indicates that the link local address is duplicate It is illegal to access the switch using the IPv6 address including link local and global address Global Address Autoconfig via RA Message Enable global address When this option is enabled the switch automatically configures a auto configuration via global address and other information according to the address RA message prefix and other configuration parameters from the received RA Router Advertisement message Global Address Autoconfig via DHCPv6 Server Enable Global When this option is enabled the system will try to obtain the global Address Autoconfig address from the DHCPv6 Server via DHCPV6 Server Add a global address manually Address Format You can select the global address format according to your requirements e EUI 64 Indicates that you only need to specify an address prefix and then the system will create a global address automatically e Not EUI 64 Indicates that you have to specify an intact global address Global Address When selecting the mode of EUI 64 please input the address prefix here otherwise please input an intact IPv6 address here Global address Table Select Select the desired entry to delete or modify the corresponding global address Global Address Modify the global address Prefix Length Modify the prefix length of the global address Type Displays the configuration mode of the global address e Manual Indicat
185. er Query Interval Enter the time interval of sending a general query frame by IGMP Snooping Querier Max Response Enter the maximal time for the host to respond to a general query Time frame sent by IGMP Snooping Querier General Query Enter the source IP of the general query frame sent by IGMP Source IP Snooping Querier It should not be a multicast IP or a broadcast IP Last Member Query Enter the time interval of sending specific query frames by IGMP Interval Snooping Querier A specific query will be sent on condition that fast leave is not enabled and a leave frame is received 146 Last Member Query Times Last Member Query Source IP Enter the times of sending specific query frames by IGMP Snooping Querier At receiving a leave frame a specific query frame will be sent by IGMP Snooping Querier If a report frame is received before sending specific frames number reaches Last Member Query Times the switch will still treat the port as group member and stop sending specific query frames to the port otherwise the port will be removed from forward ports of the IP multicast group Enter the source IP of the specific query frame sent by IGMP Snooping Querier It should not be a multicast IP or a broadcast IP IGMP Snooping Querier Table VLAN ID Select Select VLAN ID Query Interval Max Response Time General Query Source IP Last Member Query Interval Last Member Query Times Last Member Quer
186. er that is the device that asks all hosts to report on the IP multicast groups they wish to join or to which they already belong The elected querier will be the device with the lowest IP address in the subnetwork IP Multicast Filtering It is a feature to allow or deny the Client to add the specified multicast group Multicast Switching A process whereby the switch filters incoming multicast frames for services forwhich no attached host has registered or forwards them to all ports contained within the designated multicast group 291 Layer 2 Data Link layer in the ISO 7 Layer Data Communications Protocol This is related directly to the hardware interface for network devices and passes on traffic based on MAC addresses Link Aggregation See Port Trunk Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP Allows ports to automatically negotiate a trunked link with LACP configured ports on another device Management Information Base MIB An acronym for Management Information Base It is a set of database objects that contains information about a specific device MD5 Message Digest Algorithm An algorithm that is used to create digital signatures It is intended for use with 32 bit machines and is safer than the MD4 algorithm which has been broken MD5 is a one way hash function meaning that it takes a message and converts it into a fixed string of digits also called a message digest Network Time Protocol NTP NTP provides the mechani
187. er Choose the menu Cluster Cluster Cluster Summary to load the following page e Fora candidate switch the following page is displayed Global Config Cluster Enable Cluster Role Candidate Figure 15 9 Cluster Summary for Candidate Switch The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config Cluster Displays the cluster status enabled or disabled of the switch Cluster Role Displays the role the switch plays in the cluster 256 e Foracommander switch the following page is displayed Global Config Cluster Cluster Role Cluster Name Cluster Config IP Pool Hold Time TFTP Server Member Info Device Name TP_1 TL SG32 10 00 14 78 00 00 CA Enable Commander TP 192 168 1 1 Mask 255 255 255 0 20 sec Interval Time 20 sec 192 168 0 6 Device MAC IP Address Status Role Online Time Hops 192 168 1 2 Online Member 0 08 22 1 Figure 15 10 Cluster Summary for Commander Switch The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config Cluster Cluster Role Cluster Name gt Cluster Config IP Pool amp Mask Hold Time Interval Time TFTP Server gt Member Info Device Name Device MAC IP Address Status Role Online Time Displays the cluster status enabled or disabled of the switch Displays the role the switch plays in the cluster Displays the name of the current cluster the switch belongs to Displays the private IP range of th
188. er List Select Select the filter ID you want to change Filter ID Displays the filter ID number Start Multicast IP Displays the start of the IP range End Multicast IP Displays the end of the IP range Anote The max number of filter entries is 30 152 9 2 4 Port Config On this page you can configure MLD Snooping function with each single port Choose the menu Multicast gt MLD Snooping Port Config to load the following page Port Config Select Port Filter Filter Mode Filter IDs Max Groups LAG O Disable vw Accept v 7 gl O 1 Disable Accept 128 a O 2 Disable Accept 128 O 3 Disable Accept 128 O 4 Disable Accept 128 O 5 Disable Accept 128 O 6 Disable Accept 128 L O 7 Disable Accept 128 O 8 Disable Accept 128 o 9 Disable Accept 128 o 10 Disable Accept 128 O 11 Disable Accept 128 o 12 Disable Accept 128 y Note 1 The port filter configuration here has no effect on static Multicast IP 2 Up to 15 filters can be bound to one port Please input the bound filter ID in the format like 1 5 8 3 Ifthe Max Groups value is setless than the current value some groups may be deleted to satisfy the restriction Figure 9 16 Port Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Port Config Select Select the port you want to configure Port Displays the port number Filter Choose to enable
189. er port Within this time if the switch doesn t receive IGMP report message from the member port it will consider this port is not a member port any more Leave Time Specify the interval between the switch receiving a leave message from a host and the switch removing the host from the multicast groups Router Ports Enter the static router port which is mainly used in the network with stable topology 141 Mote 1 The router port should be in the multicast VLAN otherwise the member ports can not receive multicast streams The Multicast VLAN won t take effect unless you first complete the configuration for the corresponding VLAN owning the port on the 802 1Q VLAN page It is recommended to choose GENERAL as the link type of the member ports in the multicast VLAN Configure the link type of the router port in the multicast VLAN as TRUNK or configure the egress rule as TAG and the link type as GENERAL otherwise all the member ports in the multicast VLAN can not receive multicast streams After a multicast VLAN is created all the IGMP packets will be processed only within the multicast VLAN Configuration procedure Step Operation Description 1 Enable IGMP Snooping Required Enable IGMP Snooping globally on the switch function and for the port on Multicast IGMP Snooping Snooping Config and Port Config page Create a multicast VLAN Required Create a multicast VLAN and add all the member ports an
190. er the maximum time in milliseconds for the test data to wait before timeout gt Tracert Result Here you can view the Tracert result Return to CONTENTS 271 Chapter 17 System Maintenance via FTP The firmware can be downloaded to the switch via FTP function FTP File Transfer Protocol a protocol in the application layer is mainly used to transfer files between the remote server and the local PCs It is a common protocol used in the IP network for files transfer If there is something wrong with the firmware of the switch and the switch can not be launched the firmware can be downloaded to the switch again via FTP function 1 Hardware Installation Console port PC Switch FTP Server Figure 17 1 Hardware Installation 1 Connect FTP server to port 1 of the switch 2 Connect the Console port of the PC to the switch 3 Save the firmware of the switch in the shared file of FTP server Please write down the user name password and the firmware name 2 Configure the Hyper Terminal After the hardware installation please take the following steps to configure the hyper terminal of the management PC to manage the switch 1 Select Start All Programs gt Accessories gt Communications gt Hyper Terminal to open hyper terminal Set Program Access and Defaults W Windows Catalog Windows Update Program Updates I Accessibility Games fa Communication
191. ering MAC Address VLAN ID Displays the corresponding VLAN ID Port Here the symbol __ indicates no specified port Type Displays the Type of the MAC address Aging Status Displays the Aging Status of the MAC address Anote 1 The MAC address in the Filtering Address Table can not be added to the Static Address Table or bound to a port dynamically 2 This MAC address filtering function is not available if the 802 1X feature is enabled Return to CONTENTS 61 Chapter 6 VLAN The traditional Ethernet is a data network communication technology basing on CSMA CD Carrier Sense Multiple Access Collision Detect via shared communication medium Through the traditional Ethernet the overfull hosts in LAN will result in serious collision flooding broadcasts poor performance or even breakdown of the Internet Though connecting the LANs through switches can avoid the serious collision the flooding broadcasts can not be prevented which will occupy plenty of bandwidth resources causing potential serious security problems A Virtual Local Area Network VLAN is a network topology configured according to a logical scheme rather than the physical layout The VLAN technology is developed for switches to control broadcast in LANs By creating VLANs in a physical LAN you can divide the LAN into multiple logical LANs each of which has a broadcast domain of its own Hosts in the same VLAN communicate with one another as if they are in a
192. es that the corresponding address is configured manually e Auto Indicates that the corresponding address is created automatically using the RA message or obtained from the DHCPV6 Server Preferred Lifetime Displays the preferred time and valid time of the global address Valid Lifetime 27 Status Displays the status of the global address e Normal Indicates that the global address is normal e Try Indicates that the global address may be newly configured e Repeat Indicates that the corresponding address is duplicate It is illegal to access the switch using this address 4 2 User Management User Management functions to configure the user name and password for users to log on to the Web management page with a certain access level so as to protect the settings of the switch from being randomly changed The User Management function can be implemented on User Table and User Config pages 4 2 1 User Table On this page you can view the information about the current users of the switch Choose the menu System User Management User Table to load the following page User Table UserID User Name Access Level Status 1 admin Admin Enable Figure 4 11 User Table 4 2 2 User Config On this page you can configure the access level of the user to log on to the Web management page The switch provides two access levels Guest and Admin The guest only can view the settings without the right to configure the switch the admin ca
193. et protocol type field in the protocol template VLAN ID Displays the corresponding VLAN ID of the protocol Operation Click the Edit button to modify the settings of the entry And click the Modify button to apply your settings 6 3 2 Protocol Template The Protocol Template should be created before configuring the Protocol VLAN By default the switch has defined the IP Template ARP Template RARP Template etc You can add more Protocol Template on this page Choose the menu VLAN gt Protocol VLAN Protocol Template to load the following page Create Protocol Template Protocol Name 8 characters maximum Ether Type 4 Hex integers Protocol Template Table Select ID Protocol Name Ether Type O 1 IP 0800 O 2 ARP 0806 O 3 RARP 8035 O 4 IPX 8137 O 5 AT 8098 Al Figure 6 10 Create and View Protocol Template The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Create Protocol Template Protocol Name Give a name for the Protocol Template Ether Type Enter the Ethernet protocol type field in the protocol template gt Protocol Template Table Select Select the desired entry It is multi optional Protocol Name Displays the name of the protocol template Ether Type Displays the Ethernet protocol type field in the protocol template Anote The Protocol Template bound to VLAN can not be deleted 72 6 3 3 Port Enable On this page you can enable the port for the Protocol VLAN feature Only the port is enabled can
194. ete Help Al Figure 11 9 Policy Summary The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Search Options Select Policy Select name of the desired policy for view If you want to delete the desired policy please click the Delete button gt Action Table Select Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding policy Index Enter the index of the policy ACL ID Displays the ID of the ACL contained in the policy S Mirror Displays the source mirror port of the policy S Condition Displays the source condition added to the policy Redirect Displays the redirect added to the policy QoS Remark Displays the QoS remark added to the policy 182 Operation Click the Edit button to modify the action 11 3 2 Policy Create On this page you can create the policy Choose the menu ACL gt Policy Config Policy Create to load the following page Create Policy Policy Name Figure 11 10 Create Policy The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Create Policy Policy Name Enter the name of the policy 11 3 3 Action Create On this page you can add ACLs and create corresponding actions for the policy Choose the menu ACL gt Policy Config lt Action Create to load the following page Create Action Select Policy Select Policy Na Select ACL Select ACL Y O S Mirror Port Pon y O s condition Rate Kbps 1 1000000 Out of Band Nne O Redirect Destination Port
195. f the port LAG Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to Anote The port status of one port in different spanning tree instances can be different Global configuration Procedure for Spanning Tree function 105 Step Operation Description 1 Make clear roles the switches Preparation play in spanning tree instances root bridge or designated bridge 2 Globally configure MSTP Required Enable Spanning Tree function on the switch parameters and configure MSTP parameters on Spanning Tree gt STP Config STP Config page 3 Configure MSTP parameters Required Configure MSTP parameters for ports on for ports Spanning Tree gt Port Config Port Config page 4 Configure the MST region Required Create MST region and configure the role the switch plays in the MST region on Spanning Tree gt MSTP Instance gt Region Config and Instance Config page 5 Configure MSTP parameters Optional Configure different instances in the MST region for instance ports and configure MSTP parameters for instance ports on Spanning Tree gt MSTP Instance gt Instance Port Config page 7 4 STP Security Configuring protection function for devices can prevent devices from any malicious attack against STP features The STP Security function can be implemented on Port Protect and TC Protect pages Port Protect function is to prevent the devices from any malicious attack against STP features 7 4 1 Port Protect On thi
196. fault router and if so the amount of time in seconds the device should be used as a default router e Additional information for hosts such as the hop limit and maximum transmission unit MTU a host should use in packets that it originates RAs are also sent in response to device solicitation messages Device solicitation messages which have a value of 133 in the Type field of the ICMP packet header are sent by hosts at system startup or anytime needed so that the host can immediately autoconfigure without needing to wait for the next scheduled RA message Hosts discover and select default devices by listening to Router Advertisements RAs Stateless address autoconfiguration means that the node automatically configures an IPv6 address and other information for its interface according to the address prefix and other configuration parameters in the received RA messages IPv6 Neighbor Redirect Message A value of 137 in the type field of the ICMP packet header identifies an IPv6 neighbor redirect message Devices send neighbor redirect messages to inform hosts of better first hop nodes on the path to a destination A device will send an IPv6 ICMP redirect message when the following conditions are satisfied e The receiving interface is the forwarding interface e The selected route itself is not created or modified by an IPv6 ICMP redirect message e The selected route is not the default route e The forwarded IPv6 packet does no
197. figure the notification function of SNMP Choose the menu SNMP Notification Notification Config to load the following page Create Notification IP Address UDP Port 162 User Security Model y1 w Security Level Type Trap Retry 1 258 Timeout sec 1 3600 Notification Table Select IP Address UDP Port User pak Security Level Type Timeout Retry Operation Can Coert _Hetp_ Figure 13 8 Notification Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Create Notification IP Address Enter the IP Address of the management Host UDP Port Enter the number of the UDP port used to send notifications The UDP port functions with the IP address for the notification sending The default is 162 User Enter the User name of the management station Security Model Security Level Select the Security Model of the management station Select the Security Level for the SNMP v3 User e noAuthNoPriv No authentication and no privacy security level are used e authNoPriv Only the authentication security level is used e authPriv Both the authentication and the privacy security levels are used 229 Type Retry Timeout Notification Table Select IP Address UDP Port User Security Model Security Level Type Timeout Retry Operation Select the type for the notifications e Trap Indicates traps are sent e Inform Indicates informs are sent The I
198. for the operation of MAC bridges including the Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Tagging Defines Ethernet frame tags which carry VLAN information It allows switches to assign endstations to different virtual LANs and defines a standard way for VLANs to communicate across switched networks IEEE 802 1p An IEEE standard for providing quality of service QoS in Ethernet networks The standard uses packet tags that define up to eight traffic classes and allows switches to transmit packets based on the tagged priority value IEEE 802 1X Port Authentication controls access to the switch ports by requiring users to first enter a user ID and password for authentication IEEE 802 3ac Defines frame extensions for VLAN tagging IEEE 802 3x Defines Ethernet frame start stop requests and timers used for flow control on full duplex links Now incorporated in IEEE 802 3 2002 Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP A protocol through which hosts can register with their local router for multicast services If there is more than one multicast switch router on a given subnetwork one of the devices acts as the querier and assumes responsibility for keeping track of group membership IGMP Snooping Listening to IGMP Query and IGMP Report packets transferred between IP Multicast Routers and IP Multicast host groups to identify IP Multicast group members IGMP Query On each subnetwork one IGMP capable device will act as the queri
199. formational messages debugging 7 Debug level messages Table 16 1 Log Level 265 The Log function is implemented on the Log Table Local Log Remote Log and Backup Log pages 16 2 1 Log Table The switch supports logs output to two directions namely log buffer and log file The information in log buffer will be lost after the switch is rebooted or powered off whereas the information in log file will be kept effective even the switch is rebooted or powered off Log Table displays the system log information in log buffer Choose the menu Maintenance gt Log gt Log Table to load the following page Log Info Index Time Module Severity Content All Module Y All Level 1 2006 01 01 08 00 51 User level_3 Login the web by admin on web 192 168 0 6 2 2006 01 01 08 00 10 MSTP jevel_6 Disable STP on port 28 3 2006 01 01 08 00 10 MSTP level_6 Disable STP on port 27 4 2006 01 01 08 00 10 MSTP level_6 Disable STP on port 26 jet 5 2006 01 01 08 00 10 MSTP level_6 Disable STP on port 25 6 2006 01 01 08 00 10 MSTP level_6 Disable STP on port 24 7 2006 01 01 08 00 10 MSTP level_6 Disable STP on port 23 8 2006 01 01 08 00 10 MSTP level_6 Disable STP on port 22 9 2006 01 01 08 00 10 MSTP level_6 Disable STP on port 21 10 2006 01 01 08 00 10 MSTP level_6 Disable STP on port 20 11 2006 01 01 08 00 10 MSTP level_6 Disable STP on port 19 12 2006 01 01 08 00 10 MSTP jevel_6 Disable STP on port 18 13 2006 01 01 08 00 10 MSTP level_6 Di
200. ge Region Root Internal Path Cost Designated Bridge Root Port Latest TC Time TC Count Disable MSTP 32768 00 02 03 cO 9a d3 32768 00 02 03 cO 9a d3 0 32768 00 02 03 0 9a d3 0 32768 00 02 03 c0 9a d3 2006 01 01 10 43 30 1 iv Disable 32768 00 02 03 c0 9a d3 32768 00 02 03 c0 9a d3 0 32768 00 02 03 c0 9a d3 2006 01 01 10 44 41 1 Figure 7 5 STP Summary 100 7 2 Port Config On this page you can configure the parameters of the ports for CIST Choose the menu Spanning Tree Port Config to load the following page Port Config Select Port Status Disable v Disable Enable Disable Disable Disable Enable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Priority Pot ExtPath Cost IntPathCost Edge Port P2P Link MCheck STP Version Port Role Port Status LAG Disable x Auto Unchange vw Auto Auto Disable Auto _ _ Al 19 Auto 19 Auto Disable Enable Auto STP Designated Forwarding Auto Auto Disable Auto Auto Auto Disable Auto Auto Auto Disable Auto Ed ES 19 Auto 19 Auto Disable Enable Auto STP Designated Forwarding Auto Auto Disable Auto Auto Auto Disable Auto LJ Auto Auto Disable Auto Auto Auto Disable Auto Auto Auto Disable Auto Auto Auto Disable Auto Auto Auto Disable Auto Auto Auto Di
201. ght value ratio of TCO TC1 TC2 and TC3 is 1 2 4 8 Packets are mapped to different priority queues EE Gade TO i 4 Packets in TCO TC3 are pl forwarded following the Packets sent via this interface Heat ratio 1 2 4 8 E Es IA hata TC2 i h Egress interface a M i sssss f Ia Ow ee BY Ss 1 A Guias To Packets WRR Mode classification Weight value TCO TC1 TC2 TC3 1 2 4 8 Figure 10 5 WRR Mode SP WRR Mode Strict Priority Weight Round Robin Mode In this mode this switch provides two scheduling groups SP group and WRR group Queues in SP group and WRR group are scheduled strictly based on strict priority mode while the queues inside WRR group follow the WRR mode In SP WRR mode TC3 is in the SP group TCO TC1 and TC2 belong to the WRR group and the weight value ratio of TCO TC1 and TC2 is 1 2 4 In this way when scheduling queues the switch allows TC3 to occupy the whole bandwidth following the SP mode and the TCO TC1 and TC2 in the WRR group will take up the bandwidth according to their ratio 1 2 4 Equ Mode Equal Mode In this mode all the queues occupy the bandwidth equally The weight value ratio of all the queues is 1 1 1 1 The QoS module is mainly for traffic control and priority configuration including three submenus DiffServ Bandwidth Control and Voice VLAN 161 10 1 DiffServ This switch classifies the ingress packets maps the packets to different priority queues and then forwards the
202. gt Policy Binding Port Binding page select Policy limit1 to bind to port 3 Configure requirement and 4 for 3 On ACL gt ACL Config ACL Create page create ACL 101 On ACL ACL Config Standard IP ACL page select ACL 101 create Rule 4 configure operation as Deny configure S IP as 10 10 50 0 and mask as 255 255 255 0 configure D IP as 10 10 70 0 and mask as 255 255 255 0 configure the time range as No Limit On ACL ACL Config Standard IP ACL page select ACL 101 create Rule 5 configure operation as Deny configure S IP as 10 10 50 0 and mask as 255 255 255 0 configure D IP as 10 10 88 5 and mask as 255 255 255 255 configure the time range as work_time On ACL gt Policy Config Policy Create page create a policy named limit2 On ACL gt Policy Config Action Create page add ACL 101 to Policy limit2 On ACL gt Policy Binding Port Binding page select Policy limit2 to bind to port 4 Return to CONTENTS 188 Chapter 12 Network Security Network Security module is to provide the multiple protection measures for the network security including six submenus IP MAC Binding ARP Inspection IP Source Guard DoS Defend 802 1X and PPPoE Config Please configure the functions appropriate to your need 12 1 IP MAC Binding The IP MAC Binding function allows you to bind the IP address MAC address VLAN ID and the connected Port number of the Host together Basing on the IP MAC binding table AR
203. gth and generate SSH key Z Pull Y Key Generator File Key Conversions Help Key No key Actions Generate a public private key pair Generate a key Generate j Load an existing private key file Save the generated key Parameters Type of key to generate Key type SSH 1 ASA SSH 2 RSA SSH 2 DSA Number of bits in a generated key 1024 Anote 1 The key length is in the range of 256 to 3072 bits 2 During the key generation randomly moving the mouse quickly can accelerate the key generation 2 After the key is successfully generated please save the public key and private key to the computer 38 Z PulIY Key Generator File Key Conversions Help Key Public key for pasting into OpenSSH authorized_keys file ssh 1sa ASSAB3NzaC1 po2EASAABIOAAAIBo2aDY siF WsJaScst h nySwoU 3 m c4C2y 215 34 Ri4yevibF viR 4G zxaE CIMMI35wClhD wD bOBb7ASXim ZY IrFL WiwnaJOH49Nokrp Bm2QSRDSHJW8T Cx1 n3lV ni lt dpu2ePeS95UKGeuE aT eYWiOvweR 2e5T CT DxwXe NQ rsa key 201 00120 Key fingerprint ssh tsa 1023 38 cd 9e 14 da b1 ba 9e 2b ff 43 69 85 47 14 60 Key comment rsa key 20140127 Key passphrase Confirm passphrase Actions Generate a public private key pair Generate Load an existing private key file Load Save the generated key Save public key Save private key Parameters Type of key to generate O SSH 1 RSA SSH 2 RSA O SSH 2 DSA Number of bits in a gene
204. gure below shows the structure of a global unicast address Provider Site Host 3 45 bits 16 bits 64 bits Global Routing Prefix Subnet ID Interface ID 001 Figure 4 8 Global Unicast Address Format 22 An interface ID is used to identify interfaces on a link The interface ID must be unique to the link It may also be unique over a broader scope In many cases an interface ID will be the same as or based on the link layer address of an interface Interface IDs used in global unicast and other IPv6 address types must be 64 bits long and constructed in the modified extended universal identifier EUI 64 format For all IEEE 802 interface types for example Ethernet and FDDI interfaces Interface IDs in the modified EUI 64 format are constructed in the following way the first three octets 24 bits are taken from the Organizationally Unique Identifier OUI of the 48 bit link layer address the media access control or MAC address of the interface the fourth and fifth octets 16 bits are a fixed hexadecimal value of FFFE and the last three octets 24 bits are taken from the last three octets of the MAC address The construction of the interface ID is completed by setting the universal local U L bit the seventh bit of the first octet to a value of O or 1 A value of O indicates a locally administered identifier a value of 1 indicates a globally unique IPv6 interface identifier Take MAC address 0012 0B0A 2D51 as an exa
205. gure the Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt Port Config page configure the Link Type of the link type of Port 11 and Port 13 as ACCESS and configure the link type ports of Port 12 as GENERAL 2 Create VLAN10 Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page create a VLAN with its VLAN ID as 10 owning Port 12 and Port 13 and configure the egress rule of Port 12 as Untag 3 Create VLAN20 Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page create a VLAN with its VLAN ID as 20 owning Port 11 and Port 12 and configure the egress rule of Port 12 as Untag e Configure switch B Step Operation Description 1 Configure the Required On VLAN 802 1Q VLAN gt Port Config page configure the Link Type of the link type of Port 4 and Port 5 as ACCESS and configure the link type of ports Port 3 as GENERAL 2 Create VLAN10 Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page create a VLAN with its VLAN ID as 10 owning Port 3 and Port 4 and configure the egress rule of Port 3 as Untag 3 Create VLAN20 Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page create a VLAN with its VLAN ID as 20 owning Port 3 and Port 5 and configure the egress rule of Port 3 as Untag 77 Step Operation Description 4 Create Protocol Required On VLAN gt Protocol VLAN gt Protocol Template page Template configure the protocol template practically E g the Ether Type of IP network packets
206. gure the system time of the switch 2 When Get Time from NTP Server is selected and no time server is configured the switch will get time from the time server of the Internet if it has connected to the Internet 4 1 4 Daylight Saving Time Here you can configure the Daylight Saving Time of the switch Choose the menu System System Info Daylight Saving Time to load the following page DST Config DST Status Disable v Predefined Mode USA Recurring Mode Offset Start Time End Time Date Mode Offset Start Time End Time Australia Europe New Zealand 60 minutes Week Day Month 01 00 Week Day Month 01 00 60 E minutes 00 00 MMDD HH MM 00 00 MMIDD HH MM Figure 4 6 Daylight Saving Time 17 The following entries are displayed on this screen gt DST Config DST Status Predefined Mode Recurring Mode Date Mode Adore Enable or Disable DST Select a predefined DST configuration USA Second Sunday in March 02 00 First Sunday in November 02 00 Australia First Sunday in October 02 00 First Sunday in April 03 00 Europe Last Sunday in March 01 00 Last Sunday in October 01 00 New Zealand Last Sunday in September 02 00 First Sunday in April 03 00 Specify the DST configuration in recurring mode This configuration is recurring in use Offset Specify the time adding in minutes when Daylight Saving Time comes
207. gured the Unknown Multicast function in IGMP Snooping is also configured at the same time Configurations of the Router Port Aging Time and Member Port Aging Time in 9 2 2 VLAN Config override their global configurations here Before creating the Multicast VLAN its corresponding VLAN should be configured in 9 2 2 VLAN Config 9 2 2 VLAN Config On this page you can configure MLD Snooping function with each single VLAN You need to create VLAN if you want to enable MLD Snooping function in this VLAN Choose the menu Multicast gt MLD Snooping VLAN Config to load the following page 150 VLAN Config VLAN ID 1 4094 Router Port Aging Time 0 sec 0 1000 Member Port Aging Time O sec 0 200 1000 Immediate Leave O Enable Disable Static Router Ports Format 1 3 6 8 VLAN Table VLAN ID RouterPort MemberPort Immediate A Select VLAN ID Aging Time Aging Time eran Static Router Ports Dynamic Router Ports O Enable v O 1 300 400 Enable 2 O 4094 300 400 Disable 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 Apply Delete Help Total Configured VLANs 2 Note 1 The VLAN configuartion will take effect when global MLD Snooping function is enabled and the corresponding VLAN is created 2 When the router port aging time or member port aging time is set for a VLAN this value overrides the value configured globally 3 When the aging time is not configured set to the default of 0 second
208. h will remove the port from the multicast address table if the switch receives no IGMP report message from the host within a period of time gt IGMP Messages The switch running IGMP Snooping processes the IGMP messages of different types as follows 1 IGMP Query Message IGMP query message sent by the router falls into two types IGMP general query message and IGMP group specific query message The router regularly sends IGMP general message to query if the multicast groups contain any member When receiving IGMP leave message the receiving port of the router will send IGMP group specific query message to the multicast group and the switch will forward IGMP group specific query message to check if other members in the multicast group of the port need this multicast When receiving IGMP general query message the switch will forward them to all other ports in the VLAN owning the receiving port The receiving port will be processed if the receiving port is nota router port yet it will be added to the router port list with its router port time specified if the receiving port is already a router port its router port time will be directly reset When receiving IGMP group specific query message the switch will send the group specific query message to the members of the multicast group being queried 2 IGMP Report Message IGMP report message is sent by the host when it applies for joining a multicast group or responses to the IGMP query me
209. hapter 2 Introduction Introduces the features application and appearance of TL SL5428E switch Chapter 3 Login to the switch Introduces how to log on to TL SL5428E Web management page Chapter Introduction Chapter 4 System This module is used to configure system properties of the switch Here mainly introduces e System Info Configure the description system time and network parameters of the switch e User Management Configure the user name and password for users to log on to the Web management page with a certain access level e System Tools Manage the configuration file of the switch e Access Security Provide different security measures for the login to enhance the configuration management security Chapter 5 Switching This module is used to configure basic functions of the switch Here mainly introduces e Port Configure the basic features for the port e LAG Configure Link Aggregation Group LAG is to combine a number of ports together to make a single high bandwidth data path e Traffic Monitor Monitor the traffic of each port e MAC Address Configure the address table of the switch Chapter 6 VLAN This module is used to configure VLANs to control broadcast in LANs Here mainly introduces e 802 1Q VLAN Configure port based VLAN e MAC VLAN Configure MAC based VLAN without changing the 802 1Q VLAN configuration e Protocol VLAN Create VLANs in application
210. hat of Y X is superior to Y If the root bridge ID of X equals that of Y but the root path cost of X is smaller than that of Y X is superior to Y If the root bridge ID and the root path cost of X equal those of Y but the bridge ID of X is smaller than that of Y X is superior to Y If the root bridge ID the root path cost and bridge ID of X equal those of Y but the port ID of X is smaller than that of Y X is superior to Y gt STP Generation e Inthe beginning In the beginning each switch regards itself as the root and generates a configuration BPDU for each port on it as a root with the root path cost being 0 the ID of the designated bridge being that of the switch and the designated port being itself e Comparing BPDUs Each switch sends out configuration BPDUs and receives a configuration BPDU on one of its ports from another switch The following table shows the comparing operations 95 Step Operation 1 If the priority of the BPDU received on the port is lower than that of the BPDU if of the port itself the switch discards the BPDU and does not change the BPDU of the port 2 If the priority of the BPDU is higher than that of the BPDU of the port itself the switch replaces the BPDU of the port with the received one and compares it with those of other ports on the switch to obtain the one with the highest priority Table 7 1 Comparing BPDUs e Selecting the root bridge The root bridge
211. hbor solicitation messages are sent on the local link when a node wants to determine the link layer address of another node on the same local link After receiving the neighbor solicitation message the destination node replies by sending a neighbor advertisement NA message which has a value of 136 in the Type field of the ICMP packet header on the local link After the source node receives the neighbor advertisement the source node and destination node can communicate Neighbor advertisement messages are also sent when there is a change in the link layer address of a node on a local link Neighbor solicitation messages are also used to verify the reachability of a neighbor after the link layer address of a neighbor is identified Neighbor solicitation messages are also used in the stateless autoconfiguration process to verify the uniqueness of unicast IPv6 addresses before the addresses are assigned to an interface Duplicate address detection is performed first on a new link local IPv6 address before the address is assigned to an interface the new address remains in a tentative state while duplicate address detection is performed Specifically a node sends a neighbor solicitation message with an unspecified source address and a tentative link local address in the body of the message If another node is already using that address the node returns a neighbor advertisement message that contains the tentative link local address If another
212. he LAG will the Port Security function be available for the port The Port Security function is disabled when the 802 1X function is enabled 45 5 1 4 Port Isolation Port Isolation provides a method of restricting traffic flow to improve the network security by forbidding the port to forward packets to the ports that are not on its forward portlist Choose the menu Switching Port Port Isolation to load the following page Port Isolation Config From Port Forward Portlist dE O 7 O13 O19 Olas Port Isolation List Port O O 40 nah WHY O 2 Os 014 O20 O28 E O 3 Oe Das O21 O27 All O 4 O 10 O 16 O 22 O 28 To Port Os Or Or O23 Apply _Help Forward Portlist 1 28 1 28 1 28 1 28 1 28 1 28 1 28 1 28 1 28 1 28 1 28 1 28 1 28 1 28 1 28 Figure 5 4 Port Isolation Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Port Isolation Config From To Port Forward Portlist gt Port Isolation List Port Forward Portlist l E O 6 O 12 O 18 O24 Select the port number to set its forwardlist Select the port s to be forwarded to Display the port number Display the forwardlist 5 1 5 Loopback Detection With loopback detection feature enabled the switch can detect loops using loopback detection packets When a loop is detected the switch will display an alert or further block the corresponding port according to the port configu
213. he VLAN registration information from other switches to dynamically update the local VLAN registration information including VLAN members ports through which the VLAN members can be reached and so on The switch also propagates the local VLAN registration information to other switches so that all the switching devices in the same switched network can have the same VLAN information The VLAN registration information includes not only the static registration information configured locally but also the dynamic registration information which is received from other switches In this switch only the port with TRUNK link type can be set as the GVRP application entity to maintain the VLAN registration information GVRP has the following three port registration modes Normal Fixed and Forbidden e Normal In this mode a port can dynamically register deregister a VLAN and propagate the dynamic static VLAN information e Fixed In this mode a port cannot register deregister a VLAN dynamically It only propagates static VLAN information That is the port in Fixed mode only permits the packets of its static VLAN to pass e Forbidden In this mode a port cannot register deregister VLANs It only propagates VLAN 1 information That is the port in Forbidden mode only permits the packets of the default VLAN namely VLAN 1 to pass Choose the menu VLAN gt GVRP gt GVRP Config to load the following page 89 Global Config GV
214. he following entries are displayed on this screen gt Event Log Statistics Port Select Local Remote Error Symbol Event Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Displays the number of link events that have occurred on the local link Displays the number of link events that have occurred on the remote link Displays the number of error symbol period link events that have occurred on the local link or remote link 124 Error Frame Event Error Frame Period Event Error Frame Seconds Event Dying Gasp Critical Event Event Log Table Type Location Timestamp Value Window Threshold Accumulated Errors Displays the number of error frame link events that have occurred on the local link or remote link Displays the number of error frame period link events that have occurred on the local link or remote link Displays the number of error frame seconds link events that have occurred on the local link or remote link Displays the number of Dying Gasp link events that have occurred on the local link or remote link Displays the number of Critical Event link events that have occurred on the local link or remote link Displays the type of the link event Displays the location where the link event occurred Displays the time reference when the link event occurred Displays the number of errors in the period Displays the perio
215. he following entries are displayed on this screen gt Detect Config Detect Time Specify the detect time for each DoS attack type except the flooding attack type Detect Click the Detect button to start the detection The switch will detect each type of the DoS attack in turn gt Detect Result Port Display the port number Attack Type Displays the Attack Type name Attack Count Displays the count of the attack Tips You are suggested to take the following further steps to ensure the network security 1 It s recommended to inspect and repair the system vulnerability regularly It is also necessary to install the system bulletins and backup the important information in time 2 The network administrator is suggested to inspect the physic environment of the network and block the unnecessary network services 3 Enhance the network security via the protection devices such as the hardware firewall 12 5 802 1X The 802 1X protocol was developed by IEEE802 LAN WAN committee to deal with the security issues of wireless LANs It was then used in Ethernet as a common access control mechanism for LAN ports to solve mainly authentication and security problems 802 1X is a port based network access control protocol It authenticates and controls devices requesting for access in terms of the ports of LAN access control devices With the 802 1X 209 protocol enabled a supplicant can access the LAN only when it passes the authe
216. he member ports in the group and to enhance the connection reliability For the member ports in an aggregation group their basic configuration must be the same The basic configuration includes STP QoS GVRP VLAN port attributes MAC Address Learning mode and other associated settings The further explains are as following e If the ports which are enabled for the GVRP 802 1Q VLAN Voice VLAN STP QoS Port Isolation DHCP Snooping and Port Configuration Speed Flow Control are in a LAG their configurations should be the same e The ports which are enabled for the Port Security Port Mirror MAC Address Filtering Static MAC Address Binding 802 1X Authentication IP Source Guard and half duplex can not be added to the LAG e Ifs not suggested to add the ports with ARP Inspection and DoS Defend enabled to the LAG If the LAG is needed you are suggested to configure the LAG function here before configuring the other functions for the member ports Tips 1 Calculate the bandwidth for a LAG If a LAG consists of the four ports in the speed of 1000Mbps Full Duplex the whole bandwidth of the LAG is up to 8000Mbps 2000Mbps 4 because the bandwidth of each member port is 2000Mbps counting the up linked speed of 1000Mbps and the down linked speed of 1000Mbps 48 2 The traffic load of the LAG will be balanced among the ports according to the Aggregate Arithmetic If the connections of one or several ports are broken the tr
217. hers are member switches The typical topology is as follows Network administrator 10 90 90 100 Member switch Candidato switch Figure 15 1 Cluster topology gt Cluster Role According to their functions and status in a cluster switches in the cluster play different roles You can specify the role a switch plays There are four roles Commander Switch Indicates the device that can configure and manage all the devices in a cluster It discovers and determins the candidate switches by collecting NDP Neighbor Discovery Protocol and NTDP Neighbor Topology Discovery Protocol Member Switch Indicates the device that is managed in a cluster Candidate Switch Indicates the device that does not belong to any cluster though it can be added to a cluster Individual Switch Indicates the device with cluster feature disabled The roles can be changed from one to anther following the specified rules e The current switch you create cluster is specified as the commander switch 247 e The commander switch discovers and determines candidate switches by collecting related information e After being added to the cluster the candidate switch becomes to be the member switch e After being removed from the cluster the member switch becomes to be the candidate switch e The commander switch becomes to be the candidate switch only when the cluster is deleted gt Introduction to Cluster Cluster functions to configure and manage
218. hip between the port and the MAC address of the connected device which is the base of the packet forwarding The capacity of MAC Address Table is fixed MAC Address Attack is the attack method that the attacker takes to obtain the network information illegally The attacker uses tools to generate the cheating MAC address and quickly occupy the MAC Address Table When the MAC Address Table is full the switch will broadcast the packets to all the ports At this moment the attacker can obtain the network information via various sniffers and attacks When the MAC Address Table is full the packets traffic will flood to all the ports which results in overload lower speed packets drop and even breakdown of the system Port Security is to protect the switch from the malicious MAC Address Attack by limiting the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port The port with Port Security feature enabled will learn the MAC address dynamically When the learned MAC address number reaches the maximum the port will stop learning Thereafter the other devices with the MAC address unlearned can not access to the network via this port Choose the menu Switching Port Port Security to load the following page 44 Port Security Select Port Max Learned MAC Learned Num Learn Mode Status O Poo Dynamic z Disable v O 1 64 0 Dynamic Disable A O 2 64 0 Dynamic Disable g 3 64 0 Dynamic Disable Fi 4 64 0 Dynamic Disable O 5 64 0 Dynam
219. i optional Primary VLAN Displays the Primary VLAN ID number of the Private VLAN Secondary VLAN Displays the Secondary VLAN ID number of the Private VLAN Port Displays the Port number of the Private VLAN 6 8 2 Port Config The Private VLAN provides two Port Types for the ports Promiscuous and Host Usually the Promiscuous port is used to connect to uplink devices while the Host port is used to connect to the he terminal hosts such as PC and Server Choose the menu VLAN gt Private VLAN gt Port Config to load the following page 86 Port Config Port Port vi Port Type Promiscuous v Add Primary VLAN 2 4094 Secondary VLAN 2 4094 Private VLAN Port Table Port ID Port Type Operation Figure 6 17 Create and View Protocol Template The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Port Config Port Select the desired port for configuration Port Type Select the Port Type from the pull down list for the port Primary VLAN Specify the Primary VLAN the port belongs to Secondary VLAN Specify the Secondary VLAN the port belongs to gt Private VLAN Port Table Port ID Displays the port number Port Type Displays the corresponding Port Type Operation Click Remove to delete the port Mnote 1 A Host Port can only join to a Private VLAN 2 APromiscuous Port can only join to a Primary VLAN 3 If you want to add a Promiscuous port to different Private VLANs with the same Primary VLAN y
220. ic Disable O 6 64 0 Dynamic Disable O 7 64 0 Dynamic Disable O 8 64 0 Dynamic Disable O 9 64 0 Dynamic Disable O 10 64 0 Dynamic Disable O 11 64 0 Dynamic Disable O 12 64 0 Dynamic Disable Pe Note The maximum number of MAC addresses learned from individual port can be setto 64 Figure 5 3 Port Security The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Port Security Select Select the desired port for Port Security configuration It is multi optional Port Displays the port number Max Learned MAC Specify the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port Learned Num Displays the number of MAC addresses that have been learned on the port Learn Mode Select the Learn Mode for the port e Dynamic When Dynamic mode is selected the learned MAC address will be deleted automatically after the aging time e Static When Static mode is selected the learned MAC address will be out of the influence of the aging time and can only be deleted manually The learned entries will be cleared after the switch is rebooted e Permanent When Permanent mode is selected the learned MAC address will be out of the influence of the aging time and can only be deleted manually The learned entries will be saved even the switch is rebooted Status Enable Disable the Port Security feature for the port Act ie 2 The Port Security function is disabled for the LAG port member Only the port is removed from t
221. ide e The CLI Reference Guide e SNMP Mibs e 802 1X Client Software e Other Helpful Information Anzte Make sure that the package contains the above items If any of the listed items are damaged or missing please contact your distributor Chapter 1 About This Guide This User Guide contains information for setup and management of TL SL5428E switch Please read this guide carefully before operation 1 1 Intended Readers This Guide is intended for network managers familiar with IT concepts and network terminologies 1 2 Conventions In this Guide the following conventions are used gt The switch or TL SL5428E mentioned in this Guide stands for TL SL5428E 24 Port 10 100Mbps 4 Port Gigabit JetStream L2 Managed Switch without any explanation gt Menu Name gt Submenu Name gt Tab page indicates the menu structure System System Info gt System Summary means the System Summary page under the System Info menu option that is located under the System menu gt Bold font indicates a button a toolbar icon menu or menu item Symbols in this Guide Symbol Description A Ignoring this type of note might result in a malfunction or damage to the Note device This format indicates important information that helps you make better use of Tips your device 1 3 Overview of This Guide Chapter Introduction Chapter 1 About This Guide Introduces the guide structure and conventions C
222. iew of SNMP Community is viewDefault 227 Configuration Procedure e If SNMPv3 is employed please take the following steps Step Operation Description 1 Enable SNMP function globally Required On the SNMP gt SNMP Config Global Config page enable SNMP function globally Create SNMP View Required On the SNMP gt SNMP Config SNMP View page create SNMP View of the management agent The default View Name is viewDefault and the default OID is 1 Create SNMP Group Required On the SNMP SNMP Config SNMP Group page create SNMP Group for SNMPv3 and specify SNMP Views with various access levels for SNMP Group Create SNMP User Required On the SNMP gt SNMP Config SNMP User page create SNMP User in the Group and configure the auth privacy mode and auth privacy password for the User e If SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c is employed please take the following steps Step Operation Description 1 Enable SNMP function globally Required On the SNMP gt SNMP Config Global Config page enable SNMP function globally Create SNMP View Required On the SNMP gt SNMP Config gt SNMP View page create SNMP View of the management agent The default View Name is viewDefault and the default OID is 1 Configure access level for the User Create SNMP Community directly Create SNMP Group and SNMP User Required alternatively Create SNM
223. ify the information for each LAG e Edit Click to modify the settings of the LAG e Detail Click to get the information of the LAG Click the Detail button for the detailed information of your selected LAG 49 Detail Info Group Number LAG Type Port Status Rate Port mirror LAG1 Static Enable Auto Disable Ingress Bandwidth bps Egress Bandwidth bps Broadcast Control bps Multicast Control bps UL Control bps QoS Priority Join VLAN 5 2 2 Static LAG CoS 0 Figure 5 7 Detail Information On this page you can manually configure the LAG The LACP feature is disabled for the member ports of the manually added Static LAG Choose the menu Switching LAG Static LAG to load the following page LAG Config Group Number LAGI wl Description Member Port O 1 E 2 F 3 O 4 E 7 Os O a C10 Ora O14 O15 O16 O19 O20 Da1 22 M25461 M2eaci 027 O28 Apply Note 1 LAG denotes the Link Aggregation Group which the port belongs to 2 It s not suggested to set 100M and 1000M ports in the same LAG 3 The LAG created by LACP cant be modified O 5 O11 O17 023 Figure 5 8 Static LAG Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt LAG Config Group Number Description gt LAG Table Member Port Select a Group Number for the LAG O 6 O12 Ote Y 24 LAG1 Give a description to the LAG for identification Select the port as the LAG member Cle
224. ify the link event Choose the menu Ethernet OAM gt Link Monitoring Link Monitoring to load the following page Link Monitoring Config Link Event Symbol Period Error v Port Select Select Port Threshold Error Symbol Window 1 00ms Notify O AA AA a Fj 1 1 10 Enable A O 2 1 10 Enable O 3 1 10 Enable O 4 1 10 Enable Fj 5 1 10 Enable O 6 1 10 Enable Fj 7 1 10 Enable O 8 1 10 Enable E O g 1 10 Enable O 10 1 10 Enable O 11 1 10 Enable O 12 1 10 Enable O 13 1 10 Enable O 14 1 10 Enable O 15 1 10 Enable v Figure 8 6 Link Monitoring The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Link Monitoring Config Link Event Select one type of the link events to configure Link events include Symbol Period Error Frame Error Frame Period Error and Frame Seconds Error For more details about link events please refer to OAM Link Events Port Select Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Select Select the desired port for configuration It is multi optional 120 Threshold Specify the threshold for the selected link event e For Symbol Period Error it is the number of error symbols in the period that is required to be exceeded e For Frame Error it is the number of error frames in the period measured by 100ms that is required to be exceeded e For Frame Period Error it is the number of error frames in the pe
225. ig VLAN Config Filter Config Port Config Static Multicast Querier Config and Packet Statistics pages 9 2 1 Global Config To configure the MLD Snooping on the switch please firstly configure MLD global configuration and related parameters on this page Chose the menu Multicast gt MLD Snooping Global Config to load the following page Global Config MLD Snooping O Enable Disable Report Message Suppression O Enable Disable Unknown Multicast Filter Forward Discard Router Port Aging Time 1260 sec 1 1000 Member Port Aging Time 260 sec 200 1000 Last Listener Query Interval sec 1 5 fee Last Listener Query Count a 1 7 Multicast VLAN Enable Disable Multicast VLAN ID ao o Note 1 When Unknown Multicast Filter is configured the Unknown Multicast function in IGMP Snooping is also configured atthe same time 2 Multicast VLAN will take effect when the corresponding VLAN has been created in VLAN Config page Figure 9 13 Global Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config MLD Snooping Enable or disable MLD Snooping function globally Report Message Enable or disable Report Message Suppression function globally Suppression If this function is enabled the first Report Message from the listener will forward to the router ports while the subsequent Report Message from the group will be suppressed to reduce the MLD traffic in the network 149 Unknown Multi
226. iguration is finished on this page 162 Configuration Procedure Step Operation Description 1 Select the port priority Required On QoS DiffServ Port Priority page configure the port priority 2 Configure the mapping Required On QoS DiffServ 802 1P CoS mapping relation between the CoS page configure the mapping relation between the CoS priority and TC and TC 3 Select a schedule mode Required On QoS DiffServ gt Schedule Mode page select a schedule mode 10 1 2 DSCP Priority On this page you can configure DSCP priority DSCP DiffServ Code Point is a new definition to IP ToS field given by IEEE This field is used to divide IP datagram into 64 priorities When DSCP Priority is enabled IP datagram are mapped to different priority levels based on DSCP priority mode non IP datagram with 802 1Q tag are mapped to different priority levels based on 802 1P priority mode if 8021 1P Priority mode is enabled the untagged non IP datagram are mapped based on port priority mode Choose the menu QoS DiffServ DSCP Priority to load the following page DSCP Priority Config DSCP Priority O Enable Disable Priority Level DSCP Priority Level DSCP Priority Level DSCP Priority Level 0 TCO 1 TCO a 2 TCO 3 TCO 4 TCO 5 TCO 6 TCO 7 TCO a 8 TCO 9 TCO 10 TCO 11 TCO 12 TCO 13 TCO 14 TCO 15 TCO 16 TC1 17 TC1 18 TC1 19 TC1 e note Among the priority levels TCO TC1 TC3
227. igure different priority tags mapping to the corresponding priority levels and then the switch determine which packet is sent preferentially when forwarding packets The switch processes untagged packets based on the default priority mode 3 DSCP Priority ToS Byte IPv4 datagram 1413 2 M Y Unused IPv4 Standard DirSerd Codd P Point OSCP Flow Ctrl Figure 10 3 IP datagram As shown in the figure above the ToS Type of Service in an IP header contains 8 bits The first three bits indicate IP precedence in the range of 0 to 7 RFC2474 re defines the ToS field in the IP packet header which is called the DS field The first six bits bit O bit 5 of the DS field indicate DSCP precedence in the range of 0 to 63 The last 2 bits bit 6 and bit 7 are reserved On the Web management page you can configure different DS field mapping to the corresponding priority levels Non IP datagram with 802 1Q tag are mapped to different priority levels based on 802 1P priority mode if 8021 1P Priority mode is enabled the untagged non IP datagram are mapped based on port priority mode gt Schedule Mode When the network is congested the problem that many packets compete for resources must be solved usually in the way of queue scheduling The switch implements four scheduling queues TCO TC1 TC2 and TC3 TCO has the lowest priority while TC3 has the highest priority The switch provides four schedule modes SP WRR SP WRR and Equ 1 SP
228. ile no matter whether a cluster is established on this page you can manually collect NTDP information at any time to manage and control devices Choose the menu Cluster NTDP Device Table to load the following page Device Table Device Type Device MAC Cluster Name Role Hops Neighbor Info TL SG3210 2 0 00 14 78 00 00 CA TP Member 1 Detail TL SL5428E 2 0 00 00 00 54 28 02 TP Commander 0 Detail Collect Topolog Refresh Help Figure 15 5 Device Table The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Device Table Device Type Displays the device description collected through NTDP Device MAC Displays the MAC address of this device Cluster Name Displays the cluster name of this device Role Displays the role this device plays in the cluster e Commander Indicates the device that can configure and manage all the devices in a cluster Member Indicates the device that is managed in a cluster Candidate Indicates the device that does not belong to any cluster though it can be added to a cluster e Individual Indicates the device with cluster feature disabled Hops Displays the hop count from this device to the switch 252 Neighbor Info Collect Topology Click the Detail button to view the complete information of this device and its neighbors Click the Collect Topology button to collect NTDP information of the switch so as to collect the latest network topology Click the Detail button to
229. ile to download into switch Key Type SSH 2 RSAIDSA v Key File Note It will take a long time to download the key file Please wait without any operation Figure 4 20 SSH Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config SSH Enable Disable SSH function Protocol V1 Enable Disable SSH V1 to be the supported protocol Protocol V2 Enable Disable SSH V2 to be the supported protocol Idle Timeout Specify the idle timeout time The system will automatically release the connection when the time is up The default time is 120 seconds Max Connect Specify the maximum number of the connections to the SSH server No new connection will be established when the number of the connections reaches the maximum number you set The default value is 5 gt Key Download Key Type Select the type of SSH Key to download The switch supports three types SSH 1 RSA SSH 2 RSA and SSH 2 DSA Key File Select the desired key file to download 36 Download Click the Download button to down the desired key file to the switch Mote 1 2 Please ensure the key length of the downloaded file is in the range of 256 to 3072 bits After the Key File is downloaded the user s original key of the same type will be replaced The wrong uploaded file will result in the SSH access to the switch via Password authentication Application Example 1 for SSH gt 1 2 Network Requirements
230. ill receive the data packets and process them based on the policy only when the policy is bound to the port VLAN The Policy Binding can be implemented on Binding Table Port Binding and VLAN Binding pages 11 4 1 Binding Table On this page view the policy bound to port VLAN Choose the menu ACL gt Policy Binding Binding Table to load the following page Search Options Show Mode Policy Bind Table Select Show All v Index Policy Name Interface Direction Al Figure 11 12 Binding Table The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Search Options Show Mode Select a show mode appropriate to your needs 184 gt Policy Bind Table Select Index Policy Name Interface Direction 11 4 2 Port Binding Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding binding policy Displays the index of the binding policy Displays the name of the binding policy Displays the port number or VLAN ID bound to the policy Displays the binding direction On this page you can bind a policy to a port Choose the menu ACL gt Policy Binding Port Binding to load the following page Port Bind Config Policy Name Select Policy Port Format 1 3 6 8 Port Bind Table Index Policy Name Port Direction Figure 11 13 Bind the policy to the port The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Port Bind Config Policy Name Port gt Port Bind Table Index Policy N
231. imers GARP defines the following timers e Hold Timer When a GARP entity receives a piece of registration information it does not send out a Join message immediately Instead to save the bandwidth resources it starts the Hold timer puts all registration information it receives before the timer times out into one Join message and sends out the message after the timer times out e Join Timer To transmit the Join messages reliably to other entities a GARP entity sends each Join message two times The Join timer is used to define the interval between the two sending operations of each Join message e Leave Timer When a GARP entity expects to deregister a piece of attribute information it sends out a Leave message Any GARP entity receiving this message starts its Leave timer and deregisters the attribute information if it does not receives a Join message again before the timer times out 88 e LeaveAll Timer Once a GARP entity starts up it starts the LeaveAll timer and sends out a LeaveAll message after the timer times out so that other GARP entities can re register all the attribute information on this entity After that the entity restarts the LeaveAll timer to begin a new cycle gt GVRP GVRP as an implementation of GARP maintains dynamic VLAN registration information and propagates the information to other switches by adopting the same mechanism of GARP After the GVRP feature is enabled on a switch the switch receives t
232. in different multicast groups appropriate to their needs The switch Auto Fresh Auto Fresh Fresh Period MLD Packet Statistics Received MLD Query Received MLDv1 Report Received MLDv2 Report Received MLD Done Send MLD Spec Query Error Packet Enable Disable auto fresh feature Enter the time from 3 to 300 seconds to specify the auto fresh period Displays the number of MLD Query packets the switch has received Displays the number of MLDv1 Report packets which the switch has received Displays the number of MLDv2 Report packets which the switch has received Displays the number of MLD Done packets which the switch has received Displays the number of MLD Specific Query packets which the switch has sent Displays the number of error packets which the switch has received forwards multicast streams based on IPv4 IPv6 multicast address table The Multicast Table function is implemented on the IPv4 Multicast Table and IPv6 Multicast Table pages 9 3 1 IPv4 Multicast Table On this page you can view the information of the multicast groups already on the switch Multicast IP addresses range from 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 The range for receivers to join is from 224 0 1 0 to 239 255 255 255 Choose the menu Multicast gt Multicast Table IPv4 Multicast Table to load the following page Search Option O Multicast IP O VLAN ID O Port O Type Multicast IP Table Multicast IP Total
233. in the STP network BPDU Protect is to prevent the edge port from being attacked by maliciously created BPDUs BPDU Filter is to prevent BPDUs flood in the STP network Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to When TC Protect is enabled for the port on Port Protect page the TC threshold and TC protect cycle need to be configured on this page Choose the menu Spanning Tree STP Security TC Protect to load the following page 108 TC Protect TC Threshold 20 packet 1 100 Apply TC Protect Cycle 5 sec 1 10 Help Figure 7 11 TC Protect The following entries are displayed on this screen gt TC Protect TC Threshold Enter a number from 1 to 100 It is the maximum number of the TC BPDUs received by the switch in a TC Protect Cycle The default value is 20 TC Protect Cycle Enter a value from 1 to 10 to specify the TC Protect Cycle The default value is 5 7 5 Application Example for STP Function v Network Requirements e Switch A B C D and E all support MSTP function e Ais the central switch e Band C are switches in the convergence layer D E and F are switches in the access layer e There are 6 VLANs labeled as VLAN101 VLAN106 in the network e All switches run MSTP and belong to the same MST region e The data in VLAN101 103 and 105 are transmitted in the STP with B as the root bridge The data in VLAN102 104 and 106 are transmitted in the STP with C as the root bridge Switch
234. ing the current configurations In addition the switch supports the feature to adjust the TPID Values of VLAN VPN Packets TPID Tag Protocol Identifier is a field of the VLAN tag IEEE 802 1Q specifies the value of TPID to be 0x8100 This switch adopts the default value of TPID 0x8100 defined by the protocol Other manufacturers use other TPID values such as 0x9100 or 0x9200 in the outer tags of VLAN VPN packets To be compatible with devices coming from other manufacturers this switch can adjust the TPID values of VLAN VPN packets globally You can configure TPID values by yourself When a port receives a packet this port will replace the TPID value in the outer VLAN tag of this packet with the user defined value and then send the packet again Thus the VLAN VPN packets sent to the public network can be recognized by devices of other manufacturers The position of the TPID field in an Ethernet packet is the same as the position of the protocol type field in the packet without VLAN Tag Thus to avoid confusion happening when the switch forwards or receives a packet you must not configure the following protocol type values listed in the following table as the TPID value Protocol type Value ARP 0x0806 IP 0x0800 MPLS 0x8847 0x8848 IPX 0x8137 IS IS 0x8000 78 Protocol type Value LACP 0x8809 802 1X 0x888E Table 6 3 Values of Ethernet frame protocol type in common use This
235. is selected by BPDU comparing The switch with the smallest root ID is chosen as the root bridge e Selecting the root port and designate port The operation is taken in the following way Step Operation 1 For each switch except the one chosen as the root bridge in a network the port that receives the BPDU with the highest priority is chosen as the root port of the switch 2 Using the root port BPDU and the root path cost the switch generates a designated port BPDU for each of its ports Root ID is replaced with that of the root port Root path is replaced with the sum of the root path cost of the root port and the path cost between this port and the root port The ID of the designated bridge is replaced with that of the switch The ID of the designated port is replaced with that of the port 3 The switch compares the resulting BPDU with the BPDU of the desired port whose role you want to determine If the resulting BPDU takes the precedence over the BPDU of the port the port is chosen as the designated port and the BPDU of this port is replaced with the resulting BPDU The port regularly sends out the resulting BPDU If the BPDU of this port takes the precedence over the resulting BPDU the BPDU of this port is not replaced and the port is blocked The port only can receive BPDUs Table 7 2 Selecting root port and designated port Tips In an STP with stable topology only the root por
236. itch will add a tag to the packet according to the PVID of the 68 received port Thus the packet is assigned automatically to the corresponding VLAN for transmission 2 When receiving tagged packet the switch will process it basing on the 802 1Q VLAN If the received port is the member of the VLAN to which the tagged packet belongs the packet will be forwarded normally Otherwise the packet will be discarded 3 If the MAC address of a Host is classified into 802 1Q VLAN please set its connected port of switch to be a member of this 802 1Q VLAN so as to ensure the packets forwarded normally 6 2 1 MAC VLAN On this page you can create MAC VLAN and view the current MAC VLANs in the table Choose the menu VLAN gt MAC VLAN to load the following page Create MAC VLAN MAC Address IZ Format 00 00 00 00 00 01 r Description 8 characters maximum VLAN ID 1 4094 MAC VLAN Table MAC Address Select MAC Address Description YLAN ID Operation No entry in the MAC VLAN table Al Figure 6 7 Create and View MAC VLAN The following entries are displayed on this screen gt VLAN Table MAC Address Enter the MAC address Description Give a description to the MAC address for identification VLAN ID Enter the ID number of the MAC VLAN This VLAN should be one of the 802 1Q VLANs the ingress port belongs to gt MAC VLAN Table MAC Select Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding entry base
237. itor Traffic Summary to load the following page Auto Refresh Auto Refresh OEnable Disable li Refresh Rate sec 3 300 Traffic Summary Port Port Packets Rx Packets Tx Octets Rx Octets Tx Statistics 1 0 0 0 0 Statistics 2 2 0 0 0 0 Statistics 3 0 0 0 0 Statistics 4 0 0 0 0 Statistics 5 0 0 0 0 Statistics 6 0 0 0 0 Statistics FA 0 0 0 0 Statistics 8 0 0 0 0 Statistics 9 0 0 0 0 Statistics 10 0 0 0 0 Statistics 11 0 0 0 0 Statistics 12 0 0 0 0 Statistics y Figure 5 10 Traffic Summary The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Auto Refresh Auto Refresh Allows you to Enable Disable refreshing the Traffic Summary automatically Refresh Rate Enter a value in seconds to specify the refresh interval gt Traffic Summary Port Select Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Port Displays the port number Packets Rx Displays the number of packets received on the port The error packets are not counted in 53 Packets Tx Displays the number of packets transmitted on the port Octets Rx Displays the number of octets received on the port The error octets are counted in Octets Tx Displays the number of octets transmitted on the port Statistics Click the Statistics button to view the detailed traffic statistics of the port 5 3 2 Traffic Statistics Traffic Statistics screen displays the detailed traffic information of each port which fa
238. ity can initiate an OAM connection process The passive OAM entity waits and responds to OAM connection establishment requests Interconnected OAM entities notify the peer of their OAM configuration information and the OAM capabilities of the local nodes to support OAM by exchanging Information OAMPDUs and then determine if OAM connections can be established Only when the settings concerning Loopback link detecting and link event of the both side match can an OAM connection be established Device A Device B Active mode ore Passive mode Ss 1 Information OAMPDU from A to B i j 2 Information OAMPDU from B to A Figure 8 2 OAM Discovery The difference between active OAM mode and passive OAM mode is shown as follows Item Active OAM mode Passive OAM mode Initiating OAM Discovery Available Unavailable Responding to OAM Discovery Available Available Transmitting Information OAMPDUs Available Available Transmitting Event Notification OAMPDUs Transmitting Information OAMPDUs with the Data Pad field being empty Available Available Available Available 114 Item Active OAM mode Passive OAM mode Transmitting Loopback Control OAMPDUs Available Unavailable Available if both sides operate Available in active OAM mode Responding to Loopback Control OAMPDUs Transmitting organization specific OAMPDUs Available Available T
239. ived Displays the number of leave packets the port received Displays the number of error packets the port received In an IPv4 multicast network that runs IGMP a Layer 3 multicast device works as an IGMP querier to send IGMP queries and manage the multicast table But IGMP is not supported by the devices 145 in Layer 2 network IGMP Snooping Querier can act as an IGMP Router in Layer 2 network It can help to create and maintain multicast forwarding table on the switch with the Query messages it generates Choose the menu Multicast gt Querier to load the following page IGMP Snooping Querier Config VLAN ID 1 4094 Query Interval 60 _ secs 1 300 Max Response Time 10 secs 1 25 General Query Source IP 192 168 0 1 format 192 168 0 1 Last Member Query secs 1 5 Add Interval Es Last Member Query 1 5 Times Last Member Query a E 192 168 0 1 format 192 168 0 1 Source IP IGMP Snooping Querier Table VLAN ID Max Response General Query Last Member Last Member Last Member Query E beyciulehac Sey way Time Source IP Query Interval Query Times Source IP i O Notice 1 You can only add one IGMP Snooping Querier for each VLAN 2 There may be size effects on choosing query router by adding IGMP Snooping Querier Figure 9 12 Packet Statistics The following entries are displayed on this screen gt IGMP Snooping Querier Config VLAN ID Enter the ID of the VLAN that enables IGMP Snooping Queri
240. k layer addresses of neighboring nodes within the local link or applied in IPv6 Duplicate Address Detection A node is required to join the associated Solicited Node multicast addresses for all unicast and anycast addresses that have been configured for the node s interfaces IPv6 Solicited Node Multicast Address Format FFO2 0 0 0 0 1 FFXX XXXX 133 The IPv6 solicited node multicast address has the prefix FFO2 0 0 0 0 1 FF00 0000 104 concatenated with the 24 low order bits of a corresponding IPv6 unicast or anycast address 2 IPv6 Multicast MAC Address The high order 16 bits of an IPv6 multicast MAC address begins with 0x3333 while the low order 32 bits of an IPv6 multicast MAC address are the low order 32 bits of the IPv6 multicast IP address The mapping relationship is described as the following figure 128 bit IPv6 address aA 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 oor 1008 32 bit mapping 48 bit MAC address 3333 CES E 16 bit prefix MAC address Figure 9 3 Mapping relationship between multicast Pv6 address and multicast IPv6 MAC address The high order 16 bits of the IP multicast address are 0x3333 identifying the IPv6 multicast group The low order 32 bits of the IPv6 multicast IP address are mapped to the multicast MAC address gt Multicast Address Table The switch is forwarding multicast packets based on the multicast address table As the transmission of multicast packets can not span the VLAN the first part of th
241. kets which causes that the Host can not access the network normally The ARP Attack implemented by imitating Gateway is illustrated in the following figure IP 192 168 0 1 MAC 00 00 00 1 1 11 11 3 Host tries to communicate with Gateway via the MAC Address 00 00 12 34 56 but Switch failed The normal communication is broken 1 Attacker sends the fake ARP packets with a forged Gateway address 00 00 00 12 34 56 to the normal Host 2 Host updates its ARP table The original ARP entry 192 168 0 1 00 00 00 11 11 11 is updated to 192 168 0 1 00 00 00 12 34 56 Attacker Host IP 192 168 0 102 IP 192 168 0 103 MAC 00 00 00 22 22 22 MAC 00 00 00 33 33 33 Figure 12 9 ARP Attack Imitating Gateway As the above figure shown the attacker sends the fake ARP packets with a forged Gateway address to the normal Host and then the Host will automatically update the ARP table after receiving the ARP packets When the Host tries to communicate with Gateway the Host will encapsulate this false destination MAC address for packets which results in a breakdown of the normal communication gt Cheating Gateway The attacker sends the wrong IP address to MAC address mapping entries of Hosts to the Gateway which causes that the Gateway can not communicate with the legal terminal Hosts normally The ARP Attack implemented by cheating Gateway is illustrated in the following figure 199 2 Gateway updates its ARP tab
242. l be tagged basing on the VLAN Mapping entries and becomes a double tagged packet to be forwarded in the new VLAN 79 Choose the menu VLAN gt VLAN VPN gt VLAN Mapping to load the following page VLAN Mapping Config C VLAN 1 4094 SP VLAN l 1 4094 Description 16 characters maximum VLAN Mapping Table C VLAN Select C VLAN SP VLAN Description Operation O 200 2 QHPark_No 1 Edit O 201 2 QHPark_No 2 Edit O 202 2 QHPark_No 3 Edit O 301 3 LJYPark_No A Edit O 302 3 LJYPark_No D Edit O 303 3 LJYPark_No E Edit O 401 3 DPTR_No 1 Edit O 402 3 DPTR_No 2 Edit O 403 3 DPTR_No 3 Edit O 404 3 DPTR_No 4 Edit al Total VLAN Mapping Entry 10 Figure 6 13 Create VLAN Mapping Entry The following entries are displayed on this screen gt VLAN Mapping Config C VLAN Enter the ID number of the Customer VLAN C VLAN refers to the VLAN to which the packet received by switch belongs SP VLAN Enter the ID number of the Service Provider VLAN Description Give a description to the VLAN Mapping entry or leave it blank gt VLAN Mapping Table C VLAN Select Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding entry based on the C VLAN ID you entered Select Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding VLAN Mapping entry It is multi optional Operation Click the Edit button to modify the settings of the entry and click the Modify button to apply 6 7 3 Port Enable On this page you can enable the port for
243. l connection in the network is not interrupted but network performance degrades gradually A flag in the OAMPDU allows an OAM entity to convey failure conditions to its peer The failure conditions are as follows Link Fault Peer link signal is lost This is sent once per second in the Information OAMPDU Dying Gasp An unrecoverable fault such as power failure occurs This is sent immediately and continuously e Critical Event Unspecified critical event occurs This is sent immediately and continuously 115 As Information OAMPDUs are sent between the OAM entities periodically an OAM entity can inform one of its OAM peers of link faults through Information OAMPDUs So the network administrator can get informed of the link faults and take action in time Remote Loopback Remote loopback helps to ensure the quality of links during installation or when troubleshooting After the OAM connection is established the active OAM entity can put its OAM peer into loopback mode using a loopback control OAMPDU With remote loopback enabled the active OAM entity sends remote loopback requests and the peer responds If the peer is in the loopback mode it returns all frames except OAMPDUs and pause frames to the senders along the original paths Through these return frames administrators can test the link performance like delay jitter and frame loss rate The following figure shows how remote loopback testing works Device A Device B Active
244. layer to make some special data transmitted in the specified VLAN e VLAN VPN VLAN VPN allows the packets with VLAN tags of private networks to be encapsulated with VLAN tags of public networks at the network access terminal of the Internet Service Provider e GVRP GVRP allows the switch to automatically add or remove the VLANs via the dynamic VLAN registration information and propagate the local VLAN registration information to other switches without having to individually configure each VLAN e Private VLAN Designed to save VLAN resources of uplink devices and decrease broadcast Private VLAN mainly used in campus or enterprise networks to achieve user layer 2 separation and to save VLAN resources of uplink devices Chapter 7 Spanning Tree This module is used to configure spanning tree function of the switch Here mainly introduces e STP Config Configure and view the global settings of spanning tree function e Port Config Configure CIST parameters of ports e MSTP Instance Configure MSTP instances e STP Security Configure protection function to prevent devices from any malicious attack against STP features Chapter Introduction Chapter 8 Ethernet OAM This module is used to configure Ethernet OAM function of the switch Here mainly introduces e Basic Config Enable the Ethernet OAM function configure its OAM mode and check out the connection status e Link Monitoring Configure the p
245. lays the cluster status enabled or disabled of the switch Cluster Role Displays the role the switch plays in the cluster 15 3 2 Cluster Config On this page you can configure the status of the cluster the switch belongs to Choose the menu Cluster Cluster Cluster Config to load the following page 258 e Fora candidate switch the following page is displayed Current Role Role Candidate Role Change Role Change Individual Commander Cluster Name characters 1 16 IP Pool Address Mask Figure 15 13 Cluster Configuration for Candidate Switch The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Current Role Role Displays the role the current switch plays in the cluster gt Role Change Individual Select this option to change the role of the switch to be individual switch Commander Select this option to change the role of the switch to be commander switch and then configure the cluster e Cluster Name Configure the name of the current cluster the switch belongs to e IP Pool amp Mask Configure the private IP range of the member switches in the cluster e Foracommander switch the following page is displayed Current Role Role Commander Role Change Role Change Candidate Apply _ Cluster Config Hold Time 20 sec 1 255 Interval Time 20 o sec 1 255 TFTP Server 192 168 0 6 l Apply Hel Figure 15 14 Cluster Configuratio
246. lays the end date of the holiday 11 2 ACL Config An ACL may contain a number of rules and each rule specifies a different package range Packets are matched in match order Once a rule is matched the switch processes the matched packets taking the operation specified in the rule without considering the other rules which can enhance the performance of the switch Packets are classified based on match rules in order of the rules Once a rule is matched The ACL Config function can be implemented on ACL Summary ACL Create MAC ACL Standard IP ACL and Extend IP ACL pages 11 2 1 ACL Summary On this page you can view the current ACLs configured in the switch 177 Choose the menu ACL gt ACL Config ACL Summary to load the following page Search Options Select a ACL Y ACL Type Rule Order Rule Table an Delete Help Figure 11 4 ACL Summary The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Search Option Select ACL Select the ACL you have created ACL Type Displays the type of the ACL you select Rule Order Displays the rule order of the ACL you select gt Rule Table Display the rule table of the ACL you have selected Here you can edit the rules view the details of them and move them up and down 11 2 2 ACL Create On this page you can create ACLs Choose the menu ACL gt ACL Config ACL Create to load the following page Create ACL ACLID Es 0 99 MAC ACL 100 199 St
247. ld of the browser then press the Enter key Can Figure 3 1 Web browser Tips To log in to the switch the IP address of your PC should be set in the same subnet addresses of the switch The IP address is 192 168 0 x x is any number from 2 to 254 Subnet Mask is 255 255 255 0 For the detailed instructions as to how to do this please refer to Appendix B 2 After a moment a login window will appear as shown in Figure 3 2 Enter admin for the User Name and Password both in lower case letters Then click the Login button or press the Enter key TP LINK UserName admin Password eeose Figure 3 2 Login gt Inthe IPv6 network 1 Ensure that your PC s IPv6 function is enabled and it s in the same subnet with the switch 2 To log on to the switch by the console port on the switch please take the following steps 1 Connect the PCs or Terminals to the console port on the switch by the provided cable 2 Configure the Hyper terminal as illustrated in Configure the Hyper Terminal in Chapter 17 3 The DOS prompt TL SL5428E gt will appear after pressing the Enter button as Figure 3 3 shown It indicates that you can use the CLI now 10 tp tink HyperTerminal Elo Cat yew Cal Transfer tip Oe 5 046 amp TL SL5428E gt Figure 3 3 Log in the switch 3 Type in the command enable show ipv6 interface vlan 1 to obtain the switch s link local address TPLINK
248. le Select Index Port Interval sec Owner Status o Poti v gt E Disable v O 1 Port 1 1800 monitor Disable O 2 Port 2 1800 monitor Disable O 3 Port 3 1800 monitor Disable O 4 Port 4 1800 monitor Disable O 5 Pots 1800 monitor Disable Fj 6 Port6 1800 monitor Disable O 7 Port 1800 monitor Disable O 8 Port 8 1800 monitor Disable Fj 9 Portg 1800 monitor Disable O 10 Port 10 1800 monitor Disable O 11 Port 11 1800 monitor Disable O 12 Pon 12 1800 monitor Disable Figure 13 10 History Control The following entries are displayed on this screen gt History Control Table Select Select the desired entry for configuration Index Displays the index number of the entry Port Specify the port from which the history samples were taken Interval Specify the interval to take samplings from the port Owner Enter the name of the device or user that defined the entry Status Enable Disable the corresponding sampling entry 13 3 2 Event Config On this page you can configure the RMON events Choose the menu SNMP RMON gt Event Config to load the following page Event Table Select Index User Description Type Owner Status o PE TJ ones Disable w O 1 public None monitor Disable dll 2 public None monitor Disable O 3 public None monitor Disable O 4 public None monitor Disable O 5 public None monitor Disable O 6 public None monitor Disable O 7 public None monitor Disable O 8 public None monitor Disable O g publi
249. le The original ARP entry of Host A 192 168 0 103 00 00 00 33 33 33 is updated to 192 168 0 103 00 00 00 12 34 56 IP 192 168 0 1 MAC 00 00 00 11 11 11 Gateway 1 Attacker sends the fake ARP packets of Host A with a forged MAC address 00 00 00 12 34 56 to Gateway 3 Gateway tries to communicate with Host A via the MAC address 00 00 00 12 34 56 but failed The normal communication is broken Attacker Host A IP 192 168 0 102 IP 192 168 0 103 MAC 00 00 00 22 22 22 MAC 00 00 00 33 33 33 Figure 12 10 ARP Attack Cheating Gateway As the above figure shown the attacker sends the fake ARP packets of Host A to the Gateway and then the Gateway will automatically update its ARP table after receiving the ARP packets When the Gateway tries to communicate with Host A in LAN it will encapsulate this false destination MAC address for packets which results in a breakdown of the normal communication gt Cheating Terminal Hosts The attacker sends the false IP address to MAC address mapping entries of terminal Host Server to another terminal Host which causes that the two terminal Hosts in the same network segment can not communicate with each other normally The ARP Attack implemented by cheating terminal Hosts is illustrated in the following figure IP 192 168 0 1 MAC 00 00 00 11 11 11 Gateway 3 Host B tries to communicate with Host A via the MAC address 00 00 00 12 34 56 but failed The normal
250. lect NTDP information 4 View the detailed Optional On Cluster Cluster Cluster Topology page information of other switches in the cluster double click the icon of the switch to view its detailed information Return to CONTENTS 263 Chapter 16 Maintenance Maintenance module assembling the commonly used system tools to manage the switch provides the convenient method to locate and solve the network problem 1 System Monitor Monitor the utilization status of the memory and the CPU of switch 2 Log View the configuration parameters of the switch and find out the errors via the Logs 3 Cable Test Test the connection status of the cable to locate and diagnose the trouble spot of the network 4 Loopback Test whether the ports of the switch and its peer device are available 5 Network Diagnostics Test whether the destination device is reachable and detect the route hops from the switch to the destination device 16 1 System Monitor System Monitor functions to display the utilization status of the memory and the CPU of switch via the data graph The CPU utilization rate and the memory utilization rate should fluctuate stably around a specific value If the CPU utilization rate or the memory utilization rate increases markedly please detect whether the network is being attacked The System Monitor function is implemented on the CPU Monitor and Memory Monitor pages 16 1 1 CPU Monitor Choose
251. llows you to remove the port from the current VLAN Configuration Procedure Step Operation Description 1 Set the link type for Required On the VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt Port Config page set port the link type for the port basing on its connected device 2 Create VLAN Required On the VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page click the Create button to create a VLAN Enter the VLAN ID and the description for the VLAN Meanwhile specify its member ports 3 Modify View VLAN Optional On the VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page click the Edit Detail button to modify view the information of the corresponding VLAN 4 Delete VLAN Optional On the VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page select the desired entry to delete the corresponding VLAN by clicking the Delete button 6 2 MAC VLAN MAC VLAN technology is the way to classify VLANs according to the MAC addresses of Hosts A MAC address corresponds to a single VLAN ID For the device in a MAC VLAN if its MAC address is bound to VLAN the device can be connected to another member port in this VLAN and still takes its member role effect without changing the configuration of VLAN members The packet in MAC VLAN is processed in the following way 1 When receiving an untagged packet the switch matches the packet with the current MAC VLAN If the packet is matched the switch will add a corresponding MAC VLAN tag to it If no MAC VLAN is matched the sw
252. lticast Source gt Configuration Procedure Router Switch Port 4 Port 5 VLAN4 VLANS User A User B Step Operation Description 1 Create VLANs Create three VLANs with the VLAN ID 3 4 and 5 respectively and specify the description of VLAN3 as Multicast VLAN on VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN page 2 Configure ports On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN function pages For port 3 configure its link type as GENERAL and its egress rule as TAG and add it to VLAN3 VLAN4 and VLAN5 For port 4 configure its link type as GENERAL and its egress rule as UNTAG and add it to VLAN3 and VLAN 4 For port 5 configure its link type as GENERAL and its egress rule as UNTAG and add it to VLAN3 and VLAN 5 3 Enable IGMP Snooping function Enable IGMP Snooping function globally on Multicast IGMP Snooping Snooping Config page Enable IGMP Snooping function for port 3 port4 and port 5 on Multicast gt IGMP Snooping Port Config page 4 Enable Multicast VLAN Enable Multicast VLAN configure the VLAN ID of a multicast VLAN as 3 and keep the other parameters as default on Multicast IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN page 5 Check Multicast VLAN 3 5 and Multicast VLAN 3 will be displayed in the IGMP Snooping Status table on the Multicast IGMP Snooping Snooping Config page 9 1 6 Static Multicast I P Static Multicast IP table isolated from dynamic multicast group and multicast filter is not
253. ly log on to the corresponding Web management page for you to configure and manage this switch Double click the node switch to view its detailed information Choose the menu Cluster Cluster Cluster Topology to load the following page Graphic Show Commander Y Member Q Candidate SY Individual Y Active Link nActive Link Collect Topology Refresh Help Figure 15 18 Collect Topology The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Graphic Show Collect Topology Click the Collect Topology button to display the cluster topology Manage If the current device is the commander switch in the cluster and the selected device is a member switch in the cluster you can click the Manage button to log on to Web management page of the corresponding switch Global configuration procedure of the Cluster function Before configuring a cluster you should make clear the role each device will play in the cluster in advance and make sure the devices in the cluster can communicate with each other 262 gt Ifthe switch is a commander switch in the cluster please take the following steps Step Operation Description 1 Enable the NDP function Optional On Cluster NDP NDP Config page enable the globally and for the port NDP function on the switch and then configure NDP parameters 2 Enable the NTDP function Optional On Cluster NTDP NTDP Config page enable globally and fo
254. mary VLAN and one Secondary VLAN 2 AVLAN can not be set as the Primary VLAN and Secondary VLAN simultaneously 3 A Secondary VLAN can only join one private VLAN 4 A Primary VLAN can be associated with multi Secondary VLANs to create multi Private VLANs gt Private VLAN Implementation To hide Secondary VLANs from uplink devices and save VLAN resources Private VLAN containing one Primary VLAN and one Secondary VLAN requires the following characteristics 82 Packets from different Secondary VLANs can be forwarded to the uplink device via promiscuous port and carry no corresponding Secondary VLAN information Packets from Primary VLANs can be sent to end users via host port and carry no Primary VLAN information Private VLAN is designed to save VLAN resource by means of Port configuration synchronization among the MAC address tables of VLANs and MAC address duplication To achieve these requirements described above the following two aspects are required 1 Create Private VLAN A Private VLAN includes one Primary VLAN and one Secondary VLAN the PVID of the promiscuous port is equal to the Primary VLAN ID and the PVID of the host port is the same as the corresponding Secondary VLAN ID moreover the egress rule of all ports is untag by default that is only those untagged packets can be forwarded but you can modify the egress rule on VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page 2 Port configuration and MAC address duplicatio
255. mple Insert FFFE to the middle of the address to get 0012 0BFF FE0A 2D51 Then set the U L bit to 1 to obtain an interface ID in EUI 64 format as 0212 0BFF FE0OA 2D51 e Link local address Alink local address is an IPv6 unicast address that can be automatically configured on any interface using the link local prefix FE80 10 1111 1110 10 and the interface identifier in the modified EUI 64 format Link local addresses are used in the neighbor discovery protocol and the stateless autoconfiguration process Nodes on a local link can use link local addresses to communicate the nodes do not need globally unique addresses to communicate The figure below shows the structure of a link local address 128 bits Interface ID 1111 1110 10 FE80 10 10 bits Figure 4 9 Link local Address Format IPv6 devices must not forward packets that have link local source or destination addresses to other links n ote You can configure multiple IPv6 addresses per interface but only one link local address gt IPv6 Neighbor Discovery The IPv6 neighbor discovery process uses ICMP messages and solicited node multicast addresses to determine the link layer address of a neighbor on the same network local link verify the reachability of a neighbor and track neighboring devices 23 IPv6 Neighbor Solicitation Message A value of 135 in the Type field of the ICMP packet header identifies a neighbor solicitation NS message Neig
256. multicast IP address the desired entry must carry Enter the VLAN ID the desired entry must carry Select the port number the desired entry must carry Select the type the desired entry must carry e All Displays all multicast IP entries e Static Displays all static multicast IP entries e Dynamic Displays all dynamic multicast IP entries 157 gt Multicast IP Table Multicast IP VLAN ID Forward Ports Type Anote Displays the multicast IP Displays the VLAN ID Displays the forward ports of the group Displays the type of the group The max number of multicast entries is 256 The IPv4 multicast table and IPv6 multicast table share the total entry number of 256 Return to CONTENTS 158 Chapter 10 QoS QoS Quality of Service functions to provide different quality of service for various network applications and requirements and optimize the bandwidth resource distribution so as to provide a network service experience of a better quality gt QoS This switch classifies the ingress packets maps the packets to different priority queues and then forwards the packets according to specified scheduling algorithms to implement QoS function Packets are mapped to different priority queues Gia Packets sent via this interface CEE Packets are forwarded a 11 oa pod Egress interface secas ff E sss S E Gq s E pm Gas i Packets are forwarded according to the Packets S
257. n 3 2 Configuration After a successful login the main page will appear as Figure 3 6 and you can configure the function by clicking the setup menu on the left side of the screen TP LINK TL SL5428E System System Info User Management System Tools Access Security Switching VLAN Spanning Tree Ethernet OAM Multicast Qos ACL Network Security SNMP LLDP Cluster Maintenance Save Config Logout Ave Clicking Apply can only make the new configurations effective before the switch is rebooted If you want to keep the configurations effective even the switch is rebooted please click Save em Time 10 12 14 16 19 20 22 EN 2 4 6 6 26 28 Foal al wah onl AMTAA MANAA MIA o a on THEE HETE HE E ay E AENA a 2 System Info System Description 24 Port 10 100Mbps 4 Port Gigabit L2 Managed Switch Device Name TL SL5428E Device Location SHENZHEN System Contact wwwtp link com Hardware Version TL SL5428E 3 0 Firmware Version 3 0 0 Build 20140224 Rel 36216 IP Address 192 168 0 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway MAC Address 00 04 EB 13 12 C3 System Time 2006 01 02 06 21 54 Run Time 0 day 22 hour 22 min 11 sec Figure 3 6 Main Setup Menu 12 Config You are suggested to click Save Config before cutting off the power or rebooting the switch to avoid losing the new configurations Return to CONTENTS 13 Chapter 4 System
258. n unicast and broadcast deliver a low efficiency Multicast solves this problem It can deliver a high efficiency to send data in the point to multi point service which can save large bandwidth and reduce the network load In multicast the packets are transmitted in the following way as shown in Figure 9 1 l 1 Multicast Source Multicast Streams amp Router Switch 1 iy Switch 2 FF S V PC PC Receiver 1 Receiver 2 Figure 9 1 Information transmission in the multicast mode Features of multicast 1 The number of receivers is not certain Usually point to multipoint transmission is needed 2 Multiple users receiving the same information form a multicast group The multicast information sender just need to send the information to the network device once 3 Each user can join and leave the multicast group at any time 4 Real time is highly demanded and certain packets drop is allowed 131 gt IPv4 Multicast Address 1 IPv4 Multicast IP Address As specified by IANA Internet Assigned Numbers Authority Class D IP addresses are used as destination addresses of multicast packets The multicast IP addresses range from 224 0 0 0 239 255 255 255 The following table displays the range and description of several special multicast IP addresses Multicast IP address range Description 224 0 0 0 224 0 0 255 Reserved multicast addresses for routing protocols and other network
259. n configure all the functions of the switch The Web management pages contained in this guide are subject to the admin s login without any explanation Choose the menu System User Management User Config to load the following page 28 User Info User Name Access Level User Status Password Confirm Password Guest v O Enable Disable 7 Password Display Mode Cipher v User Table Select UserID E 1 Note User Name Access Level Status Operation admin Admin Enable Edit The user name should not be more than 16 characters and password should not be more than 31 characters using digits English letters and underlines only Figure 4 12 User Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt User Info User Name Access Level User Status Password Confirm Password Password Display Mode gt User Table Select User ID Name Access Level and status Operation Create a name for users login Select the access level to login e Admin Admin can edit modify and view all the settings of different functions e Guest Guest only can view the settings without the right to edit and modify Enable Disable the user configuration Type a password for users login Retype the password Select the way of displaying password in configuration file By default it is cipher Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding user informa
260. n for Commander Switch 259 The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Current Role Role Displays the role the current switch plays in the cluster gt Role Change Candidate Select this option to change the role of the switch to be candidate switch gt Cluster Config Hold Time Enter the time for the switch to keep the cluster information Interval Time Enter the interval to send handshake packets TFTP Server Enter the IP address of TFTP server e Fora member switch the following page is displayed Current Role Role Member Role Change Individual Apply Help Figure 15 15 Cluster Configuration for Member Switch The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Current Role Role Displays the role the current switch plays in the cluster gt Role Change Individual Select this option to change the role of the switch to be individual switch e For an individual switch the following page is displayed Current Role Role Individual Role Change Candidate Figure 15 16 Cluster Configuration for Individual Switch 260 The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Current Role Role Displays the role the current switch plays in the cluster gt Role Change Candidate Select this option to change the role of the switch to be candidate switch 15 3 3 Member Config When this switch is the commander switch of the cluster via the commander switch you
261. n should be synchronized on the switch Port configuration synchronization is completed in the whole configuration progress and MAC address duplication is implemented while FDB is changing e Port configuration synchronization when configuring promiscuous and host ports for a Private VLAN the system will automatically add the promiscuous port and the host port synchronously to the corresponding Primary VLAN and Secondary VLAN Through port configuration synchronization the promiscuous port forwards the packets from the Primary VLAN as well as from all the Primary VLAN associated Secondary VLANs the host port forwards the packets from the Primary VLAN and the Secondary VLAN owning this host port Here we take a Private VLAN to illustrate port configuration synchronization As shown in the figure below Port2 Port3 and Port5 belong to VLAN 2 VLAN 3 and VLAN 5 respectively Configure VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 as Secondary VLANs and VLAN5 as Primary VLAN After this configuration is completed the settings of these ports are changed as shown in Table 6 5 Router MAC mac_a Figure 6 15 Port PVID Allowed VLANs 83 Port5 5 VLANS Port2 2 VLAN2 Port3 3 VLAN3 Table 6 4 Port settings before configuration synchronization Port PVID Allowed VLANs Port5 5 VLANZ 3 5 Port2 2 VLANZ 5 Port3 3 VLANZ2 5 Table 6 5 Port settings after configuration synchronization e MAC addres
262. n the Web browser and servers It is mainly applied through ecommerce and online banking SSL mainly provides the following services 1 Authenticate the users and the servers based on the certificates to ensure the data are transmitted to the correct users and servers 2 Encrypt the data transmission to prevent the data being intercepted 3 Maintain the integrality of the data to prevent the data being altered in the transmission Adopting asymmetrical encryption technology SSL uses key pair to encrypt decrypt information A key pair refers to a public key contained in the certificate and its corresponding private key By default the switch has a certificate self signed certificate and a corresponding private key The Certificate Key Download function enables the user to replace the default key pair After SSL is effective you can log on to the Web management page via https 192 168 0 1 For the first time you use HTTPS connection to log into the switch with the default certificate you will be prompted that The security certificate presented by this website was not issued by a trusted certificate authority or Certificate Errors Please add this certificate to trusted certificates or continue to this website The switch also supports HTTPS connection for IPv6 After configuring an IPv6 address for example 3001 1 for the switch you can log on to the switch s Web management page via https 3001 1 On this page yo
263. nd enhance the process efficiency of the system Please configure this feature appropriate to your needs Choose the menu Multicast IGMP Snooping Snooping Config to load the following page Global Config IGMP Snooping Enable Disable Unknown Multicast Forward O Discard IGMP Snooping Status Description Member Enabled Port Enabled VLAN Note IGMP Snooping will take effect only when Global Config Port Config and VLAN Config are all enabled Figure 9 5 Basic Config 136 The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config IGMP Snooping Unknown Multicast gt IGMP Snooping Status Description Member 9 1 2 VLAN Config Enable Disable IGMP Snooping function globally on the switch Select the operation for the switch to process unknown multicast Forward or Discard Displays IGMP Snooping status Displays the member of the corresponding status Multicast groups established by IGMP Snooping are based on VLANs On this page you can configure different IGMP parameters for different VLANs Choose the menu Multicast gt IGMP Snooping VLAN Config to load the following page VLAN Config VLAN ID 1 4094 Router Port Time 300 sec 60 600 recommended 300 Member Port Time 260 _ _ sec 60 600 recommended 260 Leave Time sec 1 30 recommended 1 Static Router Ports VLAN Table Select VLANID RouterPortTime Member Port Time Format 1 3 6 8 VLANI
264. nd network congestion may occur 106 To avoid this MSTP provides root protect function Ports with this function enabled can only be set as designated ports in all spanning tree instances When a port of this type receives BDPU packets with higher priority it transits its state to blocking state and stops forwarding packets as if it is disconnected from the link The port resumes the normal state if it does not receive any configuration BPDU packets with higher priorities for a period of two times of forward delay gt TC Protect A switch removes MAC address entries upon receiving TC BPDU packets If a user maliciously sends a large amount of TC BPDU packets to a switch in a short period the switch will be busy with removing MAC address entries which may decrease the performance and stability of the network To prevent the switch from frequently removing MAC address entries you can enable the TC protect function on the switch With TC protect function enabled if the account number of the received TC BPDUs exceeds the maximum number you set in the TC threshold field the switch will not performs the removing operation in the TC protect cycle Such a mechanism prevents the switch from frequently removing MAC address entries gt BPDU Protect Ports of the switch directly connected to PCs or servers are configured as edge ports to rapidly transit their states When these ports receive BPDUs the system automatically configures these
265. new function after upgrading the firmware Firmware File Upgrade Firmware Version 3 0 0 Build 20140224 Rel 36216 Hardware Version TL SL5428E 3 0 Note 1 Please select the proper software version matching with your hardware to upgrade 2 To avoid damage please dont turn off the device while upgrading 3 After upgrading the device will reboot automatically 4 You are suggested to backup the configuration before upgrading Figure 4 15 Firmware Upgrade Anote Don t interrupt the upgrade Please select the proper software version matching with your hardware to upgrade To avoid damage please don t turn off the device while upgrading After upgrading the device will reboot automatically A Op You are suggested to backup the configuration before upgrading 31 4 3 4 System Reboot On this page you can reboot the switch and return to the login page Please save the current configuration before rebooting to avoid losing the configuration unsaved Choose the menu System System Tools System Reboot to load the following page System Reboot Save Config Reboot Note To avoid damage please don t turn off the device while rebooting Figure 4 16 System Reboot Mote To avoid damage please don t turn off the device while rebooting 4 3 5 System Reset On this page you can reset the switch to the default All the settings will be cleared after the switch is reset Choose the menu Syst
266. nform type has a higher security than the Trap type Specify the amount of times the switch resends an inform request The switch will resend the inform request if it doesn t get the response from the management station during the Timeout interval and it will terminate resending the inform request if the resending times reach the specified Retry times Specify the maximum time for the switch to wait for the response from the management station before resending a request Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding management station Displays the IP Address of the management host Displays the UDP port used to send notifications Displays the User name of the management station Displays the Security Model of the management station Displays the Security Level for the SNMP v3 User Displays the type of the notifications Displays the maximum time for the switch to wait for the response from the management station before resending a request Displays the amount of times the switch resends an inform request Click the Edit button to modify the corresponding entry and click the Modify button to apply 13 2 2 Traps Config The switch supports different kinds of SNMP traps On this page you can select the traps that you are concerned about Then the switch will only report the selected events to the network management station and ignore others 230 SNMP Traps SNMP Authentication Link Status O Flash Operation O
267. ng the devices The application complied with GARP is called GARP implementation and GVRP is the implementation of GARP When GARP is implemented on a port of device the port is called GARP entity The information exchange between GARP entities is completed by messages GARP defines the messages into three types Join Leave and LeaveAll e Join Message When a GARP entity expects other switches to register certain attribute information of its own it sends out a Join message And when receiving the Join message from the other entity or configuring some attributes statically the device also sends out a Join message in order to be registered by the other GARP entities e Leave Message When a GARP entity expects other switches to deregister certain attribute information of its own it sends out a Leave message And when receiving the Leave message from the other entity or deregistering some attributes statically the device also sends out a Leave message e LeaveAll Message Once a GARP entity starts up it starts the LeaveAll timer After the timer times out the GARP entity sends out a LeaveAll message LeaveAll message is to deregister all the attribute information so as to enable the other GARP entities to re register attribute information of their own Through message exchange all the attribute information to be registered can be propagated to all the switches in the same switched network The interval of GARP messages is controlled by t
268. ning the source MAC address of packets and matching OUI address In practice the port voice VLAN mode is configured according to the type of packets sent out from voice device and the link type of the port The following table shows the detailed information 169 Port Voice Voice VLAN Mode Stream Type Link type of the port and processing mode ACCESS Not supported TRUNK Supported The default VLAN of the port can not be TAG voice voice VLAN sigam GENERAL Supported The default VLAN of the port can not be voice VLAN and the egress rule of the access port in the Automatic Mode voice VLAN should be TAG ACCESS Supported UNTAG voice TRUNK Not supported stream GENERAL Supported The default VLAN of the port should be voice VLAN and the egress rule of the access port in the voice VLAN should be UNTAG ACCESS Not supported TRUNK Supported The default VLAN of the port should not TAG voice be voice VLAN t eee a GENERAL Supported The default VLAN of the port can not be voice VLAN and the egress rule of the access port in the Manual Mode voice VLAN should be TAG ACCESS Supported UNTAG voice TRUNK Not supported stream GENERAL Supported The default VLAN of the port should be voice VLAN and the egress rule of the access port in the voice VLAN should be UNTAG Table 10 2 Port voice VLAN mode and voice stream processing mode gt Security Mode of Voice
269. nnected neighbors Click the Detail button to view the complete information collected for the port Choose the menu Cluster NDP NDP Config to load the following page 250 Global Config NDP Aging Time Hello Time Port Config Select Port O 1 O 3 O 5 O 7 Fi 9 O 11 O 13 O 15 O 17 O 19 O 21 O 23 O 25 O 27 O Enable O Disable 1180 sec 5 255 default 180 160 sec 5 254 default 60 NDP Select Port Enable 2 Enable O 4 Enable O 6 Enable O 8 Enable Fi 10 Enable g 12 Enable O 14 Enable O 16 Enable O 18 Enable O 20 Enable O 22 Enable Fi 24 Enable g 26 Enable O 28 Figure 15 4 NDP Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config NDP Aging Time Hello Time gt Port Config Select Port NDP Enable Disable Anote Enable Disable NDP function globally NDP Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enter the period for the neighbor switch to keep the NDP packets from this switch Enter the interval to send NDP packets Select the desired port to configure its NDP status Displays the port number of the switch Displays NDP status of the current port Click the Enable button to enable NDP for the port you select Click the Disable button to disable NDP for the port you select 1 NDP function is effective only when NDP function is enabled globally and for the port
270. nnnnnnnnnnnnneninnnnenecnn 32 AGO OY SOM ROS ii ia 32 4 4 ACCESS DOCU Visita als 32 4 4 1 Access Control nee eee 32 AA OS CO Oca ds 34 SS A eo i ce niente ln ie OREO TE a Ge 35 Chapter 5 SWitchINl tt ot e a a A ee eee 42 Did O O dads 42 5 1 1 Port CONTIG sisscencectenerttetechdantbleassesvsasateobhedeateis lend retrata 42 5 1 2 Port MIOT soasct tes teettatacd atch a e 43 5 1 3 Por Security lc ai 44 5 1 4 A s3 cc02 coc antes ae Ghee Gini cero deena e dives Dn de ae 46 5 1 5 Loopback Detection a Ma ad oe ee se ee 46 e UNO od 48 A A A O 49 IL O e o el 50 52 9 LACAN is IO 51 53 Traffic Monica a ela 53 5 3 1 Trafic SUMMA Yate ii Maen 53 532 Tralfic OtatiStiCS starter 54 54 NA a a a aa a 55 5 4 1 Address Table cita ads 56 DAZ Staic Address mida taa 57 5 4 3 Dynamic Address eeeeeeee kee nn nnn nn nn nnn nnn nnn Eni EEEE iii iii iii EEEE Ennen 58 5 4 4 Filtering Addres S iii daa 60 Chapter 67 VEAN nuncio ca AA ek Ae a e 62 A A 63 eA VLAN COMO ca a a id 64 6 1 2 AS coeseueta cease tat seredecannnehacndhaedeusvoladuneatiidiatonadasastdeia tenders 66 6 2 MAC EIN ate O as eral cial ot 68 62i MACVLAN ar tantas 69 6 2 2 Port Enable naaa ada 70 6 3 Protocol VLAN sisien tien eaten eileen aed Hint dc e aeons 70 6 3 1 Protocol VEAN toscas 71 6 3 2 Protocol Template eee 72 6 3 3 Port Enable eaan iia 73 6 4 Application Example for 802 1Q VLAN ooconocococcccccccconnnononcnnnnnocnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnannnnnnncininno 73 6
271. no authority You can configure the access control policy on System gt Access Security Access Control page If selected the switch will send an IP MAC Binding trap when it receives a packet from the host that does not match the rules in IP MAC binding table You can configure the IP MAC Binding policy on Network Security IP MAC Binding page If selected the switch will send an IP Duplicate trap when another host uses the switch s IP address If selected the switch will send a DHCP Filter trap when it receives a DHCP packet from an untrusted port Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Select your desired port for configuration It is multi optional Displays the port number Enable Disable Link Status traps for the desired port To enable the Link Status traps for the desired port please select the Link Status on the SNMP Traps first otherwise it will not take effect 232 13 3 RMON RMON Remote Monitoring basing on SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol architecture functions to monitor the network RMON is currently a commonly used network management standard defined by Internet Engineering Task Force IETF which is mainly used to monitor the data traffic across a network segment or even the entire network so as to enable the network administrator to take the protection measures in time to avoid any network malfunction In addition RMON MIB reco
272. nstance gt Instance Port Config to load the following page 104 Port Config Instance ID 1 a Port Select Port Priority Path Cost Port Role Port Status LAG O 10 O 1 128 Auto e O 2 128 Auto O 3 128 Auto O 4 128 Auto O 5 128 Auto O 6 128 Auto O 7 128 Auto O 8 128 Auto LI O 9 128 Auto O 10 128 Auto O 11 128 Auto O 12 128 Auto O 13 128 Auto O 14 128 Auto O 15 128 Auto ly Note Ifthe Path Cost of a port is setto 0 it will alter automatically according to the port s link speed Figure 7 9 Instance Port Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Port Config Instance ID Select the desired instance ID for its port configuration Port Select Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Select Select the desired port to specify its priority and path cost It is multi optional Port Displays the port number of the switch Priority Enter the priority of the port in the instance It is an important criterion on determining if the port connected to this port will be chosen as the root port Path Cost Path Cost is used to choose the path and calculate the path costs of ports in an MST region It is an important criterion on determining the root port The lower value has the higher priority Port Role Displays the role of the port played in the MSTP Instance Port Status Displays the working status o
273. ntication whereas those failing to pass the authentication are denied when accessing the LAN gt Architecture of 802 1X Authentication 802 1X adopts a client server architecture with three entities a supplicant system an authenticator system and an authentication server system as shown in the following figure Supplicant System LAN WLAN Authenticator System Authentication Server System Figure 12 19 Architecture of 802 1X authentication 1 Supplicant System The supplicant system is an entity in LAN and is authenticated by the authenticator system The supplicant system is usually a common user terminal computer An 802 1X authentication is initiated when a user launches client program on the supplicant system Note that the client program must support the 802 1X authentication protocol 2 Authenticator System The authenticator system is usually an 802 1X supported network device such as this TP LINK switch It provides the physical or logical port for the supplicant system to access the LAN and authenticates the supplicant system 3 Authentication Server System The authentication server system is an entity that provides authentication service to the authenticator system Normally in the form of a RADIUS server Authentication Server can store user information and serve to perform authentication and authorization To ensure a stable authentication system an alternate authentication server can be specified If the main auth
274. o specify the maximum amount of DHCP messages that can be forwarded by the switch per second The excessive massages will be discarded Decline Threshold Select the value to specify the minimum transmission rate of the Decline packets to trigger the Decline protection for the specific port 197 Decline Flow Control Option 82 Config Option 82 Support Existed Option 82 field Circuit ID Remote ID Port Config Port Select Select Port Trusted Port MAC Verify Flow Control Decline Protect LAG 12 2 ARP Inspection Select the value to specify the Decline Flow Control The traffic flow of the corresponding port will be limited to be this value if the transmission rate of the Decline packets exceeds the Decline Threshold Enable Disable the Option 82 feature Select the operation for the Option 82 field of the DHCP request packets from the Host Keep Indicates to keep the Option 82 field of the packets Replace Indicates to replace the Option 82 field of the packets with the switch defined one Drop Indicates to discard the packets including the Option 82 field Enter the sub option Circuit ID for the customized Option 82 Enter the sub option Remote ID for the customized Option 82 Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Select your desired port for configuration It is multi optional Displays the port number En
275. of the Host on Network layer MAC address the address of the Host on Data link layer is necessary for the packet to reach the very device So the destination IP address carried in a packet need to be translated into the corresponding MAC address ARP functions to translate the IP address into the corresponding MAC address and maintain an ARP Table where the latest used IP address to MAC address mapping entries are stored When the Host communicates with a strange Host ARP works as the following figure shown IP 192 168 0 102 IP 192 168 0 103 MAC 00 01 21 AF OF 4E MAC 00 0F 12 0E ED 2D rst stB Hoes ARP Request Broadcast Hos Source IP address Source MAC address Destination IP address Destination MAC address 192 168 0 102 00 01 21 AF OF 4E 192 168 0 103 FF FF FF FF FF FF Source IP address Source MAC address Destination IP address Destination MAC address 192 168 0 103 00 OF 12 0E ED 2D 192 168 0 102 00 01 21 AF OF 4E ARP Response Unicast Figure 12 3 ARP Implementation Procedure 1 Suppose there are two hosts in the LAN Host A and Host B To send a packet to Host B Host A checks its own ARP Table first to see if the ARP entry related to the IP address of Host B exists If yes Host A will directly send the packets to Host B If the corresponding MAC address is not found in the ARP Table Host A will broadcast ARP request packet which contains the IP address of Host B the IP address of Host A and the MAC add
276. old information the switch will just update the aging time if the switch does not receive NDP information within the aging time the switch will remove the corresponding information from the table automatically The NDP function can be implemented on Neighbor Info NDP Summary and NDP Config pages 15 1 1 Neighbor Info On this page you can view the NDP neighbor information of the switch Choose the menu Cluster NDP Neighbor Info to load the following page Neighbor Search Search Option Ally Neighbor Info Native Port Remote Port Device Name Device MAC Firmware Version Aging Time sec Figure 15 2 Neighbor Information 248 The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Neighbor Search Option gt Neighbor Info Native Port Remote Port Device Name Device MAC Firmware Version Aging Time Select the information the desired entry should contain and then click the Search button to display the desired entry in the following Neighbor Information table Displays the port number of the switch Displays the port number of the neighbor switch which is connected to the corresponding port Displays the name of the neighbor switch Displays MAC address of the neighbor switch Displays the firmware version of the neighbor switch Displays the period for the switch s to keep the NDP packets from the neighbor switch 15 1 2 NDP Summary On this page you can view the NDP configuration of the s
277. onfig Port Config MSTP Instance and STP Security 7 1 STP Config The STP Config function for global configuration of spanning trees on the switch can be implemented on STP Config and STP Summary pages 7 1 1 STP Config Before configuring spanning trees you should make clear the roles each switch plays in each spanning tree instance Only one switch can be the root bridge in each spanning tree instance On this page you can globally configure the spanning tree function and related parameters Choose the menu Spanning Tree STP Config STP Config to load the following page 98 Global Config STP Version Parameters Config CIST Priority Hello Time Max Age Forward Delay TxHoldCount Max Hops Enable Disable jst W 32768 0 61440 2 sec 1 10 20 sec 6 40 E 15 sec 4 30 z Help 5 pps 1 20 20 hop 1 40 Figure 7 4 STP Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config STP Version Parameters Config CIST Priority Hello Time Max Age Forward Delay TxHoldCount Max Hops Enable Disable STP function globally on the switch Select the desired STP version on the switch e STP Spanning Tree Protocol e RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol e MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Enter a value from 0 to 61440 to specify the priority of the switch for comparison in the CIST CIST priority is an important cri
278. onfig page configure VLAN to Instance mapping table Map VLAN 101 103 and 105 to Instance 1 map VLAN 102 104 and 106 to Instance 2 111 e The configuration procedure for switch E and F is the same with that for switch D gt The topology diagram of the two instances after the topology is stable e For Instance 1 VLAN 101 103 and 105 the red paths in the following figure are connected links the gray paths are the blocked links Switch A al Switch C Switch D Switch E Switch F e For Instance 2 VLAN 102 104 and 106 the blue paths in the following figure are connected links the gray paths are the blocked links Switch A Switch B Switch D Switch E Switch F gt Suggestion for Configuration Enable TC Protect function for all the ports of switches e Enable Root Protect function for all the ports of root bridges e Enable Loop Protect function for the non edge ports Enable BPDU Protect function or BPDU Filter function for the edge ports which are connected to the PC and server Return to CONTENTS 112 Chapter 8 Ethernet OAM gt OAM Overview Ethernet OAM Operation Administration and Maintenance is a Layer 2 protocol for monitoring and troubleshooting Ethernet networks It can report the network status to network administrators through the OAMPDUs exchanged between two OAM entities facilitating network management Ethernet OAM is a slow protocol with very limited
279. oping filtering optimize voice and video application Link aggregation LACP increases aggregated bandwidth optimizing the transport of business critical data SNMP RMON WEB CLI Telnet Log in bring abundant management policies TL SL5428E switch integrates multiple functions with excellent performance and is friendly to manage which can fully meet the need of the users demanding higher networking performance 2 2 Main Features e Resiliency and Availability Link aggregation LACP increases aggregated bandwidth optimizing the transport of business critical data IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree provides high link availability in multiple VLAN environments Multicast snooping automatically prevents flooding of IP multicast traffic Root Guard protects root bridge from malicious attack or configuration mistakes e Layer 2 Switching GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol allows automatic learning and dynamic assignment of VLANs Supports up to 4K VLANs simultaneously out of 4K VLAN IDs e Quality of Service Supports L2 L3 granular CoS with 4 priority queues per port Rate limiting confines the traffic flow accurately according to the preset value e Security Supports multiple industry standard user authentication methods such as 802 1x RADIUS IP Source Guard prevents IP spoofing attacks Dynamic ARP Inspection blocks ARP packets from unauthorized hosts preventing man in the middle attacks L2 L3 L4 Ac
280. or transmitted on the port The error frames are not counted in Alignment Errors Displays the number of the received packets that have a bad Frame Check Sequence FCS with a non integral octet Alignment Error and have a bad FCS with an integral octet CRC Error The length of the packet is between 64 bytes and 1518 bytes UndersizePkts Displays the number of the received packets excluding error packets that are less than 64 bytes long Pkts64Octets Displays the number of the received packets including error packets that are 64 bytes long Pkts65to127Octets Displays the number of the received packets including error packets that are between 65 and 127 bytes long Pkts128to255Octets Displays the number of the received packets including error packets that are between 128 and 255 bytes long Pkts256to511Octets Displays the number of the received packets including error packets that are between 256 and 511 bytes long Pkts512to10230Octets Displays the number of the received packets including error packets that are between 512 and 1023 bytes long PktsOver10230Octets Displays the number of the received packets including error packets that are more than 1023 bytes long Collisions Displays the number of collisions experienced by a port during packet transmissions 5 4 MAC Address The main function of the switch is forwarding the packets to the correct ports based on the destination MAC address of the packets
281. or MAC i e Layer 2 information Boot Protocol BOOTP BOOTP is used to provide bootup information for network devices including IP address information the address of the TFTP server that contains the devices system files and the name of the boot file Class of Service CoS CoS is supported by prioritizing packets based on the required level of service and then placing them in the appropriate output queue Data is transmitted from the queues using weighted round robin service to enforce priority service and prevent blockage of lower level queues Priority may be set according to the port default the packet s priority bit in the VLAN tag TCP UDP port number or DSCP priority bit Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP DSCP uses a six bit tag to provide for up to 64 different forwarding behaviors Based on network policies different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding The DSCP bits are mapped to the Class of Service categories and then into the output queues Domain Name Service DNS A system used for translating host names for network nodes into IP addresses Dynamic Host Control Protocol DHCP Provides a framework for passing configuration information to hosts on a TCP IP network DHCP is based on the Bootstrap Protocol BOOTP adding the capability of automatic allocation of reusable network addresses and additional configuration options Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN EAPOL
282. ort cannot detect a unidirectional link if itis connected to a DLDP incapable port of another switch 2 Make sure that both sides ofthe link have the same configuration Figure 8 12 DLDP Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config DLDP State Adver Interval Enable Disable the DLDP function globally Config the interval to send advertisement packets ranging from 1 to 30 seconds The default value is 5 seconds 127 Shut Mode Web Refresh State Web Refresh Interval Port Config Port Select Select Port DLDP State Protocol State Link State Neighbor State Configuration Procedure Once detecting a unidirectional link the port can be shut down in one of the following two modes Auto In this mode DLDP generates logs and traps and shuts down the corresponding port on detecting unidirectional links and the DLDP link state transits to Disable Manual In this mode DLDP only generates logs and traps if it detects unidirectional links and the operation to shut down the unidirectional link ports is accomplished by the administrator Enable Disable the web automatic refresh function Configure the interval to refresh the web page ranging from 1 to 100 seconds and the default value is 5 seconds Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Select the desired port for configuration It is m
283. ou need to add the Promiscuous port to any one of these Private VLANs Configuration Procedure Step Operation Description 1 Create Private VLAN Required On the VLAN gt Private VLAN PVLAN Config page Enter the Primary VLAN and Secondary VLAN and then click the Create button 2 Add ports to Private VLAN Required On the VLAN gt Private VLAN gt Port Config page select the desired ports and configure the port types and click the Add button 3 Modify VLAN Optional On the VLAN gt Private VLAN gt PVLAN Config page select the desired Private VLAN and do the modification then click the Apply button to modify the information of the corresponding VLAN 87 Step Operation Description 4 Delete VLAN Optional On the VLAN gt Private VLAN gt PVLAN Config page select the desired entry to delete the corresponding VLAN by clicking the Delete button 6 9 GVRP GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is an implementation of GARP generic attribute registration protocol GVRP allows the switch to automatically add or remove the VLANs via the dynamic VLAN registration information and propagate the local VLAN registration information to other switches without having to individually configure each VLAN gt GARP GARP provides the mechanism to assist the switch members in LAN to deliver propagate and register the information among the members GARP itself does not work as the entity amo
284. oups SP group and WRR group Queues in SP group and WRR group are scheduled strictly based on strict priority mode while the queues inside WRR group follow the WRR mode In SP WRR mode TC3 is in the SP group TCO TC1 and TC2 belong to the WRR group and the weight value ratio of TCO TC1 and TC2 is 1 2 4 In this way when scheduling queues the switch allows TC3 to occupy the whole bandwidth following the SP mode and the TCO TC1 and TC2 in the WRR group will take up the bandwidth according to their ratio 1 2 4 Equal Mode In this mode all the queues occupy the bandwidth equally The weight value ratio of all the queues is 1 1 1 1 10 2 Bandwidth Control Bandwidth function allowing you to control the traffic rate and broadcast flow on each port to ensure network in working order can be implemented on Rate Limit and Storm Control pages 10 2 1 Rate Limit Rate limit functions to control the ingress egress traffic rate on each port via configuring the available bandwidth of each port In this way the network bandwidth can be reasonably distributed and utilized Choose the menu QoS gt Bandwidth Control gt Rate Limit to load the following page Rate Limit Config Select OOOOOOO0O000000 Note Port 0 O Ml Se Ww hn PA EN E nu o 29 Port Ingress Rate Kbps Egress Rate kbps LAG E E 1 For one port you cannot enable the Storm Control and the Ingress rate control at the same time 2 Ifyou s
285. own NA 27 Enable Disable Link Down Unidirectional 28 Enable Disable Link Down Unidirectional v Apply Note 1 ADLDP capable port cannot detect a unidirectional link if itis connected to a DLDP incapable port of another switch 2 Make sure that both sides ofthe link have the same configuration After these four ports are correctly connected select ports 1 0 27 and 1 0 28 in the Port Config table and click the Reset button to restore their state from Disable Return to CONTENTS 130 Chapter 9 Multicast gt Multicast Overview In the network packets are sent in three modes unicast broadcast and multicast In unicast the source server sends separate copy information to each receiver When a large number of users require this information the server must send many pieces of information with the same content to the users Therefore large bandwidth will be occupied In broadcast the system transmits information to all users in a network Any user in the network can receive the information no matter the information is needed or not Point to multipoint multimedia business such as video conferences and VoD video on demand plays an important part in the information transmission field Suppose a point to multi point service is required unicast is suitable for networks with sparsely users whereas broadcast is suitable for networks with densely distributed users When the number of users requiring this information is not certai
286. p itis not recommended to enable ARP Defend for LAG member Figure 12 14 ARP Defend The following entries are displayed on this screen gt ARP Defend Port Select Select Port Defend Speed Current Speed Status LAG Operation note It s not recommended to enable the ARP Defend feature for the LAG member port 12 2 3 ARP Statistics ARP Statistics feature displays the number of the illegal ARP packets received on each port which facilitates you to locate the network malfunction and take the related protection measures Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Select your desired port for configuration It is multi optional Displays the port number Enable Disable the ARP Defend feature for the port Enter a value to specify the maximum amount of the received ARP packets per second Displays the current speed of the received ARP packets Displays the status of the ARP attack Displays the LAG to which the port belongs to Click the Recover button to restore the port to the normal status The ARP Defend for this port will be re enabled Choose the menu Network Security ARP Inspection ARP Statistics to load the following page 204 Auto Refresh Auto Refresh Enable Disable Refresh Interval l5 sec 3 300 Illegal ARP Packet Port Trusted Port Illegal ARP Packet Port Trusted Port lllegal ARP Packet 1 No 2 No
287. packets according to specified scheduling algorithms to implement QoS function This switch implements three priority modes based on port on 802 1P and on DSCP and supports four queue scheduling algorithms The port priorities are labeled as CoSO CoS1 CoS7 The DiffServ function can be implemented on Port Priority DSCP Priority 802 1P CoS Mapping and Schedule Mode pages 10 1 1 Port Priority On this page you can configure the port priority Choose the menu QoS DiffServ Port Priority to load the following page Port Priority Config Select TD o gt Priority LAG Cos 0 v cos 0 cos 0 cos 0 cos 0 cos 0 Cos0 cos 0 cos 0 cos 0 cos 0 cos 0 cos 0 ly OOOOOOOO000000 note Port priority is one property of the port When the port priority is specified the data will be classified into the egress queue based on the CoS value of the ingress port and the mapping relation between the CoS and TC in 802 1P CoS mapping Figure 10 6 Port Priority Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Port Priority Config Select Select the desired port to configure its priority It is multi optional Port Displays the physical port number of the switch Priority Specify the priority for the port LAG Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to Anote To complete QoS function configuration you have to go to the Schedule Mode page to select a schedule mode after the conf
288. page you can view the information of the bound entries Choose the menu Network Security IP MAC Binding Binding Table to load the following page Search Option Source All Y Binding Table HostName w Select Select Host Name IP Address MAC Address VLAN ID Port Protect Type Source Collision v Apply Delete r Help Entry Count 0 Note 1 Among the entries with critical collision level the one having the highest Source priority will take effect 2 Among the entries with the same Source priority only the last added or edited one will take effect Figure 12 1 Binding Table 189 The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Search Option Source Select a Source from the pull down list and click the Search button to view your desired entry in the Binding Table e All All the bound entries will be displayed e Manual Only the manually added entries will be displayed e Scanning Only the entries formed via ARP Scanning will be displayed e Snooping Only the entries formed via DHCP Snooping will be displayed gt Binding Table Host Name IP Address Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding entry IMAC Address Select based on the Host Name IP Address MAC Address you entered Select Select the desired entry to modify the Host Name MAC Address VLAN ID Port Protect Type It is multi optional Host Name Allows you to view and modify the Host Name IP Add
289. pecified network source Enable Disable the Quiet timer Specify a value for Quiet Period Once the supplicant failed to the 802 1X Authentication then the switch will not respond to the authentication request from the same supplicant during the Quiet Period 214 Retry Times Specify the maximum transfer times of the repeated authentication request Supplicant Timeout Specify the maximum time for the switch to wait for the response from supplicant before resending a request to the supplicant Server Timeout Specify the maximum time for the switch to wait for the response from authentication server before resending a request to the authentication server 12 5 2 Port Config On this page you can configure the 802 1X features for the ports basing on the actual network Choose the menu Network Security gt 802 1X Port Config to load the following page Port Config Port Select Port Status Guest VLAN Control Mode Control Type Authorized LAG O Disable v Disable v Auto v MAC Based v E 1 Disable Disable Auto MAC Based Yes A Fl 2 Disable Disable Auto MAC Based Yes O 3 Disable Disable Auto MAC Based Yes a 4 Disable Disable Auto MAC Based Yes O 5 Disable Disable Auto MAC Based Yes O 6 Disable Disable Auto MAC Based Yes O 7 Disable Disable Auto MAC Based Yes O 8 Disable Disable Auto MAC Based Yes O 9 Disable Disable Auto MAC Based Yes O 10 Disable Disable Auto MAC Based Yes O 11 Disable Disable Auto MAC Bas
290. peration Description 1 Enable DLDP globally Required On the Ethernet OAM gt DLDP gt DLDP page configure DLDP State as enable under the Global Config tab in device A and B 2 Enable DLDP on the Required On the Ethernet OAM gt DLDP gt DLDP page specified ports configure DLDP State as enable on Gigabit Ethernet ports 1 0 27 and 1 0 28 in the Port Config table in device A and device B 3 Configure Shut Mode Required On the Ethernet OAM gt DLDP DLDP page configure the Shut Mode as auto under the Global Config tab in device A and B 4 Check the ports state Required On the Ethernet OAM gt DLDP gt DLDP page select ports 1 0 27 and 1 0 28 in the Port Config table and click the Reset button to bring them up The DLDP information of Gigabit Ethernet ports 1 0 27 and 1 0 28 is shown below 129 Global Config DLDP State O Enable Disable Adver Interval 5 seconds 1 30 Shut Mode Auto v Web Refresh State Enable Disable Web Refresh Interval B seconds 1 100 Port Config Port Select Select Pon DLDP State Protocol State Link State Neighbor State O v O 19 Disable Initial Link Down NIA a dl 20 Disable Initial Link Down NA O 21 Disable Initial Link Down NA o 22 Disable Initial Link Down NA O 23 Disable Initial Link Down NIA O 24 Disable Initial Link Down NA El 25 Disable Inactive Link Down N A O 26 Disable Inactive Link D
291. port number you entered Select Select the desired port for configuration It is multi optional Mode Select the OAM mode for the desired port State Select Enable Disable the Ethernet OAM function for the desired port Anote You can not establish an OAM connection between two OAM entities that work in the passive mode 8 1 2 Discovery Info Choose the menu Ethernet OAM gt Basic Config Discovery Info to load the following page 117 Discovery Info Local Client OAM Mode Max OAMPDU Remote Loopback Unidirection Link Monitoring Variable Request PDU Revision Operation Status Loopback Status Remote Client Mode Mac Address Vendor OUI Max OAMPDU Remote Loopback Unidirection Link Monitoring Variable Request PDU Revision Vendor Information Port f z Disabled Active 1518 Bytes Supported Not Supported Supported Not Supported 0 Disable No Loopback Figure 8 5 Discovery Info The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Local Client The local client part shows the information of the local OAM entity OAM Mode Max OAMPDU Remote Loopback Unidirection Link Monitoring Displays whether the OAM function is enabled or disabled on the selected port Displays the OAM mode of the selected port Displays the maximum size of the OAMPDU Displays whether the local client supports remote loopback function Displays whether the local client supports unidirection
292. ports as non edge ports and regenerates spanning trees which may cause network topology jitter Normally these ports do not receive BPDUs but if a user maliciously attack the switch by sending BPDUs network topology jitter occurs To prevent this attack MSTP provides BPDU protect function With this function enabled on the switch the switch shuts down the edge ports that receive BPDUs and reports these cases to the administrator If a port is shut down only the administrator can restore it gt BPDU Filter BPDU filter function is to prevent BPDUs flood in the STP network If a switch receives malicious BPDUs it forwards these BPDUs to the other switched in the network which may result in spanning trees being continuously regenerated In this case the switch occupying too much CPU or the protocol status of BPDUs is wrong With BPDU filter function enabled a port does not receive or forward BPDUs but it sends out its own BPDUs Such a mechanism prevents the switch from being attacked by BPDUs so as to guarantee generation the spanning trees correct Choose the menu Spanning Tree STP Security Port Protect to load the following page 107 Port Protect Port Select Port LoopProtect RootProtect TC Protect BPDU Protect BPDU Filter LAG O Disable Disable y Disable v Disable x Disable v O 1 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable g 2 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Fj 3 Disable Di
293. pplicant system is authorized 7 The switch changes the state of the corresponding port to accepted state to allow the supplicant system access the network And then the switch will monitor the status of supplicant by sending hand shake packets periodically By default the switch will force the supplicant to log off if it can not get the response from the supplicant for two times 8 The supplicant system can also terminate the authenticated state by sending EAPOL Logoff packets to the switch The switch then changes the port state from accepted to rejected 2 EAP Terminating Mode In this mode packet transmission is terminated at authenticator systems and the EAP packets are mapped into RADIUS packets Authentication and accounting are accomplished through RADIUS protocol In this mode PAP or CHAP is employed between the switch and the RADIUS server This switch supports the PAP terminating mode The authentication procedure of PAP is illustrated in the following figure RADIUS Authentication Server Supplicant System EAPOL Start EAP Request Identity EAP Response ldentity EAP Request EAP Response RADIUS Access Request RADIUS Access Accept EAP Success Figure 12 21 PAP Authentication Procedure In PAP mode the switch encrypts the password and sends the user name the randomly generated key and the supplicant system encrypted password to the RADIUS server for further authentication Whe
294. problems 193 gt DHCP Working Principle DHCP works via the Client Server communication mode The Client applies to the Server for configuration The Server assigns the configuration information such as the IP address to the Client so as to reach a dynamic employ of the network source A Server can assign the IP address for several Clients which is illustrated in the following figure DHCP Server Y Access Layer Switch Central Switch y DHCP Client 1 DHCP Client 2 DHCP Client 3 DHCP Client 4 a Figure 12 5 Network diagram for DHCP snooping implementation For different DHCP Clients DHCP Server provides three IP address assigning methods 1 Manually assign the IP address Allows the administrator to bind the static IP address to the specific Client e g WWW Server via the DHCP Server 2 Automatically assign the IP address DHCP Server assigns the IP address without an expiration time limitation to the Clients 3 Dynamically assign the IP address DHCP Server assigns the IP address with an expiration time When the time for the IP address expired the Client should apply for a new one The most Clients obtain the IP addresses dynamically which is illustrated in the following figure DHCP Client DHCP Server 1 DHCP DISCOVER 2 DHCP OFFER 3 DHCP REQUEST 4 DHCP ACK Figure 12 6 Interaction between a DHCP client and a DHCP server 1 DHCP DISCOVER Stag
295. r 7 Spanning Tree STP Spanning Tree Protocol subject to IEEE 802 1D standard is to disbranch a ring network in the Data Link layer in a local network Devices running STP discover loops in the network and block ports by exchanging information in that way a ring network can be disbranched to form a tree topological ring free network to prevent packets from being duplicated and forwarded endlessly in the network BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Unit is the protocol data that STP and RSTP use Enough information is carried in BPDU to ensure the spanning tree generation STP is to determine the topology of the network via transferring BPDUs between devices To implement spanning tree function the switches in the network transfer BPDUs between each other to exchange information and all the switches supporting STP receive and process the received BPDUs BPDUs carry the information that is needed for switches to figure out the spanning tree gt STP Elements Bridge ID Bridge Identifier Indicates the value of the priority and MAC address of the bridge Bridge ID can be configured and the switch with the lower bridge ID has the higher priority Root Bridge Indicates the switch has the lowest bridge ID Configure the best PC in the ring network as the root bridge to ensure best network performance and reliability Designated Bridge Indicates the switch has the lowest path cost from the switch to the root bridge in each network segment BPDUs a
296. r the port the NTDP function on the switch and then configure NTDP parameters 3 Establish a cluster and Optional On Cluster Cluster Cluster Config page configure the related establish a cluster and configure the related parameters parameters 4 Manage the device in the Optional On Cluster gt Cluster gt Member Config page cluster select the desired member switches and click the Manage button to log on to its Web management page for configuration Or On Cluster Cluster Cluster Topology page double click the icon of the switch to view its detailed information click the icon and then click the Manage button to log on to its Web management page for configuration gt Ifthe switch is a member switch in the cluster please take the following steps Step Operation Description 1 Enable the NDP function Optional On Cluster NDP NDP Config page enable the globally and for the port NDP function on the switch and then configure NDP parameters 2 Enable the NTDP function Optional On Cluster gt NTDP gt NTDP Config page enable globally and for the port the NTDP function on the switch and then configure NTDP parameters 3 Manually collect NTDP Optional On Cluster NTDP Device Table page click the information Collect Topology button to manually collect NTDP information Or On Cluster Cluster Cluster Topology page click the Collect Topology button to manually col
297. rading system resetting config restoring and config saving 231 VLAN Create Delete IP Change Storm Control Bandwidth Control LLDP MAC Address Table Loopback Detection Spanning Tree Port Access IP MAC Binding IP Duplicate DHCP Filter gt Port Traps Port Select Select Port Link Status Anote If selected the switch will send a VLAN Create Delete trap when a VLAN is being created or deleted If selected the switch will send an IP Change trap when the IP address of the switch is changed If selected the switch will send a Storm Control trap when the broadcast multicast or UL rate exceeds the limit You can configure the limit on QoS Bandwidth Control Storm Control page If selected the switch will send a Bandwidth Control trap when the traffic rate of a port exceeds the limit You can configure the limit on QoS gt Bandwidth Control Rate limit page If selected the switch will send an LLDP trap when the status of LLDP changes If selected the switch will send a MAC Address Table trap when the MAC address table has any changes If selected the switch will send a Loopback Detection trap when the status of loopback detection changes If selected the switch will send a Spanning Tree trap when the status of STP on the port changes If selected the switch will send a Port Access trap when some users try to log on to the web management page via ports that have
298. rated key 1024 3 On the Web management page of the switch download the public key file saved in the computer to the switch Key Download Choose the SSH public key file to download into switch Key Type SSH 2 RSAIDSA v Ance 1 The key type should accord with the type of the key file 2 The SSH key downloading can not be interrupted 4 After the public key is downloaded please log on to the interface of PUTTY and enter the IP address for login 39 X Pul TY Configuration Category 5 Session Logging B Terminal Keyboard Bell Features Window Appearance Behaviour Translation Selection Colours Connection Data Proxy Telnet Rlogin SSH Kex Auth TY x11 Basic options for your PuTTY session 5 Click Browse to download the private key file to SSH client software and click Open X PuTTY Configuration Category Terminal Keyboard Specify the destination you want to connect to Host Name or IP address Port 192 168 0 1 22 Connection type ORaw O Iene O Rlogin SSH Serial Load save or delete a stored session Saved Sessions Default Settings Delete Close window on exit O Always ONever Only on clean exit Options controlling SSH authentication Bell Features Window Appearance Behaviour Translation Selection Colours Connection Data Proxy Telnet Rlogin 5 SSH Kex TTY x11 T
299. ration 46 Choose the menu Switching Port LoopbackDetection to load the following page Global Config Loopback Detection Status Detection Interval Enable Disable 30 seconds 1 1000 a Recovery 3 detection times 1 100 Web Refresh Status O Enable Disable Web Refresh Interval 3 seconds 3 100 Port Config Port Select Port Status Operation mode Recovery mode Loop status Block status LAG O Disable vw Alert v Auto a 1 Disable Alert Auto A oO 2 Disable Alert Auto oO 3 Disable Alert Auto O 4 Disable Alert Auto oO 5 Disable Alert Auto O 6 Disable Alert Auto dl 7 Disable Alert Auto O 8 Disable Alert Auto 3 dl g Disable Alert Auto O 10 Disable Alert Auto O 11 Disable Alert Auto O 12 Disable Alert Auto F 13 Disable Alert Auto F 14 Disable Alert Auto E 15 Disable Alert Auto lt Apply Manual Recover Help Figure 5 5 Loopback Detection Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config LoopbackDetection Status Detection Interval Automatic Recovery Time Web Refresh Status Web Refresh Interval Port Config Port Select Select Port Status Here you can enable or disable Loopback Detection function globally Set a Loopback Detection interval between 1 and 1000 seconds By default it s 30 seconds Time after which the blocked port would automatically recover to normal status It
300. rcuit ID option e UDF The user specified string with the maximum length of 32 characters will be used to encode the Circuit ID option UDF Value If the UDF is selected specify a string with the maximum length of 32 characters to encode the Circuit id option Return to CONTENTS 219 Chapter 13 SNMP gt SNMP Overview SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol has gained the most extensive application on the UDP IP networks SNMP provides a management frame to monitor and maintain the network devices It is used for automatically managing the various network devices no matter the physical differences of the devices Currently the most network management systems are based on SNMP SNMP is simply designed and convenient for use with no need of complex fulfillment procedures and too much network resources With SNMP function enabled network administrators can easily monitor the network performance detect the malfunctions and configure the network devices In the meantime they can locate faults promptly and implement the fault diagnosis capacity planning and report generating gt SNMP Management Frame SNMP management frame includes three network elements SNMP Management Station SNMP Agent and MIB Management Information Base SNMP Management Station SNMP Management Station is the workstation for running the SNMP client program providing a friendly management interface for the administrator to manage the most network devices
301. rd has successfully installed TpSupplicant Click Finish to exit the wizard If you have not installed WinPcap 4 0 2 or the higher version please go to http www winpcap org to download the latest version of WinPcap for installation On the Windows taskbar click the Start button point to All Programs gt TP LINK Figure C 7 InstallShield Wizard Complete Note Please pay attention to the tips on the above screen If you have not installed WinPcap 4 0 2 or the higher version on your computer the 802 1X Client Software TpSupplicant can not work It s recommended to go to http www winpcap org to download the latest version of WinPcap for installation 1 2 Uninstall Software If you want to remove the TpSupplicant please take the following steps gt TpSupplicant and then click Uninstall TP LINK 802 1X shown as the following figure Administr a H 2D Internet e Internet Explorer as E mail R 3 Outlook Express jes Command Prompt gt Windows Media Play E Smart Window HA 33 Windows Messenger Tour Windows xP yi DLS1100 exe a i a All Programs 2 AUUUH LIVELYULE PESE u u UltraISO Snaglt T 7 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite 12 Soli dConvertPDF Adobe Help Center Foxmail Microsoft Word MSN Microsoft Project CorelDRAW 9 Symantec Client Security DAEMON Tools Lite Network Print Server Macrobject Adobe ImageReady CS2 Adobe Photoshop CS2 Windows Movie Maker
302. rds network statistics information of network performance and malfunction periodically based on which the management station can monitor network at any time effectively RMON is helpful for network administrator to manage the large scale network since it reduces the communication traffic between management station and managed agent gt RMON Group This switch supports the following four RMON Groups defined on the RMON standard RFC1757 History Group Event Group Statistic Group and Alarm Group RMON Group Function History Group After a history group is configured the switch collects and records network statistics information periodically based on which the management station can monitor network effectively Event Group Event Group is used to define RMON events Alarms occur when an event is detected Statistic Group Statistic Group is set to monitor the statistic of alarm variables on the specific ports Alarm Group Alarm Group is configured to monitor the specific alarm variables When the value of a monitored variable exceeds the threshold an alarm event is generated which triggers the switch to act in the set way The RMON Groups can be configured on the History Control Event Config and Alarm Config pages 13 3 1 History Control On this page you can configure the History Group for RMON Choose the menu SNMP gt RMON gt History Control to load the following page 233 History Control Tab
303. re forwarded to the network segment through the designated bridge The switch with the lowest bridge ID will be chosen as the designated bridge Root Path Cost Indicates the sum of the path cost of the root port and the path cost of all the switches that packets pass through The root path cost of the root bridge is 0 Bridge Priority The bridge priority can be set to a value in the range of 0 61440 The lower value priority has the higher priority The switch with the higher priority has more chance to be chosen as the root bridge Root Port Indicates the port that has the lowest path cost from this bridge to the Root Bridge and forwards packets to the root Designated Port Indicates the port that forwards packets to a downstream network segment or switch Port Priority The port priority can be set to a value in the range of 0 255 The lower value priority has the higher priority The port with the higher priority has more chance to be chosen as the root port Path Cost Indicates the parameter for choosing the link path by STP By calculating the path cost STP chooses the better links and blocks the redundant links so as to disbranch the ring network to form a tree topological ring free network The following network diagram shows the sketch map of spanning tree Switch A B and C are connected together in order After STP generation switch A is chosen as root bridge the path from port 2 to port 6 is blocked e Bridge Switch A is
304. re to backup the log file Note It will take a few minutes to backup the log file Please wait without any operation Figure 16 6 Backup Log The following entry is displayed on this screen gt Backup Log 268 Backup Log Click the Backup Log button to save the log as a file to your computer Mdnote It will take a few minutes to backup the log file Please wait without any operation 16 3 Device Diagnostics This switch provides Cable Test functions for device diagnostics Cable Test functions to test the connection status of the cable connected to the switch which facilitates you to locate and diagnose the trouble spot of the network Choose the menu Maintenance gt Device Diagnostics Cable Test to load the following page Cable Test Port E Unit meter Pair Status Length Error Pair A Pair B Pair C Pair D Note 1 The interval between two cable test for one port must be more than 3 seconds 2 The resultis more reasonable when the cable pair is in the open status 3 The result is just for your information 4 Ifthe portis 100M and its connection status is normal cable test cant get the length of the cable Figure 16 7 Cable Test The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Cable Test Port Select the port for cable testing Pair Displays the Pair number Status Displays the connection status of the cable connected to the port The test results of the cable include normal close op
305. reas the randomly generated key in EAP MD5 relay mode is generated by the authentication server and the switch is responsible to encapsulate the authentication packet and forward it to the RADIUS server gt 802 1X Timer In 802 1 x authentication the following timers are used to ensure that the supplicant system the switch and the RADIUS server interact in an orderly way 1 Supplicant system timer Supplicant Timeout This timer is triggered by the switch after the switch sends a request packet to a supplicant system The switch will resend the 212 request packet to the supplicant system if the supplicant system fails to respond in the specified timeout period 2 RADIUS server timer Server Timeout This timer is triggered by the switch after the switch sends an authentication request packet to RADIUS server The switch will resend the authentication request packet if the RADIUS server fails to respond in the specified timeout period 3 Quiet period timer Quiet Period This timer sets the quiet period When a supplicant system fails to pass the authentication the switch quiets for the specified period before it processes another authentication request re initiated by the supplicant system gt Guest VLAN Guest VLAN function enables the supplicants that do not pass the authentication to access the specific network resource By default all the ports connected to the supplicants belong to a VLAN i e Guest VLAN Users
306. receiving port will be processed if the receiving port is a new member port it will be added to the forward list of the multicast group with its member port aging time specified if the receiving port is already a member port its member port aging time will be directly reset 3 Member Leave The host will send MLD Done message when leaving a multicast group to inform the router of its leaving When Immediate Leave is not enabled in a VLAN and a Done message is received on a port of this VLAN the switch will generate MASQs on this port to check if there are other members in this 148 multicast group The user can control when a port membership is removed for an exiting address in terms of the number and interval of MASQs If there is no Report message received from this port during the switch maximum response time the port on which the MASQ was sent is deleted from the multicast group If the deleted port is the last member of the multicast group the multicast group is also deleted The switch will send Done message to the router ports of the VLAN In IPv6 Layer 2 switches can use Multicast Listener Discovery MLD Snooping to limit the flooding of multicast traffic by dynamically configuring Layer 2 interfaces so that IPv6 multicast data is selectively forwarded to a list of ports that want to receive the data This list is constructed by snooping IPv6 multicast control packets The MLD Snooping function can be implemented on Global Conf
307. ree together via VLAN to instance mapping table It binds several VLANs to an instance to save communication cost and network resources e MSTP divides a spanning tree network into several regions Each region has several internal spanning trees which are independent of each other e MSTP provides a load balancing mechanism for the packets transmission in the VLAN e MSTP is compatible with both STP and RSTP gt MSTP Elements MST Region Multiple Spanning Tree Region An MST Region comprises switches with the same region configuration and VLAN to Instances mapping relationship IST Internal Spanning Tree An IST is a spanning tree in an MST CST Common Spanning Tree ACST is the spanning tree in a switched network that connects all MST regions in the network CIST Common and Internal Spanning Tree A CIST comprising IST and CST is the spanning tree in a switched network that connects all switches in the network The following figure shows the network diagram in MSTP a b Figure 7 2 Basic MSTP diagram gt MSTP MSTP divides a network into several MST regions The CST is generated between these MST regions and multiple spanning trees can be generated in each MST region Each spanning trees is called an instance As well as STP MSTP uses BPDUs to generate spanning tree The only difference is that the BPDU for MSTP carries the MSTP configuration information on the switches 97 gt Port States In an MST
308. regation group the port with smaller port priority will be considered as the preferred one If the two port priorities are equal the port with smaller port number is preferred After an aggregation group is established the selected ports can be aggregated together as one port to transmit packets On this page you can configure the LACP feature of the switch Choose the menu Switching gt LAG gt LACP Config to load the following page 51 Global Config System Priority LACP Config Select Port 0 30M 2 Wh alallala Bewn o OOOOOOOOOOOOO0OTD am Note 32768 0 65535 Pot __ select Admin Key Port Priority 0 65535 Status LAG Disable v 1 32768 Disable e 1 32768 Disable 1 32768 Disable 1 32768 Disable 1 32768 Disable 1 32768 Disable 1 32768 Disable 1 32768 Disable LI 1 32768 Disable 1 32768 Disable 1 32768 Disable j 32768 Disable 1 32768 Disable 1 32768 Disable 1 32768 Disable 1 To avoid any broadcast storm when LACP takes effect you are suggested to enable Spanning Tree function 2 LACP function can t be enabled for the port already in a static link aggregation group Figure 5 9 LACP Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config System Priority LACP Config Port Select Select Port Admin Key Port Priority Specify the system priority for the switch The system priority and MAC address constitute the s
309. ress Displays the IP Address of the Host MAC Address Allows you to view and modify the MAC Address of the Host VLAN ID Allows you to view and modify the VLAN ID Port Allows you to view and modify the number of port connected to the Host Protect Type Allows you to view and modify the Protect Type of the entry Source Displays the Source of the entry Collision Displays the Collision status of the entry e Warning Indicates that the collision may be caused by the MSTP function e Critical Indicates that the entry has a collision with the other entries Anote 1 Among the entries with Critical collision level the one with the highest Source priority will take effect 2 Among the conflicting entries with the same Source priority only the last added or edited one will take effect 12 1 2 Manual Binding You can manually bind the IP address MAC address VLAN ID and the Port number together in the condition that you have got the related information of the Hosts in the LAN Choose the menu Network Security IP MAC Binding Manual Binding to load the following page 190 Manual Binding Option Host Name IP Address MAC Address VLAN ID Port 1 el Protect Type Manual Binding Table Select Host Name Entry Count 0 Note Disable A 20 characters maximum Format 192 168 0 1 Format 00 00 00 00 00 01 1 4094 IP Address MAC Address VLANID Port Protect Type Collision Can Dere
310. ress of Host A in the LAN 2 Since the ARP request packet is broadcasted all hosts in the LAN can receive it However only the Host B recognizes and responds to the request Host B sends back an ARP reply packet to Host A with its MAC address carried in the packet 3 Upon receiving the ARP reply packet Host A adds the IP address and the corresponding MAC address of Host B to its ARP Table for the further packets forwarding ARP Scanning function enables the switch to send the ARP request packets of the specified IP field to the Hosts in the LAN or VLAN Upon receiving the ARP reply packet the switch can get the IP address MAC address VLAN and the connected port number of the Host by analyzing the packet and bind them conveniently Choose the menu Network Security IP MAC Binding ARP Scanning to load the following page 192 Scanning Option Start IP Address End IP Address VLAN ID Scanning Result Select Host Name O Entry Count 0 Note 1 4094 IP Address MAC Address VLANID Port Protect Type Collision v Refresh Bind Delete Help 1 The VLAN ID option is intended for scaning the network topology with the VLAN spanning across multiple switches 2 VLAN ID affects the VLAN Tag in the ARP request packets used in the ARP Scanning and is independent of the VLAN configuration 3 If VLAN ID is blank the switch will broadcast untaged ARP request packets in the ARP Scanning Figur
311. riod measured by frames that is required to be exceeded e For Frame Seconds Error it is the number of error frame seconds in the period that is required to be exceeded Window Specify the detection period e For Frame Period Error the period is specified by a number of received frames e For other link events the period is specified by a time interval Notify Choose whether to notify the selected link event or not 8 3 RFI On this page you can choose whether to notify the link faults like dying gasp and critical event Choose the menu Ethernet OAM gt RFI gt 5Remote Failure Indication to load the following page Remote Failure Indication Config Port Select Port Dying Gasp Notify Critical Event Notify O Mm E O 1 Enable Enable A O 2 Enable Enable O 3 Enable Enable O 4 Enable Enable O 5 Enable Enable O 6 Enable Enable O 7 Enable Enable O 8 Enable Enable 3 Fi g Enable Enable F 10 Enable Enable O 11 Enable Enable O 12 Enable Enable O 13 Enable Enable O 14 Enable Enable O 15 Enable Enable v Figure 8 7 Remote Failure Indication The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Remote Failure Indication Config Port Select Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered 121 Select Select the desired port for configuration It is multi optional Dying Gasp Notify Choose whether to notify the dying gasp or not Critical Event Choose
312. rising counter value that triggers the Rising Threshold alarm Rising Event Select the index of the corresponding event which will be triggered if the sampled value is larger than the Rising Threshold Falling Threshold Enter the falling counter value that triggers the Falling Threshold alarm Falling Event Select the index of the corresponding event which will be triggered if the sampled value is lower than the Falling Threshold Alarm Type Specify the type of the alarm e All The alarm event will be triggered either the sampled value exceeds the Rising Threshold or is under the Falling Threshold e Rising When the sampled value exceeds the Rising Threshold an alarm event is triggered e Falling When the sampled value is under the Falling Threshold an alarm event is triggered Interval Enter the alarm interval time in seconds Owner Enter the name of the device or user that defined the entry Status Enable Disable the corresponding alarm entry Mdnote When alarm variables exceed the Threshold on the same direction continuously for several times an alarm event will only be generated on the first time that is the Rising Alarm and Falling Alarm are triggered alternately for that the alarm following to Rising Alarm is certainly a Falling Alarm and vice versa Return to CONTENTS 236 Chapter 14 LLDP LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol is a Layer 2 protocol that is used for network devices to advertise their own
313. rk Connection Home network Figure B 5 4 Inthe prompt page that showed below double click on the Internet Protocol Version 6 TCP IPv6 279 Connect using AP Realtek RTLE102E RTL8103E This connection uses the following items IM 0 Client for Microsoft Networks B 005 Packet Scheduler M 8 File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks M Reliable Multicast Protocol M a itne Protocol 4 M CPP ed M Link Layer Topology Discovery Mapper 1 0 Driver de Link Layer Topology Discovery Responder Description TCP IP version 6 The latest version of the intemet protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks Figure B 6 5 The following TCP IPv6 Properties window will display and the IP Address tab is open on this window by default 280 General You can get IPv settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IPv settings Obtain an IPv6 address automatically Use the following IPv6 address IPv6 address 3001 14 Subnet prefix length 64 j Default gateway 3001 1 Obtain DNS server address automatically 9 Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server Alternate DNS server E Validate settings upon exit Figure B 7 6 Select Use the following IPv6 address And the following items will be available If
314. roup 9 1 7 Packet Statistics On this page you can view the multicast data traffic on each port of the switch which facilitates you to monitor the IGMP messages in the network Choose the menu Multicast IGMP Snooping Packet Statistics to load the following page 144 Auto Refresh Auto Refresh O Enable Disable Refresh Period sec 3 300 IGMP Statistics Port Select Port Query Packet ean pareve eb Leave Packet Error Packet 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 A 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 Ly 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 g 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 11 0 0 0 0 0 0 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 v Figure 9 11 Packet Statistics The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Auto Refresh Auto Refresh Enable Disable auto refresh feature Refresh Period Enter the time from 3 to 300 in seconds to specify the auto refresh period gt IGMP Statistics Port Select Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Port Displays the port number of the switch 9 1 8 Querier Config Query Packet Report Packet V1 Report Packet V2 Report Packet V3 Leave Packet Error Packet Displays the number of query packets the port received Displays the number of IGMPv1 report packets the port received Displays the number of IGMPv2 report packets the port received Displays the number of IGMPv3 report packets the port rece
315. rsion On Spanning Tree gt STP Config Port Config page enable MSTP function for the port 3 Configure the region name and On Spanning Tree MSTP Instance Region Config the revision of MST region page configure the region as TP LINK and keep the default revision setting 4 Configure VLAN to Instance On Spanning Tree MSTP Instance gt Instance mapping table of the MST region Config page configure WLAN to Instance mapping table Map VLAN 101 103 and 105 to Instance 1 map VLAN 102 104 and 106 to Instance 2 5 Configure switch B as the root On Spanning Tree MSTP Instance gt Instance bridge of Instance 1 Config page configure the priority of Instance 1 to be 0 6 Configure switch B as the On Spanning Tree MSTP Instance gt Instance designated bridge of Instance 2 Config page configure the priority of Instance 2 to be 4096 110 e Configure switch C Step Operation Description 1 Configure ports On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN page configure the link type of the related ports as Trunk and add the ports to VLAN101 VLAN106 The detailed instructions can be found in the section 802 1Q VLAN 2 Enable STP function On Spanning Tree gt STP Config STP Config page enable STP function and select MSTP version On Spanning Tree gt STP Config Port Config page enable MSTP function for the port 3 Configure the region name and On Spanning Tree MSTP Instance Region Config the revision of
316. rtual LAN is a collection of network nodes that share the same collision domain regardless of their physical location or connection point in the network A VLAN serves as a logical workgroup with no physical barriers and allows users to share information and resources as though located on the same LAN Return to CONTENTS 293
317. s gt HyperTerminal Startup gt E Entertainment gt I network Connections amp meine A 8 Internet Explorer System Tools gt 9 Network Setup Wizard Wi msn 9 Address Book 5 New Connection Wizard ain Microsoft Office Out i Outlook Express 3 Iculator F Remote Desktop Connection A Outlook E I Calculat Ri Desktop Ci y Remote Assistance EM Command Prompt lt Wireless Network Setup Wizard a Notepad Windows Media Player DB Notepad 3 Windows Messenger Y Paint es Command Prompt a Windows Movie Maker Program Compatibility Wizard FA Activate Windows Y Synchronize OvisLink Wireless Clie Utility E IxChariot E asmax E LogMeTT Tera Term Im Microsoft Office I Macrovision E TP LINK OvisLink Tour Windows xP 3 Windows Explorer A WordPad E E E E E Figure 17 2 Open Hyper Terminal 272 2 The Connection Description Window will prompt shown as Figure 17 3 Enter a name into the Name field and click OK Connection Description a New Connection Enter a name and choose an icon for the connection Name tp link Hse teu Figure 17 3 Connection Description 3 Select the port to connect in Figure 17 4 and click OK Connect To DB tp link Enter details for the phone number that you want to dial Country region Area code Phone number Connect using COM1 Figure 17 4 Select the port to connect
318. s duplication After port configuration synchronization packets from Secondary VLAN can be forwarded via the promiscuous port untagged and those from Primary VLAN can be sent via the host port untagged In order for these packets can be forwarded in unicast via the right port MAC address duplication is used to expand the VLANs the MAC address is in Normally the egress ports for forwarding these packets are identified through MAC address learning For example the switch in Figure 6 15 maintains a MAC address table shown in Table 6 6 The MAC address duplication process has two aspects that is duplicating the dynamic MAC addresses learned by the host ports in the secondary VLANs to the Primary VLAN and copying the dynamic MAC addresses learned by the promiscuous ports in the Primary VLAN to the secondary VLANs As shown in Figure 6 15 supposing the Router sends a packet with the source MAC as mac_2 and the destination Mac as mac_a The MAC address table on the switch is changed to the one shown in Table 6 7 Destination MAC VLAN Egress Port mac_a 5 port 5 mac_2 2 port 2 mac_3 3 port 3 Table 6 6 MAC address table before duplication Destination MAC VLAN Egress Port mac_a 5 port 5 mac_a 2 port 5 mac_a 3 port 5 mac_2 2 port 2 mac_2 5 port 2 mac_3 3 port 3 mac_3 5 port 3 Table 6 7 MAC address table after duplication gt Packet forwarding in Private VLAN 84 Router MAC
319. s not removing its VLAN tag When untagged the same as the PVID of the port the packet will packets are received be d the port will add the 2 OPPec Trunk default VLAN tag i e The packet will be forwarded with the PVID of the i i its current VLAN tag If the VID of packet is ingress port to the packets allowed by the port the f the egress rule of port is TAG packet will be received the packet will be forwarded with If the VID of packet is its current VLAN tag General forbidden by the port the If the egress rule of port is packet will be dropped UNTAG the packet will be forwarded after removing its VLAN tag Table 6 1 Relationship between Port Types and VLAN Packets Processing IEEE 802 1Q VLAN function is implemented on the VLAN Config and Port Config pages 6 1 1 VLAN Config On this page you can view the current created 802 1Q VLAN Choose the menu VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config to load the following page VLAN Table Select VLANID O 1 Name Default VLAN Members 1 28 VLAN ID Operation Edit Detail Create All Delete Help Total VLAN 1 Figure 6 3 VLAN Table 64 To ensure the normal communication of the factory switch the default VLAN of all ports is set to VLAN1 The following entries are displayed on this screen gt VLAN Table VLAN ID Select Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding entry based on the VLAN ID number you entered Select
320. s page you can configure loop protect feature root protect feature TC protect feature BPDU protect feature and BPDU filter feature for ports You are suggested to enable corresponding protection feature for the qualified ports gt Loop Protect In a stable network a switch maintains the states of ports by receiving and processing BPDU packets from the upstream switch However when link congestions or link failures occurred to the network a down stream switch does not receive BPDU packets for certain period which results in spanning trees being regenerated and roles of ports being reselected and causes the blocked ports to transit to forwarding state Therefore loops may be incurred in the network The loop protect function can suppresses loops With this function enabled a port regardless of the role it plays in instances is always set to blocking state when the port does not receive BPDU packets from the upstream switch and spanning trees are regenerated and thereby loops can be prevented gt Root Protect A CIST and its secondary root bridges are usually located in the high bandwidth core region Wrong configuration or malicious attacks may result in configuration BPDU packets with higher priorities being received by the legal root bridge which causes the current legal root bridge to lose its position and network topology jitter to occur In this case flows that should travel along high speed links may lead to low speed links a
321. sable Auto LAGI Auto Auto Disable Auto LAGI y apply Refresh Help Note Ifthe Path Cost of a port is setto 0 it will alter automatically according to the port s link speed Figure 7 6 Port Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Port Config Port Select Select Port Status Priority ExtPath IntPath Edge Port P2P Link MCheck STP Version Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Select the desired port for STP configuration It is multi optional Displays the port number of the switch Select Enable Disable STP function for the desired port Enter a value from 0 to 240 divisible by 16 Port priority is an important criterion on determining if the port connected to this port will be chosen as the root port The lower value has the higher priority ExtPath Cost is used to choose the path and calculate the path costs of ports in different MST regions It is an important criterion on determining the root port The lower value has the higher priority IntPath Cost is used to choose the path and calculate the path costs of ports in an MST region It is an important criterion on determining the root port The lower value has the higher priority Enable Disable Edge Port The edge port can transit its state from blocking to forwarding rapidly without waiting for forward delay Select the
322. sable Disable Disable Disable g 4 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable F 5 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable o 6 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable O 7 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Fi 8 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable g 9 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Fi 10 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Fi 11 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable O 12 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Fi 13 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable g 14 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable O 15 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable x Figure 7 10 Port Protect The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Port Protect Port Select Select Port Loop Protect Root Protect TC Protect BPDU Protect BPDU Filter LAG 7 4 2 TC Protect Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Select the desired port for port protect configuration It is multi optional Displays the port number of the switch Loop Protect is to prevent the loops in the network brought by recalculating STP because of link failures and network congestions Root Protect is to prevent wrong network topology change caused by the role change of the current legal root bridge TC Protect is to prevent the decrease of the performance and stability of the switch brought by continuously removing MAC address entries upon receiving TC BPDUs
323. sable STP on port 17 14 2006 01 01 08 00 10 MSTP jevel_6 Disable STP on port 16 15 2006 01 01 08 00 10 MSTP level_6 Disable STP on port 15 16 2006 01 01 08 00 10 MSTP jevel_6 Disable STP on port 14 17 2006 01 01 08 00 10 MSTP jevel_6 Disable STP on port 13 18 2006 01 01 08 00 10 MSTP jevel_6 Disable STP on port 12 X Refresh Figure 16 3 Log Table The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Log Info Index Displays the index of the log information Time Displays the time when the log event occurs The log can get the correct time after you configure on the System gt System Info gt System Time Web management page Module Displays the module which the log information belongs to You can select a module from the drop down list to display the corresponding log information Severity Displays the severity level of the log information You can select a severity level to display the log information whose severity level value is the same or smaller Content Displays the content of the log information Anse 1 The logs are classified into eight levels based on severity The higher the information severity is the lower the corresponding level is 2 This page displays logs in the log buffer and at most 511 logs are displayed 266 16 2 2 Local Log Local Log is the log information saved in switch By default all system logs are saved in log buffer and the logs with severities from level_0 to level_2 are s
324. screen gt IP Config MAC Address Displays MAC Address of the switch IP Address Mode Select the mode to obtain IP Address for the switch e Static IP When this option is selected you should enter IP Address Subnet Mask and Default Gateway manually e DHCP When this option is selected the switch will obtain network parameters from the DHCP Server e BOOTP When this option is selected the switch will obtain network parameters from the BOOTP Server Management VLAN Enter the ID of management VLAN the only VLAN through which you can get access to the switch By default VLAN1 owning all the ports is the Management VLAN and you can access the switch via any port on the switch However if another VLAN is created and set to be the Management VLAN you may have to reconnect the management station to a port that is a member of the Management VLAN IP Address Enter the system IP of the switch The default system IP is 192 168 0 1 and you can change it appropriate to your needs Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask of the switch Default Gateway Enter the default gateway of the switch Ano 1 Changing the IP address to a different IP segment will interrupt the network communication so please keep the new IP address in the same IP segment with the local network The switch only possesses an IP address The IP address configured will replace the original IP address If the switch gets the IP address from DHCP server you can s
325. sms to synchronize time across the network The time servers operate in a hierarchical master slave configuration in order to synchronize local clocks within the subnet and to national time standards via wire or radio Port Authentication See IEEE 802 1X Port Mirroring A method whereby data on a target port is mirrored to a monitor port for troubleshooting with a logic analyzer or RMON probe This allows data on the target port to be studied unobstructively Port Trunk Defines a network link aggregation and trunking method which specifies how to create a single high speed logical link that combines several lower speed physical links Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS RADIUS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS compliant devices on the network Remote Monitoring RMON RMON provides comprehensive network monitoring capabilities It eliminates the polling required in standard SNMP and can set alarms on a variety of traffic conditions including specific error types Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP RSTP reduces the convergence time for network topology changes to about 10 of that required by the older IEEE 802 1D STP standard 292 Secure Shell SSH A secure replacement for remote access functions including Telnet SSH can authenticate users with a cryptographic key and encrypt data connections between management clients and the switch
326. ss Approximate round trip times in milli seconds Minimum Oms Maximum Oms Average Oms Figure 16 8 Ping The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Ping Config Destination IP Enter the IP address of the destination node for Ping test Both IPv4 and IPv6 are supported Ping Times Enter the amount of times to send test data during Ping testing The default value is recommended Data Size Enter the size of the sending data during Ping testing The default value is recommended Interval Specify the interval to send ICMP request packets The default value is recommended gt Ping Result Here you can view the Ping result 270 16 4 2 Tracert Tracert test function is used to test the connectivity of the gateways during its journey from the source to destination of the test data When malfunctions occur to the network you can locate trouble spot of the network with this tracert test Choose the menu Maintenance Network Diagnostics Tracert to load the following page Tracert Config Destination IP 192 168 0 100 Max Hop 4 hop 1 30 ae elp Wait Time 1000 ms 1 10000 Tracert Result Figure 16 9 Tracert The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Tracert Config Destination IP Enter the IP address of the destination device Both IPv4 and IPv6 are supported Max Hop Specify the maximum number of the route hops the test data can pass through Wait Time Ent
327. ssage from the router When receiving IGMP report message the switch will send the report message via the router port in the VLAN as well as analyze the message to get the address of the multicast group the host applies for joining The receiving port will be processed if the receiving port is a new member port it will be added to the multicast address table with its member port time specified if the receiving port is already a member port its member port time will be directly reset 3 IGMP Leave Message The host running IGMPv1 does not send IGMP leave message when leaving a multicast group as a result the switch can not get the leave information of the host momentarily However after leaving the multicast group the host does not send IGMP report message any more so the switch will remove the port from the corresponding multicast address table when its member port time times out The host running IGMPv2 or IGMPv3 sends IGMP leave message when leaving a multicast group to inform the multicast router of its leaving 135 When receiving IGMP leave message the switch will forward IGMP group specific query message to check if other members in the multicast group of the port need this multicast and reset the member port time to the leave time When the leave time times out the switch will remove the port from the corresponding multicast group If no other member is in the group after the port is removed the switch will send IGMP leave me
328. ssage to the router and remove the whole multicast group gt IGMP Snooping Fundamentals 1 Ports Router Port Indicates the switch port directly connected to the multicast router Member Port Indicates a switch port connected to a multicast group member 2 Timers Router Port Time Within the time if the switch does not receive IGMP query message from the router port it will consider this port is not a router port any more The default value is 300 seconds Member Port Time Within the time if the switch does not receive IGMP report message from the member port it will consider this port is not a member port any more The default value is 260 seconds Leave Time Indicates the interval between the switch receiving a leave message from a host and the switch removing the host from the multicast groups The default value is 1 second The IGMP Snooping function can be implemented on the following pages Snooping Config VLAN Config Port Config IP Range Multicast VLAN Static Multicast IP and Packet Statistics 9 1 1 Snooping Config To configure the IGMP Snooping on the switch please firstly configure IGMP global configuration and related parameters on this page If the multicast address of the received multicast data is not in the multicast address table the switch will broadcast the data in the VLAN When Unknown Multicast Discard feature is enabled the switch drops the received unknown multicast so as to save the bandwidth a
329. stem Summary gt Port Status nin Indicates the 100Mbps port is not connected to a device a 2 Indicates the 100Mbps port is at the speed of 100Mbps mf Indicates the 100Mbps port is at the speed of 10Mbps 3 Indicates the 1000Mbps port is not connected to a device E Indicates the 1000Mbps port is at the speed of 1000Mbps 14 Indicates the 1000Mbps port is at the speed of 10Mbps or 100Mbps Indicates the SFP port is not connected to a device Indicates the SFP port is at the speed of 1000Mbps IS g g Indicates the SFP port is at the speed of 100Mbps When the cursor moves on the port the detailed information of the port will be displayed Port 1 Type 100M RJ45 Speed 100M FullDuplex Status Connected Enable Figure 4 2 Port Information gt Port Info Port Displays the port number of the switch Type Displays the type of the port Rate Displays the maximum transmission rate of the port Status Displays the connection status of the port Click a port to display the bandwidth utilization on this port The actual rate divided by theoretical maximum rate is the bandwidth utilization Figure 4 3 displays the bandwidth utilization monitored every four seconds Monitoring the bandwidth utilization on each port facilitates you to monitor the network traffic and analyze the network abnormities Run Time 464sec CurrentPort Current Utilization 0 100 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10
330. t 11 and Port 12 and configure the egress rule of Port 11 as Untag 3 Create VLAN20 Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page create a VLAN with its VLAN ID as 20 owning Port 11 and Port 12 and configure the egress rule of Port 11 as Untag 75 Step Operation Description 4 Configure MAC On VLAN gt MAC VLAN gt MAC VLAN page create MAC VLAN10 with VLAN 10 the MAC address as 00 19 56 8A 4C 71 5 Configure MAC On VLAN gt MAC VLAN gt MAC VLAN page create MAC VLAN10 with VLAN 20 the MAC address as 00 19 56 82 3B 70 6 Port Enable Required On the VLAN MAC VLAN gt Port Enable page select and enable Port 11 and Port 12 for MAC VLAN feature e Configure switch B Step Operation Description 1 Configure the Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt Port Config page configure the Link Type of the link type of Port 21 and Port 22 as GENERAL and TRUNK respectively ports 2 Create VLAN10 Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page create a VLAN with its VLAN ID as 10 owning Port 21 and Port 22 and configure the egress rule of Port 21 as Untag 3 Create VLAN20 Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page create a VLAN with its VLAN ID as 20 owning Port 21 and Port 22 and configure the egress rule of Port 21 as Untag 4 Configure MAC On VLAN gt MAC VLAN gt MAC VLAN page create MAC VLAN10 with VLAN 10 the MAC address as 00 19
331. t and click the Search button to find your desired entry in the Static Address Table e MAC Enter the MAC address of your desired entry e VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID number of your desired entry e Port Enter the Port number of your desired entry Select the entry to delete or modify the corresponding port number It is multi optional Displays the static MAC Address Displays the corresponding VLAN ID of the MAC address Displays the corresponding Port number of the MAC address Here you can modify the port number to which the MAC address is bound The new port should be in the same VLAN Displays the Type of the MAC address Displays the Aging Status of the MAC address 1 If the corresponding port number of the MAC address is not correct or the connected port or the device has been changed the switch can not be forward the packets correctly Please reset the static address entry appropriately 2 Ifthe MAC address of a device has been added to the Static Address Table connecting the device to another port will cause its address not to be recognized dynamically by the switch Therefore please ensure the entries in the Static Address Table are correct and valid 3 The MAC address in the Static Address Table can not be added to the Filtering Address Table or bound to a port dynamically 4 This static MAC address bound function is not available if the 802 1X feature is enabled 5 4 3 Dynamic Address The dynamic address
332. t and designated port can forward data and the other ports are blocked The blocked ports only can receive BPDUs RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol evolved from the 802 1D STP standard enable Ethernet ports to transit their states rapidly The premises for the port in the RSTP to transit its state rapidly are as follows e The condition for the root port to transit its port state rapidly The old root port of the switch stops forwarding data and the designated port of the upstream switch begins to forward data e The condition for the designated port to transit its port state rapidly The designated port is an edge port or connecting to a point to point link If the designated port is an edge port it can directly transit to forwarding state if the designated port is connecting to a 96 point to point link it can transit to forwarding state after getting response from the downstream switch through handshake gt RSTP Elements Edge Port Indicates the port connected directly to terminals P2P Link Indicates the link between two switches directly connected MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol compatible with both STP and RSTP and subject to IEEE 802 1s standard not only enables spanning trees to converge rapidly but also enables packets of different VLANs to be forwarded along their respective paths so as to provide redundant links with a better load balancing mechanism Features of MSTP e MSTP combines VLANs and spanning t
333. t contain any routing header 25 Choose the menu System System Info System IPv6 to load the following page Global Config IPv6 Enable O Disable Apply Link local Address Config Config Mode O manual Auto Link local Address Format fe80 1 Apply Status normal Global Address Autoconfig via RA Message Enable global address auto configuration via RA message Apply Global Address Autoconfig via DHCPv6 Server O Enable global address auto configuration via DHCP v6 Server Apply Add a global address manually Address Format O Eul 64 O Not EUl 64 Apply Global Address Format 3001 1 64 Global address Table Prefered Select Global Address PrefixLength Type LifetimefValid Status Lifetime O Figure 4 10 System IPv6 The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config IPv6 Enable Disable IPv6 function globally on the Switch gt Link local Address Config Config Mode Select the link local address configuration mode e Manual When this option is selected you should assign a link local address manually e Auto When this option is selected the switch will generate a link local address automatically Link local Address Enter a link local address 26 Status Displays the status of the link local address e Normal Indicates that the link local address is normal e Try Indicates that the link local address may be newly configured e R
334. t for a VLAN this value overrides the value configured globally 3 You should only use the Immediate Leave feature when there is a single receiver present on every port in the VLAN If the immediate leave function is enabled on a port with several listeners in the same IPv6 multicast group these listeners will fail to receive the IPv6 multicast packets after one of them leave this group 9 2 3 Filter Config When the switch receives MLD report messages it examines the multicast filtering ID and filter mode configured on the access port to determine if the port can join the multicast group If the port can join the multicast group the switch will add the port to the forward ports list of the multicast group Otherwise the switch will drop the MLD report messages In that way you can control the multicast groups that users can join in Choose the menu Multicast gt MLD Snooping Filter Config to load the following page Filter Config Filter ID 1 30 Start Multicast IP Format FF03 AD45 3444 End Multicast IP Format FF03 AD45 5432 Filter List Filter ID Select Filter ID Start Multicast IP End Multicast IP O Apply Delete Help Total Filters 0 Figure 9 15 Filter Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Filter Config Filter ID Enter the Filter ID which identifies the filter Start Multicast IP Enter the start of the IP range End Multicast IP Enter the end of the IP range gt Filt
335. tain a Read View The default Read View is viewDefault 13 1 4 SNMP User The User in an SNMP Group can manage the switch via the management station software The User and its Group have the same security level and access right You can configure the SNMP User on this page Choose the menu SNMP gt SNMP Config SNMP User to load the following page User Config User Name 16 characters maximum User Type Local User vi Group Name v Security Model vi v Security Level Auth Mode Auth Password 16 characters maximum Privacy Mode Privacy Password 16 characters maximum User Table Security 7 Privacy Select User Name User Type Group Name Model Security Level Auth Mode Made al Operation Note The security model and security level ofthe user should be the same with that ofits group Figure 13 6 SNMP User The following entries are displayed on this screen gt User Config User Name Enter the User Name here 225 User Type Group Name Security Model Security Level Auth Mode Auth Password Privacy Mode Privacy Password User Table Select User Name User Type Group Name Security Model Security Level Auth Mode Privacy Mode Operation Select the type for the User e Local User Indicates that the user is connected to a local SNMP engine e Remote User Indicates that the user is connected to a remote SNMP engine Select the Group Name of the User The
336. te Help 1 Among the entries with critical collision level the one having the highest Source priority will take effect 2 Among the entries with the same Source priority onlythe last added or edited one will take effect Figure 12 2 Manual Binding The following entries are displayed on this screen gt 12 1 3 ARP Scanning Manual Binding Option Host Name IP Address MAC Address VLAN ID Port Protect Type Manual Binding Table Select Host Name IP Address MAC Address VLAN ID Port Protect Type Collision Enter the Host Name Enter the IP Address of the Host Enter the MAC Address of the Host Enter the VLAN ID Select the number of port connected to the Host Select the Protect Type for the entry Select the desired entry to be deleted It is multi optional Displays the Host Name here Displays the IP Address of the Host Displays the MAC Address of the Host Displays the VLAN ID here Displays the number of port connected to the Host Displays the Protect Type of the entry Displays the Collision status of the entry e Warning Indicates that the collision may be caused by the MSTP function e Critical Indicates that the entry has a collision with the other entries ARP Address Resolution Protocol is used to analyze and map IP addresses to the corresponding MAC addresses so that packets can be delivered to their destinations correctly IP address is the 191 address
337. te you entered as the real Ingress Egress rate For example if you enter 1000Kbps for egress rate the system will automatically select 1024Kbps as the real Egress rate 3 When egress rate limit feature is enabled for one or more ports you are suggested to disable the flow control on each port to ensure the switch works normally 10 2 2 Storm Control Storm Control function allows the switch to filter broadcast multicast and UL frame in the network If the transmission rate of the three kind packets exceeds the set bandwidth the packets will be automatically discarded to avoid network broadcast storm Choose the menu QoS gt Bandwidth Control Storm Control to load the following page 167 Storm Control Config Port Select Port Broadcast Rate bps Multicast Rate bps UL Frame Rate bps LAG O a Ml O 1 e O 2 O 3 O 4 i O 5 O 6 O 7 O 8 O 9 O 10 O 11 O 12 v Note For one port you cannot enable the Storm Control and the Ingress rate control atthe same time gt Storm Control Config Figure 10 11 Storm Control The following entries are displayed on this screen Port Select Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Select Select the desired port for Storm Control configuration It is multi optional Port Displays the port number of the switch Broadcast Rate Select the bandwidth for receiving broadcast packets on the port bps
338. tended Readers ai ennot nln nln iin cc 2 12 CONVENIOS 35 see sced ieee ar 2 1 3 OVErnvieW Of ThS GUIG Oia A ALA 2 Chapter 2 Introducti Na coil A dan Soe aed 7 2 1 Overview of the Switch oooccccccnncnococccccccoconnnnnonccnnncoconnnnnoncnnnnncnnnnnn no nnnnnncccinnnnnnnncncnno 7 2 2 Main Features iia A wan A A agentes 7 2 3 Appearance Description ooooccccnccnccccnnnoccnnnnnnnncnnnnncnnnnnnnnononnnncnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnonnnnnnn 8 2 3 1 Front Panely cia 8 2 3 2 ON 9 C apter 3 Login to the SWwiteh renhan ataei athe a deg eran aa a ddedent eaa eaiail 10 3 1 O E a 10 3 2 SCOMMGUFATION aeei e AAA 12 Chapter 4 Syste Musica asilos eane a aa Aaaa aana aaraa 14 AT System Msn si ia 14 4 1 1 SY SEM SUMMA Vir io E 14 4 1 2 Device DESCHPUON etapa aise 16 4 1 3 System TiN Esiin a aia 16 4 1 4 Daylight Saving Time ooococccccccccconooccnccncncccnnnannonnnnnnncnnoncnnonnnncnncncincannnnnnnnnnninnns 17 AMO System Peis iets il oe Bee e Meets Macnab a e E ET a E Ea Maseuutes 18 AO Systent PVO ites N atari ee as cat ee ts 20 42 User Management 0 000 0 ii lili lll lll inline 28 4 2 1 User Tableros cirai AAA ae i i Ai 28 4 2 2 Us ERC it ea ieee ian tiara A ae tees 28 AS SY SETS tt A A a AA AAA AAA 30 4 3 1 Contig Restore uan rata di deta a a 30 4 3 2 Config BACKUP viii na 30 4 3 3 Firmware Upgrade imitar rata 31 434 System Reboot coococcccccccccoocononccncncocinnnnnonnnncnncnnonannnnnnncnnnnnona
339. terion on determining the root bridge In the same condition the switch with the highest priority will be chosen as the root bridge The lower value has the higher priority The default value is 32768 and should be exact divisor of 4096 Enter a value from 1 to 10 in seconds to specify the interval to send BPDU packets It is used to test the links 2 Hello Time 1 lt Max Age The default value is 2 seconds Enter a value from 6 to 40 in seconds to specify the maximum time the switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure The default value is 20 seconds Enter a value from 4 to 30 in seconds to specify the time for the port to transit its state after the network topology is changed 2 Forward Delay 1 gt Max Age The default value is 15 seconds Enter a value from 1 to 20 to set the maximum number of BPDU packets transmitted per Hello Time interval The default value is 5pps Enter a value from 1 to 40 to set the maximum number of hops that occur in a specific region before the BPDU is discarded The default value is 20 hops 99 Adote l The forward delay parameter and the network diameter are correlated A too small forward delay parameter may result in temporary loops A too large forward delay may cause a network unable to resume the normal state in time The default value is recommended An adequate hello time parameter can enable the switch to discover the link failures occurred in the
340. the corresponding time range Index Displays the index of the time range Time Range Name Displays the name of the time range Slice Displays the time slice of the time range Mode Displays the mode the time range adopts Operation Click the Edit button to modify the time range Click the Detail button to display the complete information of this time range 175 11 1 2 Time Range Create On this page you can create time ranges Choose the menu ACL gt Time Range gt Time Range Create to load the following page Create Time Range Name O Holiday O absolute O week Create Time Slice Start Time End Time Time Slice Table Index Anat To successfully configure time ranges please firstly specify time slices and then time ranges Start Date J o1 e 01 End Date imap Mon Tue Wed L Thu Fri L Sat Sun Start Time End Time Delete Figure 11 2 Time Range Create The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Create Time Range Name Holiday Absolute Week Create Time Slice Start Time End Time Time Slice Table Index Start Time End Time Delete Enter the name of the time range for time identification Select Holiday you set as a time range The ACL rule based on this time range takes effect only when the system time is within the holiday Select Absolute to configure absolute time range The ACL rule based on this time range takes effect only
341. the desired Instance ID for configuration It is multi optional Displays Instance ID of the switch Displays status of the instance Enter the priority of the switch in the instance It is an important criterion on determining if the switch will be chosen as the root bridge in the specific instance Enter the VLAN ID which belongs to the corresponding instance ID After modification here the previous VLAN ID will be cleared and mapped to the CIST Click the Clear button to clear up all VLAN IDs from the instance ID The cleared VLAN ID will be automatically mapped to the CIST gt VLAN Instance Mapping VLAN ID Instance ID Adote Enter the desired VLAN ID After modification here the new VLAN ID will be added to the corresponding instance ID and the previous VLAN ID won t be replaced Enter the corresponding instance ID In a network with both GVRP and MSTP enabled GVRP packets are forwarded along the CIST If you want to broadcast packets of a specific VLAN through GVRP please be sure to map the VLAN to the CIST when configuring the MSTP VLAN instance mapping table For detailed introduction of GVRP please refer to GVRP function page 7 3 3 Instance Port Config A port can play different roles in different spanning tree instance On this page you can configure the parameters of the ports in different instance IDs as well as view status of the ports in the specified instance Choose the menu Spanning Tree MSTP I
342. the global value is used Figure 9 14 VLAN Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt VLAN Config VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID you want to configure Router Port Aging Enter the router port aging time for this VLAN It will override the Time global configured aging time Member Port Aging Enter the member port aging time for this VLAN It will override Time the global configured aging time Immediate Leave Static Router Ports VLAN Table Select VLAN ID Router Port Aging Time Member Port Aging Time Immediate Leave Static Router Ports Dynamic Router Ports Enable or disable immediate leave function for this VLAN If this function is enabled the multicast group member port will be deleted immediately if Done Message receive not sending Specific Query for listener checking Enter the static router ports for this VLAN Static router ports will not be aged Select the VLAN ID you want to change Displays the VLAN ID Displays the router port aging time of this VLAN Displays the member port aging time of this VLAN Displays the immediate leave function of this VLAN Displays the static router ports of this VLAN Displays the dynamic router ports of this VLAN 151 Adore 1 The VLAN configuration will take effect when global MLD Snooping function is enabled and the corresponding VLAN is created 2 When the router port aging time or member port aging time is se
343. the menu Maintenance System Monitor CPU Monitor to load the following page CPU Monitor Run Time 76sec 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 A 10 10 Current Utilization MAX Utilization MIN Utilization Average Utilization 22 25 22 23 ise Ca Figure 16 1 CPU Monitor Click the Monitor button to enable the switch to monitor and display its CPU utilization rate every four seconds 264 16 1 2 Memory Monitor Choose the menu Maintenance System Monitor Memory Monitor to load the following page Memory Monitor Run Time 40sec 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 Current Utilization MAX Utilization MIN Utilization Average Utilization 68 68 68 68 Stop Figure 16 2 Memory Monitor Click the Monitor button to enable the switch to monitor and display its Memory utilization rate every four seconds 16 2 Log The Log system of switch can record classify and manage the system information effectively providing powerful support for network administrator to monitor network operation and diagnose malfunction The Logs of switch are classified into the following eight levels Severity Level Description emergencies 0 The system is unusable alerts 1 Action must be taken immediately critical 2 Critical conditions errors 3 Error conditions warnings 4 Warnings conditions notifications 5 Normal but significant conditions informational 6 In
344. the prompt is displayed for a short time you are suggested not to release the CTRL B key until you enter into bootUtil menu after powering on the switch 3 After entering into bootUtil menu please firstly configure the IP parameters of the switch The format is ifconfig ip xxx xxx xxx xxx mask 255 255 255 0 gateway XXX XXX XXX XXX For example Configure the IP address as 10 10 70 22 mask as 255 255 255 0 and gateway as10 10 70 1 The detailed command is shown as the figure below Enter the command and press Enter TP LINK ifconfig ip 10 10 70 22 mask 255 255 255 0 gateway 10 10 70 1 274 4 Configure the parameters of the FTP server which keeps the upgrade firmware Later you can download the firmware to the switch from the FTP server The format of the command is ftp host xxx xxx xxx xxx user xxxxx pwd xxxxx file xxxxxx bin Here take the following parameters of the FTP server as an example IP address is 10 10 70 146 the user name and password for login to the FTP server are both 123 the name of the upgrade firmware is tl_sl5428e_up bin The detailed command is shown as the following figure Enter the command and press Enter TP LINK ftp host 10 10 70 146 user 123 pwd 123 file tl_sI5428e_up bin 5 Enter the upgrade command and press Enter to upgrade the firmware After a while the prompt You can only use the port 1 to upgrade will display in the hyper terminal shown as the following figure TP LINK upgrade Yo
345. the switch e Network Diagnostics Including Cable Test and Loopback Cable Test tests the connection status of the cable connected to the switch and Loopback tests if the port of the switch and the connected device are available e Network Diagnostics Test if the destination is reachable and the account of router hops from the switch to the destination Chapter 17 System Maintenance via FTP Introduces how to download firmware of the switch via FTP function Appendix A Specifications Lists the glossary used in this manual Appendix B Configure the PCs Introduces how to configure the PCs Appendix C 802 1X Client Software Introduces how to use 802 1X Client Software provided for authentication Appendix D Glossary Lists the glossary used in this manual Return to CONTENTS Chapter 2 Introduction Thanks for choosing the TL SL5428E 24 Port 10 100Mbps 4 Port Gigabit JetStream L2 Managed Switch 2 1 Overview of the Switch Designed for workgroups and departments TL SL5428E from TP LINK provides wire speed performance and full set of layer 2 management features It provides a variety of service features and multiple powerful functions with high security The ElA standardized framework and smart configuration capacity can provide flexible solutions for a variable scale of networks ACL 802 1x IP Source Guard and Dynamic ARP Inspection provide robust security strategy QoS and IGMP sno
346. the switches in the cluster based on three protocols NDP NTDP and CMP Cluster Management Protocol e NDP All switches get neighbor information by collecting NDP e NTDP The commander switch collects the NDP information and neighboring connection information of each device in a specific network range to determine the candidate switches in the cluster Cluster maintenance The commander switch adds the candidate switch to the cluster and removes the member switch from the cluster according to the collected NTDP information The Cluster module mainly used for cluster management configuration including three submenus NDP NTDP and Cluster 15 1 NDP NDP Neighbor Discovery Protocol is used to get the information of the directly connected neighbor devices to support cluster establishing An NDP enabled device sends NDP packets regularly to neighbor devices as well as receives NDP packets from neighbor devices An NDP packet carries the NDP information including the device name MAC address firmware version and so on A switch keeps and maintains a neighbor information table which contains the NDP information of each neighbor switch If a switch receives the NDP information of a new neighbor it will add the information to the neighbor information table If the received NDP information is different from the old information the switch will update it in the neighbor information table if the received NDP information is the same with the
347. the voice device Description Displays the description of the OUI 173 Configuration Procedure of Voice VLAN Step Operation Description 1 Configure the link type of Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt Port Config page the port configure the link type of ports of the voice device 2 Create VLAN Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN Port Config page click the Create button to create a VLAN 3 Add OUI address Optional On QoS gt Voice VLAN OUI Config page you can check whether the switch is supporting the OUI template or not If not please add the OUI address 4 Configure the parameters Required On QoS Voice VLAN Port Config page of the ports in voice VLAN configure the parameters of the ports in voice VLAN 5 Enable Voice VLAN Required On QoS Voice VLAN gt Global Config page configure the global parameters of voice VLAN Return to CONTENTS 174 Chapter 11 ACL ACL Access Control List is used to filter packets by configuring match rules and process policies of packets in order to control the access of the illegal users to the network Besides ACL functions to control traffic flows and save network resources It provides a flexible and secured access control policy and facilitates you to control the network security On this switch ACLs classify packets based on a series of match conditions which can be L2 L4 protocol key fields carried in the packets A time range based
348. ther these settings are the result of auto negotiation during link initiation or of manual set override action Max Frame Size TLV The Maximum Frame Size TLV indicates the maximum frame size capability of the implemented MAC and PHY Power Via MDI TLV The Power Via MDI TLV allows network management to advertise and discover the MDI power support capabilities of the sending IEEE 802 3 LAN station The LLDP module is mainly for LLDP function configuration of the switch including three submenus Basic Config Device Info and Device Statistics 14 1Basic Config LLDP is configured on the Global Config and Port Config pages 14 1 1 Global Config On this page you can configure the LLDP parameters of the device globally Choose the menu LLDP gt Basic Config Global Config to load the following page 240 Global Config LLDP Enable Disable Apply Parameters Config Transmit Interval Hold Multiplier Transmit Delay Reinit Delay Notification Interval Fast Start Count 30 sec 5 32768 4 2 10 2 sec 1 8192 Apply 3 sec 1 10 Hep 5 sec 5 3600 3 1 10 Figure 14 1 Global Configuration The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config LLDP gt Parameters Config Transmit Interval Hold Multiplier Transmit Delay Reinit Delay Notification Interval Fast Start Count 14 1 2 Port Config Enable disable LLDP fun
349. tion It is multi optional Port Displays the port number Security Type Select Security Type for the port e Disable Select this option to disable the IP Source Guard feature for the port e SIP Only the packets with its source IP address and port number matched to the IP MAC binding rules can be processed e SIP MAC Only the packets with its source IP address source MAC address and port number matched to the IP MAC binding rules can be processed LAG Displays the LAG to which the port belongs to 12 4 DoS Defend DoS Denial of Service Attack is to occupy the network bandwidth maliciously by the network attackers or the evil programs sending a lot of service requests to the Host which incurs an abnormal service or even breakdown of the network With DoS Defend function enabled the switch can analyze the specific fields of the IP packets and distinguish the malicious DoS attack packets Upon detecting the packets the switch will discard the illegal packets directly and limit the transmission rate of the legal packets if the over legal packets may incur a breakdown of the network The switch can defend several types of DoS attack listed in the following table 206 DoS Attack Type Description Land Attack The attacker sends a specific fake SYN packet to the destination Host Since both the source IP address and the destination IP address of the SYN packet are set to be the IP address of the Host the Host will b
350. tion It is multi optional The current user information can t be deleted Displays the current user ID user name access level and user status Click the Edit button of the desired entry and you can edit the corresponding user information After modifying the settings please click the Modify button to make the modification effective Access level and user status of the current user information can t be modified 29 4 3 System Tools The System Tools function allowing you to manage the configuration file of the switch can be implemented on Config Restore Config Backup Firmware Upgrade System Reboot and System Reset pages 4 3 1 Config Restore On this page you can upload a backup configuration file to restore your switch to this previous configuration Choose the menu System System Tools Config Restore to load the following page Config Restore Restore the config from the saved config file Selecta backup config file and clickthe Restore Config button and then you can restore to the previous config Config file Browse Note It will take a long time to restore the config file Please wait without any operation Figure 4 13 Config Restore The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Config Restore Restore Config Click the Restore Config button to restore the backup configuration file It will take effect after the switch automatically reboots Anote 1 It will take a few min
351. tion as Permit configure the S MAC as 00 64 A5 5D 12 C3 and mask as FF FF FF FF FF FF and configure the time range as No Limit On ACL gt Policy Config Policy Create page create a policy named manager On ACL gt Policy Config Action Create page add ACL 11 to Policy manager On ACL gt Policy Binding Port Binding page select Policy manager to bind to port 3 187 Step Operation Description Configure requirement and 4 for 2 On ACL gt ACL Config ACL Create page create ACL 100 On ACL gt ACL Config Standard IP ACL page select ACL 100 create Rule 2 configure operation as Permit configure S IP as 10 10 70 0 and mask as 255 255 255 0 configure D IP as 10 10 88 5 and mask as 255 255 255 255 configure the time range as work_time On ACL ACL Config Standard IP ACL page select ACL 100 create Rule 1 configure operation as Deny configure S IP as 10 10 70 0 and mask as 255 255 255 0 configure D IP as 10 10 50 1 and mask as 255 255 255 255 configure the time range as No Limit On ACL gt ACL Config Standard IP ACL page select ACL 100 create Rule 3 configure operation as Deny configure S IP as 10 10 70 1 and mask as 255 255 255 0 configure D IP as 10 10 88 5 and mask as 255 255 255 255 configure the time range as No Limit On ACL gt Policy Config Policy Create page create a policy named limit On ACL gt Policy Config Action Create page add ACL 100 to Policy limit On ACL
352. tion between the 802 1P page configure the mapping relation between the priority Tag CoS and the TC 802 1P priority Tag CoS and the TC 2 Select a schedule mode Required On QoS DiffServ gt Schedule Mode page select a schedule mode 10 1 4 Schedule Mode On this page you can select a schedule mode for the switch When the network is congested the problem that many packets compete for resources must be solved usually in the way of queue scheduling The switch will control the forwarding sequence of the packets according to the priority queues and scheduling algorithms you set On this switch the priority levels are labeled as TCO TC1 TC3 Choose the menu QoS gt DiffServ gt Schedule Mode to load the following page Schedule Mode Config CET Schedule Mode Equ Mode Figure 10 9 Schedule Mode The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Schedule Mode Config SP Mode Strict Priority Mode In this mode the queue with higher priority will occupy the whole bandwidth Packets in the queue with lower priority are sent only when the queue with higher priority is empty 165 WRR Mode SP WRR Mode Equ Mode Weight Round Robin Mode In this mode packets in all the queues are sent in order based on the weight value for each queue The weight value ratio of TCO TC1 TC2 and TC3 is 1 2 4 8 Strict Priority Weight Round Robin Mode In this mode this switch provides two scheduling gr
353. tional links with all its neighbors 2 DLDP remains in Active state for more than 5 seconds Probe A device enters this state from the Active state if it receives a packet from an unknown neighbor In this state the device will send out Probe packets to detect whether the link is unidirectional Disable This state indicates that a unidirectional link is detected Table 8 3 DLDP Link State 2 DLDP Work Process The general DLDP work process chart is shown below al fran o e o Ni ox Y ON Figure 8 11 DLDP Process The process is illustrated below When DLDP is enabled on the link in down state the DLDP link state will transit to Inactive 2 When the DLDP enabled link is up the DLDP link state will transit to Active The device will send out Advertisement packets to the peer device with resynchronization tag in this state If the device doesn t receive any DLDP packets within 5 seconds the DLDP link state will transit to Advertisement 2 After receiving a packet from an unknown neighbor the device s link state will transit from Active to Probe and then send out several probe packets to detect the link state 5 If the device receives echo packets from its peer device the link state between them will be tagged as bidirectionally linked and the DLDP state will transit from Probe to Advertisement A device in the Advertisement state will send advertisement packets 6
354. to it If no Protocol VLAN is matched the switch will add a tag to the packet according to the PVID of the received port Thus the packet is assigned automatically to the corresponding VLAN for transmission When receiving tagged packet the switch will process it basing on the 802 1Q VLAN If the received port is the member of the VLAN to which the tagged packet belongs the packet will be forwarded normally Otherwise the packet will be discarded If the Protocol VLAN is created please set its enabled port to be the member of corresponding 802 1Q VLAN so as to ensure the packets forwarded normally 6 3 1 Protocol VLAN On this page you can create Protocol VLAN and view the information of the current defined Protocol VLANs Choose the menu VLAN gt Protocol VLAN gt Protocol VLAN to load the following page Create Protocol LAN Protocol AT w VLAN ID 1 4094 Protocol VLAN Table Select Protocol Ether Type WLAN ID Operation No entry in the Protocol VLAN table Figure 6 9 Create Protocol VLAN The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Create Protocol VLAN Protocol Select the defined protocol template VLAN ID Enter the ID number of the Protocol VLAN This VLAN should be one of the 802 1Q VLANs the ingress port belongs to 71 gt Protocol VLAN Table Select Select the desired entry It is multi optional Protocol Displays the protocol template of the VLAN Ether Type Displays the Ethern
355. tree node represents a managed object as shown in the following figure Thus the object can be identified with the unique path starting from the root and indicated by a string of numbers The number string is the Object Identifier of the managed object In the following figure the OID of the managed object B is 1 2 1 1 While the OID of the managed object A is 1 2 1 1 5 Figure 13 2 Architecture of the MIB tree gt SNMP Configuration Outline 1 Create View The SNMP View is created for the SNMP Management Station to manage MIB objects The managed object uniquely identified by OID can be set to under or out of the management of SNMP Management Station by configuring its view type included excluded The OID of managed object can be found on the SNMP client program running on the SNMP Management Station 2 Create SNMP Group After creating the SNMP View it s required to create an SNMP Group The Group Name Security Model and Security Level compose the identifier of the SNMP Group The Groups with these three items the same are considered to be the same You can configure SNMP Group to control the network access by providing the users in various groups with different management rights via the Read View Write View and Notify View 3 Create SNMP User The User configured in an SNMP Group can manage the switch via the client program on management station The specified User Name and the Auth Privacy Password are used for SNMP Manag
356. try e VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID number of your desired entry e Port Enter the Port number of your desired entry e LAG ID Enter the LAG ID number of your desired entry gt Dynamic Address Table Select Select the entry to delete the dynamic address or to bind the MAC address to the corresponding port statically It is multi optional MAC Address Displays the dynamic MAC Address VLAN ID Displays the corresponding VLAN ID of the MAC address Port Displays the corresponding port number of the MAC address Type Displays the Type of the MAC address Aging Status Displays the Aging Status of the MAC address 59 Bind Click the Bind button to bind the MAC address of your selected entry to the corresponding port statically Tips Setting aging time properly helps implement effective MAC address aging The aging time that is too long or too short results decreases the performance of the switch If the aging time is too long excessive invalid MAC address entries maintained by the switch may fill up the MAC address table This prevents the MAC address table from updating with network changes in time If the aging time is too short the switch may remove valid MAC address entries This decreases the forwarding performance of the switch It is recommended to keep the default value 5 4 4 Filtering Address The filtering address is to forbid the undesired packets to be forwarded The filtering address can be added or removed manually
357. u can configure the SSL function Choose the menu System lt Access Security SSL Config to load the following page 34 Global Config SSL O Enable O Disable Certificate Download Certificate File Key Download Note 1 The SSL certificate and key downloaded will not take effect until the switch is rebooted 2 The SSL certificate and key downloaded must match each other otherwise the HTTPS connection will not work Figure 4 19 SSL Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config SSL Enable Disable the SSL function on the switch gt Certificate Download Certificate File Select the desired certificate to download to the switch The certificate must be BASE64 encoded gt Key Download Key File Select the desired SSL Key to download to the switch The key must be BASE64 encoded Anote 1 The SSL certificate and key downloaded must match each other otherwise the HTTPS connection will not work The SSL certificate and key downloaded will not take effect until the switch is rebooted To establish a secured connection using https please enter https into the URL field of the browser 4 It may take more time for https connection than that for http connection because https connection involves authentication encryption and decryption etc 4 4 3 SSH Config As stipulated by IFTF Internet Engineering Task Force SSH Secure Shell is a security protocol establish
358. u can only use the port 1 to upgrade 6 When the prompt Are you sure to upgrade the firmware Y N displays please enter Y to start upgrade or enter N to quit upgrade shown as the following figure The icon indicates it is upgrading After upgrading the TP LINK command will display Are you sure to upgrade the firmware Y N y TIRAR RRHH RH HERRIA HHIHHHRHHHH RRHH RRHH RRHH HEARRAAERHEA HIHHHRHHHHE RRHH RARO RH RRHH ERA HAIRAIEAAHEA FERRET RRHH TP LINK 7 Please enter start command to start the switch shown as the following figure Then you can login to the CLI command window and manage the switch via CLI command TP LINK start Start kkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkk User Access Login kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk User When you forget the login user name and password you can enter reset command after entering into bootUtil menu to reset the system The system will be restored to the factory default settings and the default login user name and password are both admin Return to CONTENTS 275 Appendix A Specifications IEEE802 3 10Base T Ethernet IEEE802 3u 100Base TX 100Base FX Fast Ethernet IEEE802 3ab 1000Base T Gigabit Ethernet IEEE802 3z 1000Base X Gigabit Ethernet Standards IEEE802 3x Flow Control IEEE802 1p QoS IEEE802 1q VLAN IEEE802 1X Port based Access Authentication Ethernet 10Mbps HD 20Mbps FD Transmission Rate Fast Ethernet 100Mbps HD 200Mbps FD Gigabit Ethernet 2000Mbps FD 10Base T UT
359. uired On the VLAN gt Private VLAN gt Port Config page Private VLANs configure the port type of Port5 as Host enter Primary VLAN 6 and Secondary VLAN 2 and click the Add button Configure the port type of Port6 and Port7 as Host enter Primary VLAN 6 and Secondary VLAN 3 and click the Add button 4 Configure Port4 Required On the VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page click the Edit button and then configure the Egress Rule of Port4 as Tag 92 e Configure switch C Step Operation Description 1 Create Private Required On the VLAN gt Private VLAN gt PVLAN Config page VLANs Enter the Primary VLAN 6 and Secondary VLAN 2 3 and then click the Create button 2 Add Required On the VLAN gt Private VLAN Port Config page Promiscuous configure the port type of Port8 as Promiscuous enter Primary port to Private VLAN 6 and Secondary VLAN 2 3 and click the Add button VLANs 3 Add Host port to Required On the VLAN gt Private VLAN gt Port Config page Private VLANs configure the port type of Port9 as Host enter Primary VLAN 6 and Secondary VLAN 2 and click the Add button Configure the port type of Port10 and Port11 as Host enter Primary VLAN 6 and Secondary VLAN 2 3 and click the Add button 4 Configure Port8 Required On the VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page click the Edit button and then configure the Egress Rule of Port8 as Tag Return to CONTENTS 93 Chapte
360. ulti optional Port list of the switch Enable Disable DLDP on the selected port Displays the DLDP protocol state Displays the state of the links Displays the state of the selected port s neighbor Step Operation Description 1 Enable DLDP globally Required On the Ethernet OAM gt DDLDP gt DLDP page configure DLDP State as Enable under the Global Config tab 2 Enable DLDP on the Required On the Ethernet OAM DLDP gt DLDP page specified port configure DLDP State as Enable on specified port in the Port Config table 3 Configure Shut Mode Optional On the Ethernet OAM gt DLDP gt DLDP page configure the Shut Mode as Auto or Manual under the Global Config tab 4 Reset DLDP state Optional On the Ethernet OAM DLDP DLDP page select the specified ports or select all the ports in the Port Config table and click the Reset button to restore their state 8 7 Application Example for DLDP gt 1 Network requirements Device A and Device B are connected through two fiber pairs which are cross connected as shown in Figure 8 13 128 2 The unidirectional link should be disconnected once being detected and the ports shut down by DLDP can be restored after the fiber pairs are correctly connected gt Network Diagram Device A Gi 1 0 27 Gi 1 0 28 Gi 1 0 27 Gi 1 0 28 Device B Figure 8 13 DLDP Application Example gt Configuration Procedure Step O
361. unnels Bugs C Bypass authentication entirely SSH 2 only Authentication methods Attempt authentication using Pageant C Attempt TIS or CryptoCard auth SSH 1 Attempt keyboard interactive auth SSH 2 Authentication parameters C Allow agent forwarding C Allow attempted changes of username in SSH 2 After successful authentication please enter the login user name If you log on to the switch without entering password it indicates that the key has been successfully loaded 40 192 168 0 1 PuTIY ir uthentication ret ating with publi rsa key 20140124 Md note Following the steps above you have already entered the User EXEC Mode of the switch However to configure the switch you need a password to enter the Privileged EXEC Mode first For a switch with factory settings the Privileged EXEC Mode password can only be configured through the console connection For complete information about how to configure the Privileged EXEC Mode password please refer to the CLI Reference Guide in the provided Resource CD Return to CONTENTS 41 Chapter 5 Switching Switching module is used to configure the basic functions of the switch including four submenus Port LAG Traffic Monitor and MAC Address 5 1 Port The Port function allowing you to configure the basic features for the port is implemented on the Port Config Port Mirror Port Security Port Isolation and Loopback Detection pages
362. utes to restore the configuration Please wait without any operation 2 To avoid any damage please don t power down the switch while being restored 3 After being restored the current settings of the switch will be lost Wrong uploaded configuration file may cause the switch unmanaged 4 3 2 Config Backup On this page you can download the current configuration and save it as a file to your computer for your future configuration restore Choose the menu System System Tools gt Config Backup to load the following page 30 Config Backup Backup System Config Click the button Backup Config you can save the config to you computer Note It will take a long time to backup the config file Please wait without any operation Figure 4 14 Config Backup The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Config Backup Backup Config Click the Backup Config button to save the current configuration as a file to your computer You are suggested to take this measure before upgrading Anote It will take a few minutes to backup the configuration Please wait without any operation 4 3 3 Firmware Upgrade The switch system can be upgraded via the Web management page To upgrade the system is to get more functions and better performance Go to http www tp link com to download the updated firmware Choose the menu System System Tools Firmware Upgrade to load the following page Firmware Upgrade You will get the
363. uthentication the following screen will appear Connecting Successfully authenticated Network is connected Figure C 15 Successfully Authenticated 5 Double click the icon on the right corner of desktop and then the following connection status screen will pop up Connection status Connection Status Connected Duration 00 00 26 Activities Received e Sent Packets 5 4 cise0o Figure C 16 Connection Status 1 4 FAQ Q1 Why does this error dialog box pop up when starting up the TP LINK 802 1X Client Software 288 TpSupplicant English exe Unable To Locate Component 4 x Q This application has failed to start because wpcap dil was not found Re installing the application may Fix this problem A1 It s because the supported DLL file is missing You are suggested to go to http Awww winpcap org to download WinPcap 4 0 2 or the higher version for installation and run the client software again Q2 Is this TP LINK 802 1X Client Software compliable with the switches of the other manufacturers A2 No This TP LINK 802 1X Client Software is customized for TP LINK switches Q3 Is it safe to set the password being automatically saved A3 Yes The password saved in the configuration files is encrypted Return to CONTENTS 289 Appendix D Glossary Access Control List ACL ACLs can limit network traffic and restrict access to certain users or devices by checking each packet for certain IP
364. uto Disable Inactive O 14 Auto Disable Inactive v Note For one port it cant be the member of voice VLAN and private YLAN atthe same time Figure 10 13 Port Config Anzcte A To enable voice VLAN function for the LAG member port please ensure its member state accords with its port mode If a port is a member port of voice VLAN changing its port mode to be Auto will make the port leave the voice VLAN and will not join the voice VLAN automatically until it receives voice streams The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Port Config Port Select Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Select Select the desired port for voice VLAN configuration It is multi optional Port Displays the port number of the switch Port Mode Select the mode for the port to join the voice VLAN e Auto In this mode the switch automatically adds a port to the voice VLAN or removes a port from the voice VLAN by checking whether the port receives voice data or not e Manual In this mode you can manually add a port to the voice VLAN or remove a port from the voice VLAN Security Mode Configure the security mode for forwarding packets e Disable All packets are forwarded e Enable Only voice data are forwarded 172 Member State Displays the state of the port in the current voice VLAN LAG Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to 10 3 3
365. vacy security level is used e authNoPriv Only the authentication security level is used e authPriv Both the authentication and the privacy security levels are used assigned SNMP View can be read and modified generated by the switch s SNMP agent 224 Enter the SNMP Group name The Group Name Security Model and Security Level compose the identifier of the SNMP Group These three items of the Users in one group should be the same Select the View to be the Read View The management access is restricted to read only and changes cannot be made to the Select the View to be the Write View The management access is writing only and changes can be made to the assigned SNMP View The View defined both as the Read View and the Write View Select the View to be the Notify View The management station can receive notification messages of the assigned SNMP view gt Group Table Select Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding group It s multi optional Group Name Displays the Group Name here Security Model Displays the Security Model of the group Security Level Displays the Security Level of the group Read View Displays the Read View name in the entry Write View Displays the Write View name in the entry Notify View Displays the Notify View name in the entry Operation Click the Edit button to modify the Views in the entry and click the Modify button to apply Anote Every Group should con
366. view the complete information of this device and its neighbors Current Device Info Device Name MAC Hops Device Type IP Address TP_0 TL SL5428E 00 00 00 54 28 02 0 TL SL5428E 2 0 192 168 0 1 Firmware Version 2 9 3 Build 20130814 Rel 33255 Cluster Info Neighbor Info Native Port Port 16 Commander switch of the cluster TP Remote Port Device MAC Speed Mbit s Duplex Gi1 0 07 00 14 78 00 00 CA 100 FullDuplex Figure 15 6 Information of the Current Device 15 2 2 NTDP Summary On this page you can view the NTDP configuration Choose the menu Cluster NTDP NTDP Summary to load the following page 253 Global Config NTDP NTDP Interval Time NTDP Hops NTDP Hop Delay NTDP Port Delay Port Status Port SM nw 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 Enable 1min 3hop 200ms 20ms NTDP Port NTDP Enable 2 Enable Enable 4 Enable Enable 6 Enable Enable 8 Enable Enable 10 Enable Enable 12 Enable Enable 14 Enable Enable 16 Enable Enable 18 Enable Enable 20 Enable Enable 22 Enable Enable 24 Enable Enable 26 Enable Enable 28 Enable Figure 15 7 NTDP Summary The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config NTDP NTDP Interval Time NTDP Hops NTDP Hop Delay NTDP Port Delay gt Port Status Port NTDP 15 2 3 NTDP Config Displays the NTDP status enabled or disabled of the switch globally Displays the interval to collect topology information
367. w double click on the Internet Protocol TCP IP 277 4 Local Area Connection Properties General Authentication Advanced Connect using E9 Realtek RTL8139 Family PCI Fast Ett This connection uses the following items QoS Packet Scheduler M 3F AEGIS Protocol IEEE 802 1x v3 4 3 0 Internet Protocol TCP IP e b Install Uninstall Properties Description Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks J Show icon in notification area when connected IV Notify me when this connection has limited or no connectivity Figure B 2 5 The following Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window will display and the IP Address tab is open on this window by default Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if pour network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address IP address 192 168 0 241 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default gateway 192 168 0 1 Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server Alternate DNS server Advanced Figure B 3 278 6 Select Use
368. w the detailed Ethernet OAM traffic information of a specific port The device will recount the numbers every time you click the clear button or the device is rebooted To start or stop the remote loopback Choose the menu Ethernet OAM Statistics Statistics to load the following page Statistics Information OAMPDUs Unique Event Notification OAMPDUs Duplicate Event Notification OAMPDUs Variable Request OAMPDUs Variable Response OAMPDUs Loopback Control OAMPDUs Organization Specific OAMPDUs Unsupported OAMPDUs Frames Lost Due To OAM Port fi Rx x O O JO O O O O O O o rolo lo la oa la a Figure 8 9 Statistics The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Statistics Port Select Tx Rx Information OAMPDUs Unique Event Notification OAMPDUs Duplicate Event Notification OAMPDUs Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Displays the number of OAMPDUs that have been transmitted on the port Displays the number of OAMPDUs that have been received on the port Displays the number of information OAMPDUs that have been transmitted or received on the port Displays the number of unique event notification OAMPDUs that have been transmitted or received on the port Displays the number of duplicate event notification OAMPDUs that have been transmitted or received on the port 123 Variable OAMPDUs
369. witch Choose the menu Cluster NDP NDP Summary to load the following page Global Config NDP Aging Time Hello Time Port Status Part 0 0 Ml hh UN gt pare ere a nm o 2 NDP Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable 180sec 60sec Send NDP Receive NDP Error NDP Packets Packets Packets Neighbors Detail 0 0 0 0 Detail 2 83 106 0 3 Detail 0 0 0 0 Detail 0 0 0 Detail 0 0 0 Detail 83 0 0 0 Detail 0 0 0 0 Detail 0 0 0 0 Detail D 0 0 0 Detail 0 0 0 0 Detail 0 0 0 0 Detail D 0 0 0 Detail 5 Figure 15 3 NDP Summary 249 The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config NDP Aging Time Hello Time Port Status Port NDP Send NDP Packets Receive NDP Packets Error NDP Packets Neighbors Detail 15 1 3 NDP Config On this page you can configure the NDP function for the switch Displays the global NDP status enabled or disabled for the switch Displays the period for the neighbor switch to keep the NDP packets from this switch Displays the interval to send NDP packets Displays the port number of the switch Displays the NDP status enabled or disabled for the current port Displays the count of currently sent NDP packets Displays the count of currently received NDP packets Displays the count of currently received error NDP packets Displays the count of the co
370. y Source IP Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the VLAN ID you entered Select the desired entry It is multi optional Displays the ID of the VLAN that enables IGMP Snooping Querier Displays the Query Interval of the IGMP Snooping Querier Displays the maximal time for the host to respond to a general query frame sent by IGMP Snooping Querier Displays the source IP of the general query frame sent by IGMP Snooping Querier Displays the time interval of sending specific query frames by IGMP Snooping Querier Displays the times of sending specific query frames by IGMP Snooping Querier Displays the source IP of the specific query frame sent by IGMP Snooping Querier 9 2 MLD Snooping gt MLD Snooping Multicast Listener Discovery MLD snooping is applied for efficient distribution of IPv6 multicast data to clients and routers in a Layer 2 network With MLD snooping IPv6 multicast data is selectively forwarded to a list of ports that want to receive the data instead of being flooded to all ports in a VLAN The list is constructed and maintained by snooping IPv6 multicast control packets MLD snooping performs a similar function in IPv6 as IGMP snooping in IPv4 The switch running MLD Snooping listens to the MLD messages transmitted between the host and the router and tracks the MLD messages and the registered port When receiving MLD report message the switch adds the port to the multic
371. y Required On ACL gt Policy Config configuration pages configure the policy to control the data packets those match the corresponding ACL rules 4 Bind the policy to the Required On ACL Policy Binding configuration pages port VLAN bind the policy to the port VLAN to make the policy effective on the corresponding port VLAN 11 5 Application Example for ACL gt Network Requirements 1 The manager of the R amp D department can access to the forum of the company without any forbiddance The MAC address of the manager is 00 64 A5 5D 12 C3 2 The staff of the R amp D department can visit the forum during the working time 3 The staff of the marketing department can not visit the forum during the working time 4 The R amp D department and marketing department can not communicate with each other 186 gt Network Diagram R amp D Department 10 10 70 0 Switch ZE ZE Ge RQ 10 10 88 5 00 64 A5 32 4C 12 Marketing Department 10 10 50 0 Manager 00 64 A5 5D 12 C3 gt Configuration Procedure Step Operation Description 1 Configure On ACL Time Range page create a time range named work_time Time range Select Week mode and configure the week time from Monday to Friday Add a time slice 08 00 18 00 2 Configure for On ACL ACL Config ACL Create page create ACL 11 requirement 1 On ACL ACL Config MAC ACL page select ACL 11 create Rule 1 configure the opera
372. you to Enable Disable the port When Enable is selected the port can forward the packets normally Speed and Duplex Select the Speed and Duplex mode for the port The device connected to the switch should be in the same Speed and Duplex mode with the switch When Auto is selected the Speed and Duplex mode will be determined by auto negotiation Flow Control Allows you to Enable Disable the Flow Control feature When Flow Control is enabled the switch can synchronize the speed with its peer to avoid the packet loss caused by congestion LAG Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to Avot 1 The switch can not be managed through the disabled port Please enable the port which is used to manage the switch 2 The parameters of the port members in a LAG should be set as the same 5 1 2 Port Mirror Port Mirror the packets obtaining technology functions to forward copies of packets from one multiple ports mirrored port to a specific port mirroring port Usually the mirroring port is connected to a data diagnose device which is used to analyze the mirrored packets for monitoring and troubleshooting the network Choose the menu Switching gt Port Port Mirror to load the following page Mirroring Port Mirroring Port Disable v Mirrored Port pot Select Port Ingress Egress LAG O Disable v Disable O 1 Disable Disable 4 Fj 2 Disable Disable O 3 Disable Disable oO 4 Disable Disa
373. ystem identification ID A lower system priority value indicates a higher system priority When exchanging information between systems the system with higher priority determines which link aggregation a link belongs to and the system with lower priority adds the proper links to the link aggregation according to the selection of its partner Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Select the desired port for LACP configuration It is multi optional Displays the port number Specify an Admin Key for the port The member ports in a dynamic aggregation group must have the same Admin Key Specify a Port Priority for the port This value determines the priority of the port to be selected as the dynamic aggregation group member The port with smaller Port Priority will be considered as the preferred one If the two port priorities are equal the port with smaller port number is preferred 52 Status Enable Disable the LACP feature for your selected port LAG Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to 5 3 Traffic Monitor The Traffic Monitor function monitoring the traffic of each port is implemented on the Traffic Summary and Traffic Statistics pages 5 3 1 Traffic Summary Traffic Summary screen displays the traffic information of each port which facilitates you to monitor the traffic and analyze the network abnormity Choose the menu Switching Traffic Mon

TP-Link TL-SL5428E V3 User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents